JPH07235099A - Recording and reproducing device - Google Patents

Abstract

PURPOSE:To enable the magnetic recording and reproducing of the information to be per independently of an optical recording function without increasing the number of components so much by providing a magnetic recording layer on the side opposite to the light reading side of a recording medium and also providing a magnetic head on the side opposite to an optical head to this recording medium. CONSTITUTION:At the time of magneto-optical reproduction, the light from a light emitting part is converged on an optical recording layer 4 by the optical head 6 and an optical recording block 7, then the magneto-optical recorded recording signal is reproduced. At the time of optical recording operation, the laser beam is converged on a specific part of the optical recording layer 4 by the optical head 6 and the optical recording block 7, and the temperature is raised to be higher than the Curie temperature. In this state, the magneto-optical recording is performed by modulating a magnetic field impressed on this part by the magnetic head 8 and the magnetic recording block 9. At the time of magnetic recording operation, the recording is made on the magnetic recording layer 3 by using the magnetic head 8 and the magnetic recording block 9. In this case, the use of a head of 1.5-200mum head gap is preferable by providing the magnetic head on the side of the layer 3.

Description

Detailed Description of the Invention

[0001]

FIELD OF THE INVENTION The present invention relates to a recording / reproducing apparatus for recording or reproducing information on a recording medium.

[0002]

2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, applications of optical discs are expanding in various fields. Optical disks are divided into recordable RAM disks and non-recordable ROM disks.
RAM disk is 5 to 10 times as much as ROM disk
Double media manufacturing cost is high. In addition to this, in the case of the RAM disk, it takes real time to record the software, so that the recording of the software at the time of manufacturing causes an additional manufacturing cost. On the other hand, a ROM disk is recorded with software in a few seconds at the time of manufacturing using a stamper. Therefore, there is an advantage that the manufacturing cost of the soft recording is almost zero. Therefore, the ROM is used for the purpose of distributing a large amount of information to a large number of people, for example, the electronic publishing application, the application for supplying the music software or the image software, and the application requiring the low media cost.
Discs are mainly used. On the other hand, RAM disks are used only for extremely limited applications such as external storage devices for personal computers and workstations, and at present, ROM disks occupy 95% or more of the optical disk market share.

However, CDROM game machines and CDROMs
As the applications for interactive use have expanded as seen in built-in personal computers, ROM disks are also required to have RAM functions. For example, in the case of a game machine, when the game is restarted, it is required to restart the game from the time when the game was last ended. For this reason, the function of saving the progress and final result at the end of the game is essential. For this reason CDROM
In a game machine using a ROM disk such as the one described above, a method of storing data in a nonvolatile memory provided in the main body, an IC card outside the main body, or an SRAM memory with a battery backup attached to a disk case is adopted. In the case of a game machine, the memory capacity to be stored may be as small as 2 kB to 8 kB. However, even in order to save this small capacity, the manufacturing cost of the non-volatile IC memory is several times higher than that of the ROM disk, so that the total cost of the small capacity RAM and the ROM disk is several times higher than that of the ROM disk. .

Other consumer interactive devices, such as home educational devices, require a small-capacity RAM for the learner's score management. A small capacity RAM for managing the tempo is required. As described above, there are few applications for which a large RAM is required for consumer use. For consumer interactive applications such as consumer multimedia devices, the emergence of new media that fulfills the three conditions of small capacity RAM function, large capacity ROM function and low cost has been awaited.

[0005]

DISCLOSURE OF THE INVENTION Problems to be Solved by the Invention As one of the answers to this demand, a disk with a new media concept called a partial ROM disk has recently appeared, and a prototype is being made, and expectations are increasing. This is a combination of the two advantages of the large-capacity RAM function of the RAM disk and the mass-productivity of the ROM disk for large-capacity software recording. A specific configuration is a system in which a ROM area is provided in a partial area of a RAM disk such as a magneto-optical disk or a write-once disk, and software is collectively recorded at the time of disk manufacturing by a stamper. This method certainly has both mass production function of large-capacity ROM and large-capacity RAM function.
Meet the conditions. However, since the third low cost condition is not satisfied, the partial ROM disk can be used for industrial multimedia applications such as office work, but is not suitable for consumer interactive applications in terms of price. It was The reason why the cost of this partial ROM is high is that the RAM disk is diverted. The cost is lower if it is based on a ROM disk. As noted above, we have focused on the fact that a large amount of RAM is not required for consumer multimedia applications.

Since a large amount of information is produced in a company, a large RAM capacity is required for an industrial recording medium.
However, at home, A, such as video and audio
Except for V information, the amount of information produced is much smaller than that of companies, and therefore, the consumer interactive recording medium requires only a small RAM capacity. On the other hand, since the amount of information in newspapers and TV programs is large, the amount of information supplied to the home is large.
For this reason, consumer interactive media generally require a large ROM capacity. Large capacity RO
It can be said that a memory with M and a small amount of RAM, in other words, a "partial RAM disk" is required for consumer interactive applications. The partial RAM disk is an inexpensive ROM disk in which a small RAM is added at a negligibly low cost, and is a concept for realizing a consumer memory at a cost close to that of a ROM disk although the RAM capacity is small. One way to realize this concept is R0M
This is a method of providing a single magnetic recording layer on the back surface of the disk. In this case, the step of forming the recording layer can be performed at 1/10 or less of the cost of the ROM disk, and thus the partial RAM disk can be realized without increasing the cost of the ROM disk.

[0007]

A conventional example will be described by narrowing down to such a partial RAM disk.

As a first method, a ROM disk such as a CDROM without a cartridge will be described. Japanese Patent Publication No. 56-163536, 57-6
No. 446, 57-212642, and 2-179951, a method of providing an optical recording portion on the front surface of a CDROM and a magnetic recording portion on the back surface thereof has already been proposed. Also, 6
As shown in 0-70543, an optical recording section made of a non-magnetic material such as an optical disk using an Amosphas material is provided on the front surface, and a disk having a magnetic recording layer on the back surface is used. It is disclosed that a head is provided for magnetic recording. However, these documents do not disclose any important matter for concretely realizing a medium or device simply by simply combining a magnetic recording unit and an optical recording unit. For example, a method of preventing mutual interference between the optical recording section and the magnetic recording section, a method of accessing a magnetic track with a simple configuration, a method of sharing a circuit, or a magnetic field of a medium used without a cartridge, which is important when realizing a device. A method to protect the recorded information from the external environment such as magnetism and wear, and a RAM
It does not disclose a method of compressing information recorded in the area, a method of speeding up access, a specific physical format of a track, or the like.

Further, a method of mass-producing an important medium for realizing the medium at a low cost, a method of making the medium conform to the CD standard, etc., that is, a method for concretely realizing a consumer partial RAM disk is not completely satisfactory. It has not been disclosed in the conventional example. Therefore, the method disclosed heretofore has a serious problem in that it is difficult to practically put into practical use a medium and a system that can be used for consumer use. In the present invention, the first method is CD
A method for specifically implementing a ROM disk type partial RAM disk and system used without a cartridge such as a ROM for the above items is disclosed.

As the second method, generally, a disc having a recording function is provided with a cartridge. Therefore,
The ROM disc, which is compatible with the recording disc, also has a cartridge. Recordable MD mini-discs, which have recently appeared, abbreviated as MD ROM discs or MDROMs
Has been proposed recently. The recordable MD disc records music magneto-optically. Therefore, a method of combining the magneto-optical drive and the magnetic recording function can be considered. A conventional example of this method is described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 60-57558.
As described above, there is also disclosed a system in which a magneto-optical recording area is provided on a part of the surface and a magnetic recording portion is provided on another area of the surface. However, a medium with an optical recording layer on the front side of the back side of the transparent substrate of the medium and a magnetic recording layer on the back side is used, and a magneto-optical head is provided on the front side of the medium on the device side. It is disclosed that a contact type magnetic field modulation head is provided on the side for direct recording from the magnetic field modulation head, or that magnetic recording is performed on the magnetic recording layer by a magnetic recording head integrally formed with the magnetic field modulation head. Not not. That is, the method of providing the magnetic field modulation type head unit with the magnetic recording function or integrating the magnetic head has not been disclosed in the conventional example. As described above regarding the conventional example, as a method for providing a ROM function without a cartridge and a ROM disk with a cartridge with a RAM function, a method that is specifically realized has not been disclosed in the conventional method.

[0011]

In order to achieve this object, a recording / reproducing apparatus of the present invention uses a recording medium having a transparent substrate and an optical recording layer to emit light from a light source by an optical head, and the optical recording layer from the transparent substrate side. In a recording / reproducing apparatus for recording or reproducing a signal by forming an image on the recording medium, a magnetic recording layer is provided on the side opposite to the optical reading side of the recording medium, and the magnetic recording layer is provided on the side opposite to the optical head with respect to the recording medium. It has a structure provided with a head.

[0012]

With this configuration, the magnetic disk tracks the magnetic track of the disk in association with the tracking of the optical head on the magnetic recording layer provided on the surface opposite to the reading side of the optical recording medium, and magnetic recording or reproduction is possible. Therefore, magnetic recording and reproduction of information can be performed completely independently of the optical recording function without increasing the number of parts.

[0013]

【Example】

(Embodiment 1) An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 1 shows a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus according to the present invention. The recording / reproducing apparatus 1 has therein a recording medium 2 including a magnetic recording layer 3, an optical recording layer 4 for optical recording, and a light transmitting layer 5.

At the time of magneto-optical reproduction, the light from the light emitting portion is converged on the optical recording layer 4 by the optical head 6 and the optical recording block 7, and the recording signal recorded magneto-optically is reproduced. At the time of optical recording, the laser light is focused on a specific portion of the optical recording layer 4 by the optical head 6 and the optical recording block 7, and the temperature thereof is raised to the Curie temperature or higher. In this state, the magnetic head 8
The magnetic recording block 9 modulates the magnetic field applied to this portion to perform conventional magneto-optical recording.

At the time of magnetic recording, a magnetic signal is recorded on the magnetic recording layer 3 by using the magnetic head 8 and the magnetic recording block 9. The system control unit 10 obtains operation information and output information from each circuit, drives the drive block 11, and drives the motor 12
Control, tracking of the optical head 6, and focus control.

The detailed operation will be described below. When recording an input signal from the outside, a recording command is sent from the keyboard 15 or the external interface unit 14 to the system control unit 10 when the external input signal is received or the operator operates a key. The system control unit 10 sends an input command to the input unit 12 and sends an optical recording command to the optical recording block 7. An input from the outside, for example, an audio or video signal is input to the input unit 12 and becomes a digital signal such as PCM. This signal is sent to the input section 32 of the optical recording block 7, is subjected to error correction coding by the ECC encoder 35, and is passed through the optical circuit 37 to the magnetic recording circuit 29 and the magnetic head circuit 31 in the magnetic recording block 9. Through
The recording magnetic field sent to the magnetic head 8 is applied to the magneto-optical material within the specific range of the optical recording layer 4 according to the optical recording signal. Recording layer 4
The recording material in a narrower range is heated to the Curie temperature or higher by the laser light from the optical head 6, and the magnetization reversal of this portion occurs due to the above-mentioned applied magnetic field. Therefore, as the recording medium 2 rotates, as the recording medium 2 travels in the direction of the arrow 51 shown in the enlarged view of the optical recording head portion of FIG. It is recorded one after another as shown in the figure.

At this time, the system controller 10 controls the optical recording layer 4
The tracking information, address information, and clock information recorded above are obtained from the optical head circuit 39 and the optical reproducing circuit 38, and control information is given to the drive block 11 based on this information. More specifically, the system control unit 10 is the motor 1
By giving a control signal to the motor drive circuit 26, the relative speed between the optical head 6 and the recording medium 2 is controlled to a predetermined linear speed.

The optical head drive circuit 25 and the optical head actuator 18 control the light beam so that it scans a desired track, and also controls the focus so that the optical recording layer 4 is focused. When accessing another track, the actuator 23 and the head moving circuit 24 move the head base 19 to move the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 on the head base 19 in an interlocking manner. Therefore, both heads reach the desired front and back tracks at the same radial position. The head lifting unit 20 is driven by a magnetic head lifting circuit 22 and a lifting motor 21,
The magnetic head 8 and the slider 41 are the disk cassette 4
The magnetic head 8 is prevented from being worn away from the magnetic recording layer 3 on the disk surface of the recording medium 2 at the time of loading 2 or during the time period when magnetic recording is not performed. As described above, the system control unit 10 sends control information to the drive block 11 to control the tracking of the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8, focusing, the raising and lowering of the magnetic head 8, the rotation speed of the motor 17, and the like.

Next, a method of reproducing the magneto-optical recording signal will be described. First, using the enlarged view of the optical recording head section in FIG. 2, the laser beam from the issuing section 57 travels in the direction indicated by the optical path 59 by the polarization beam splitter 55 and is focused on the optical recording layer 4 of the recording medium 2 by the lens 54. Tie Focusing tracking control in this case is performed by driving only the lens 54 by the optical head drive unit 18. The magneto-optical material of the optical recording layer is in a magnetized state according to each optical recording signal as shown in FIG. Therefore, the deflection angle of the reflected light shown in the optical path 59a differs depending on the magnetization direction due to the Kerr effect. This polarization angle θ is obtained by splitting the reflected light by the polarization beam splitter 55a, and
Since the magnetization direction can be detected by providing 8, 58a and taking the difference between the two received light signals, the optical recording signal can be reproduced. The operation of reproducing the optical signal is the same as that of the conventional magneto-optical recording and will not be described in further detail. This reproduction signal is sent from the optical head 6 of FIG. 1 to the optical recording block 7, and the ECC is passed through the optical head circuit 39 and the optical reproduction circuit 38.
The error is corrected in the decoder 36, the original digital signal is reproduced, and is sent to the output unit 33. The output unit 33 has a memory unit 34, in which recording signals for a fixed time are accumulated. For example, when a compressed sound signal of 250 kbps is stored using a 1 Mbit IC memory, the signal can be stored for about 4 seconds. When used as an acoustic player, if the tracking of the optical head 6 is lost due to external vibration, the acoustic signal can be removed by recovering within 4 seconds. This method is well known. The signal from the output unit 33 is sent to the output unit 13 at the final stage, and in the case of an acoustic signal, it is PCM demodulated and then output as an analog acoustic signal to the outside.

Next, the magnetic recording mode will be described. In FIG. 1, an external input signal that has entered the input section or a signal from the system control section 10 is sent to the input section 21 of the magnetic circuit block 9, and the EC in the optical recording block 7 is sent.
Encoding such as error correction is performed using the C encoder 35. The encoded signal is sent to the magnetic head by the magnetic recording circuit 29 and the magnetic head circuit 31. This will be described with reference to the enlarged view of the head portion of FIG. Is done. The recording medium 2 has a perpendicular magnetization film.

As the magnetic medium 2 travels in the direction of arrow 51,
As shown in FIG. 3, magnetic signals are recorded one after another according to the magnetic recording signals. The magnetic field in this case is also applied to the magneto-optical recording layer 4, but the coercive force of the magneto-optical recording material below the Curie temperature is several thousand to 10,000 Oe, so that it is magnetized unless raised above the Curie temperature. And is not affected by the magnetic field of magnetic recording.

However, if the magnetically recorded portion of the magnetic recording layer 3 and the optical recording layer 4 using the magneto-optical recording film are too close to each other, the magnetic field from the magnetic recording portion will occur in the optical recording layer 4 portion. It may reach several tens to several hundreds Oe. For magneto-optical recording under these conditions, when the temperature of the optical recording layer 4 is raised to the Curie temperature or higher by the light beam, the magnetic field from the magnetic recording layer 3 causes magnetization reversal, which increases the error rate during optical recording. Therefore, the thickness of the interference layer 81 is provided between the magnetic recording layer 3 and the optical recording layer 4 as shown in the sectional view of the recording medium in FIG. Since the protective layers 82 and 82a for preventing deterioration are provided on both sides of the optical recording layer 4, the interference interval L is the sum of the thickness of the interference layer 81 and the protective layer 82. In this case, assuming that the magnetic recording wavelength is λ, the attenuation amount is 56.4 × L / λ, so that setting λ = 0.5 μm is effective if L is 0.2 μm or more. As shown in FIG. 8, the thickness of the protective layer 82 is set to L
Even with the above, the same effect can be obtained. A manufacturing method will be described. A protective layer 82 and an interference layer 81 are formed on the magneto-optical recording layer 4.
The magnetic recording layer 3 is formed by applying a material in which a lubricant, a binder, and a magnetic material having vertical anisotropy such as barium ferrite are mixed by spin coating while applying a magnetic field in the vertical direction. As a result, the recording medium 2 suitable for perpendicular magnetic recording can be obtained as shown in the sectional view of the recording medium in FIG.

The above is the case where the optical recording layer 4 for magneto-optical recording is provided, but the recording / reproducing apparatus 1 of the present invention can also reproduce a ROM disk such as a CD. As shown in the sectional view of the recording medium of FIG. 9, a reflective film 84 of aluminum or the like is formed on the pit portion of the substrate 5 in which pits are engraved by sputtering or the like, and a lubricant, a binder, and a magnetic material are formed thereon. By applying the mixed material to the substrate while applying a vertical magnetic field to form a magnetic recording layer 3 having a perpendicular magnetic recording film, RO
An M-type recording medium 2 is created. This media is a CD RO
Since the function as M is on the front surface and the function as RAM is on the back surface, various effects described later can be obtained. The cost increase in this case is only that the magnetic material is added to the material for forming the protective film by the spin coating which is performed in the present CD. Therefore, the manufacturing cost is increased only by the cost of the magnetic material itself. Since this cost is several tenths of the manufacturing cost of the medium, the cost increase is extremely small.

Tracking during magnetic recording will be described. As shown in FIG. 1, the system controller 10 sends a movement command to the head movement circuit 24 based on the tracking information reproduced from the optical head 6 and the optical head circuit 39, and the actuator 23.
Is driven to move the head base 19 in the tracking direction. Then, as shown in the enlarged view of the head portion only in the tracking direction of FIG. 4, the optical head 6 focuses on the vicinity of a specific optical recording track 65 of the optical recording layer 4. That is, the optical head drive unit 18 that drives the optical head 6 is mechanically coupled to the magnetic head 8 via the head base 19 and the head elevating unit 20. Therefore, the magnetic head 8 moves in the tracking direction in conjunction with the movement of the optical head. That is, if the optical head 6 is controlled to a specific optical track 66, the magnetic head 8
Moves onto a specific magnetic track 67 on the back surface of the optical track 66. Guard bands 68 on both sides of this track,
68a is provided. This is further expanded in Figure 5.
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the magnetic head portion of FIG. If the position of the optical head 6 is controlled so as to scan the specific Tn-th optical track 65, the magnetic head 8 travels on the specific Mm-th magnetic track 67 on the back surface. In this case, only the drive system of the optical head is required, and it is not necessary to separately provide the tracking control means for the magnetic head 8. The linear sensor, which was necessary in magnetic disk drives, is no longer necessary.

Next, a method of accessing the optical track and the magnetic track will be described. The optical head 6 is tracked in conjunction with the magnetic head 8. Therefore, if the optical track information currently being recorded / reproduced from the lower surface is different from the radial position of the magnetic track to be accessed from the upper surface, both cannot be accessed at the same time. In the case of data, only slow access does not cause a fatal problem, but in the case of continuous signals such as audio signals and image signals, interruption is not allowed. Therefore, magnetic recording cannot be performed during normal-speed optical recording / reproduction. In the present embodiment, the input section 32 and the output section 33 have a memory section 34, and a method of accumulating a signal for a time several times as long as the maximum access time of magnetic recording is adopted. Therefore, as shown in the timing chart of the magnetic recording of FIG. 6, the rotational speed of the recording medium 2 during recording and reproduction is n
By doubling it, the optical recording / reproducing time T becomes 1 / n of the normal speed and becomes T1 and T2. Therefore, the time T0 which is n-1 times the recording / reproducing time from t = t3 to t = t is the margin time. From t3 to t4 during a part of the spare time T0
Access to the magnetic track during the access time Ta, magnetic recording / reproduction is performed during the recording / reproducing period TR from t4 to t6, and the original optical track or By accessing and returning to the optical track of, the optical recording and the magnetic recording can be time-divisionally accessed by one head moving unit. In this case, the margin period To
During this period, the memory unit 34 is set to have a capacity capable of accumulating continuous signals.

FIG. 6 is a magnetic recording timing chart of FIG.
Track access of the magnetic head described above will be described with reference to the cross-sectional views of the recording unit shown in FIGS. First, after the cassette 42 shown in the perspective view of the cassette of FIG. 15 is inserted into the recording / reproducing apparatus 1 shown in the perspective view of the recording / reproducing apparatus of FIG. 16, first, as shown in FIG. Optical track 6 in TOC area where information is recorded
The light beam of the optical head 6 is imaged on 5 and TOC
Information is reproduced. At this time, the magnetic head 8 travels on the magnetic track 67 on the back surface, and the magnetic recording information on this track is reproduced. In this way, as the first work, the information of the optical track in the TOC of the recording medium 2 is reproduced, and at the same time, the information of the previous access recorded on the magnetic track, the information at the time of the completion of the last work, etc. are obtained. This content is displayed on the display unit 16 as shown in FIG.

As an example, in the case of acoustic information, the last music number at the end of the previous time, the elapsed time at the time of interruption, the reserved music number, etc. are automatically recorded in the magnetic recording area. Next, when the recording medium 2 is again inserted into the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus, the magnetic track 67 is added together with the index information of the optical track 65 as described above.
The information at the end of the previous time recorded in the
Is displayed as shown in FIG. In FIG. 16, the last access end time, the operator name, the last song number, the elapsed time at the time of interruption,
This shows the state in which the previously preset song order and song number are recorded and displayed. Specifically, "Contineu?" Is displayed and asked, so if you enter "Yes", music playback will resume from the point where the song with the same song number at the end of the previous time was interrupted. If you enter "No", the music will be played in the preset song order. In this way, the operator can automatically reproduce the contents that were interrupted last time or listen to them in their favorite song order. As shown in the perspective view of the game machine of FIG. 18, this is because a game CDROM device records and reproduces the content of the game that was interrupted last time, for example, the number of stages, the number of acquired points, and the number of reached items, so that a certain amount of time elapses after the game ends. When the user wants to restart the game by restarting the game in the same state from the same place as last time, an effect not obtained in the conventional CDROM type game machine is obtained. The above is the case of a simple access method for accessing the magnetic track in the TOC area. In this case, the memory capacity is small, but it has the effect of being the simplest and cheapest.

Next, the junction for accessing the tracks other than the TOC area will be described. FIG. 11 shows a state where the optical head 6 is accessing a specific optical track 65a. At this time, the magnetic head 8 interlocking with the optical head 6 causes the optical track 65 to move.
The magnetic track 67a on the back side of "a" is accessed. If the required magnetic recording information is on a magnetic track 67b, which is another track apart from the magnetic track 67a, the magnetic head 8
Need to be moved to the magnetic track 67b. In this case, as described in the timing chart of FIG. 6, it is necessary to complete the movement, recording, and return of the head during the allowance period To. In this case, in the TOC area or the specific area of the optical recording layer 4, the magnetic track NO. And the corresponding optical track No. Is recorded, and this information is read to read the required magnetic track N
O. Optical track NO. Can be calculated. Next, as shown in FIG. 12, the head base 19 is moved during the access time Ta so that the optical head 6 is fixed so as to access the optical track 65b of this optical track number. Then, the magnetic head 8 tracks a predetermined magnetic track 67b. Thus, magnetic recording or reproduction can be performed. In this case, while the optical track 65a is being tracked as shown in FIG. 13, the magnetic head 8 is lifted up by the elevating motor 21 and kept away from the magnetic recording layer, and the motor is moved as shown by ω in FIG. 6 during the access time Ta. Decrease the rotation speed of 17. While the rotational speed is decreasing, the magnetic head 8
Is lowered and brought into contact with the magnetic recording layer 3. This can prevent the magnetic head 8 from being destroyed. During TR, the rotational speed is increased to perform magnetic recording, during Tb, the rotational speed is decreased to raise the magnetic head 8 and, after raising, the rotational speed is increased again to return to the original optical track 65a as shown in FIG. During this period, optical recording / reproduction is performed. Since the data accumulated in the memory 34 is reproduced during this margin time T0, the continuous reading signal such as music is not interrupted. Also, as shown in FIG.
Even if the area C is being accessed, the magnetic head 8 is not lowered if there is an instruction that magnetic recording is not required in the TOC area. As a result, even if the recording medium 2 without the magnetic recording layer 3 is inserted, the accident that the magnetic head 8 is contacted and destroyed can be prevented. In this way, the magnetic head 8
By moving up and down during the period when the rotation speed is lowered, there is an effect that the destruction and friction of the magnetic head can be greatly reduced. FIG. 15 is a perspective view of the cassette 42 that houses the optical recording medium 2. A shutter 88, a magnetic recording prevention claw 89, and an optical recording prevention claw 89a are provided, and recording prevention can be set separately. Of course, the ROM type cassette is provided with only the magnetic recording prevention claw 89a.

FIG. 17 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus for reproducing optical recording. The optical recording block does not include the optical recording circuit and the ECC encoder as compared with FIG. Components of the magnetic head elevating part 20, the magnetic head 8 and the magnetic recording block 9 are added as compared to a general reproducing player such as a CD player, but all the components can share the components of the magneto-optical recording / reproducing apparatus of FIG. . Moreover, these costs are much lower than those of optical recording-related parts, so that the cost increase is small. Memory capacity is smaller than floppy,
Since information can be recorded in and reproduced from the ROM type recording medium at such a low cost, the above-described various effects can be obtained in the case of a game machine or a CD player that requires a small memory capacity. According to our calculation, in the case of a disk having a diameter of 60 mm, a memory capacity for magnetic recording of about 1 KB to 10 KB can be obtained by using a magnetic head for magnetic field modulation. The current game ROMIC has 2KB or 8KB of SRAM
Since it has a built-in memory, it can be said that it has a sufficient capacity.
Substituting ROMIC Here, the error correction encoder 35 and the error correction decoder 36 of FIG. 1 will be described in detail.

No error correction is performed on a normal-density exchangeable magnetic disk such as a fixed disk and a widely used 3.5-inch 2HD or 2DD floppy disk. For example, in the case of 2 HD with 3.5-inch floppy disk, which is currently the mainstream, 13
The error rate is 10 when recording and reproducing at 5 TPI.
^-12 close. Therefore, when put in the cartridge, there is no oil or scratch on the hand, so there are few burst errors,
There was no need to use error correction, including interlib. On the other hand, when the magnetic recording layer is provided on the surface of the medium surface of the CDROM or on the outer side of the back surface by coating, vapor deposition, or sputter bonding, it is used without a cartridge. Therefore, a large-scale burst error occurs due to oil on human hands, large dust, or scratches.

The medium of the present invention has Hc = 1900 Oe, and a magnetic recording layer having a space loss of 9 to 10 μm due to the printing layer and the protective layer is applied to the label side of the CD. This medium is recorded / reproduced 10 ⁶ times at 500 BPI, that is, at a wavelength of 50 μm by MFM modulation with an amorphous laminated magnetic head having a head gap of 30 μm, and the experimental results of measuring the appearance frequency of each pulse width are shown in FIG. Figure 203
(A) shows the measurement result of the pulse width up to 1 ms.
03 (b) is an enlargement of the measurement data up to 100 μs.

As shown by the arrow 51a in FIG. 203 (a), some burst errors having a long period occur for 10 ⁶ samples. Therefore, as shown in the error correction section 35 of FIGS.
ECC before or after interleaving as shown in 07
Encode. Here, error correction will be quantitatively described in detail from actual experimental data of the present invention. Figure 203
As can be seen from (b), it is 1 of MFM modulation in 10 ⁶ times.
The intervals of T, 1.5T and 2T are sufficiently open. Therefore, considering a case where the conditions are bad, an error rate of about 10 ⁻⁵ to 10 ⁻⁶ may occur.

The occurrence of burst errors is so large that it cannot be seen in a disk, such as a floppy disk, contained in a cartridge.
There are also several orders of magnitude more random errors. In other words, it can be seen that interleaving and strong error correction are necessary to use without a cartridge. However, if the error correction code amount is increased too much, the redundancy increases and the data amount decreases. Therefore, as a target value for the burst error countermeasure, the CD scratch tolerance standard is used as a reference. The probability of scratches on the outer surface is the same on both the optical recording surface and the label surface. Figure 204 is C
The error correction capability for scratches on the optical recording surface in the case of D is shown. When 4 symbols are corrected, a flaw of 14 frames at the maximum, that is, a flaw having a size of 2.38 mm can be corrected. The interleave length is 108 frames, that is, 18.36 mm. Therefore, 2.3 is also applied to the magnetic recording layer.
Optimal redundancy can be obtained by selecting an error correction capability including interleaving so that an error can be corrected for a flaw of 8 mm or less. This way, the user can
Even if the magnetic recording portion is damaged in the same manner as in the case of handling the ROM, the error correction including the interleave of the present invention, the error correction by the encoder 35 and the decoder 36, and the data error does not occur. Therefore, the recording medium of the present invention has a great effect that even if the recording medium is scratched like a CD, the data reproduction is not hindered at all. The effect is that the user can handle it as easily as a CD.

In the case of the present invention, the interleave of 18 mm or more and the error correction of Reed-Solomon are used, and as shown in FIG. It was confirmed by an experiment that a scratch of 3 mm can be corrected in the part. It has been found that under these conditions, it is possible to correct a scratch of 2.38 mm or more, which is equivalent to a CD. That is, FIG.
As shown in 05, the interleave length L _D on the data is taken and the physical interleave length L _{M is set} to 18 mm or more on the medium surface. Then, as shown in the error rate diagram of FIG. 206, by setting the data amount of the error correction code of Reed-Solomon or the like to a value 0.08 to 0.32 times as large as the original data, it is possible to perform the error correction for the scratches equivalent to the CD. That is a great effect. In this case, error correction can be performed with a minimum required redundancy corresponding to a scratch on the level of a CD, so that the overall data recording / reproducing efficiency is optimized and the substantial recording capacity is maximized.

Here, the overall circuit configuration will be described. Figure 20
2 is an error correction encoder 35 and a decoder 3 of FIG.
6 in detail, the magnetic recording signal is a Reed-Solomon decoder 35a for performing a Reed-Solomon encoding operation.
ECC is encoded by the interleave unit 35.
b in the interleave table of FIG. 207,
A parity 452a in the horizontal direction is added to the ECC-encoded data string that is continuous in the horizontal direction of the arrows 51a and 51aa. When this data string is read out in the vertical direction as shown by arrow 51b, the original data is separated by the dispersion distance L on the medium surface as shown in FIG. 207 (b), and even if a burst error occurs. It can be restored by the parity 452. By converting the dispersion distance L on the medium surface to 19 mm or more as described above, a recovery capability comparable to that of a CD can be obtained. When the data magnetically recorded in this way is reproduced, the reproduction signal is the deinterleave 36b shown in FIG.
At this point, the data is once mapped to the RAM 36x and the address conversion is performed in the opposite manner to the case of FIG. 207, whereby the magnetically recorded data recorded in a dispersed manner is returned to the original array. Then, in the Reed-Solomon decoder 36a shown in FIG. 209 (b), as shown in the flow chart of FIG. 210, for example, P and Q parities and recording data are input in step 452b, and the syndromes S ₁ and S ₂ are calculated in step 452c. At 452d, S ₁ = S ₂ = 0
Only in case of, go to step 452g, output data,
If there is an error, an error correction calculation is performed in step 452e, and data is output in step 452g only when the error is corrected in step 452f. The CD has a high data rate and the EFM demodulation clock is 4.3218M.
Hz. Therefore, for error correction, data processing is performed using a dedicated IC. However, the demodulation clock of the magnetic recording / reproducing unit of the present invention is as shown in the experimental data of FIG.
At 30 Kbps, the data rate is 1/100 of that of a CD. Focusing on the point that the amount of data processing is small, FIG.
In the block diagram of FIG. 5, an error correction coding unit 35 for the magnetic recording / reproducing signal is used while the dedicated IC is used for error correction of the optical reproducing signal
The signal processing of the error correction decoding unit 36 is performed by the system control unit 1
A block surrounded by a thick dotted frame including 0 is time-divided by using one microcomputer 10a to perform the interleave of FIG. 207 and the error correction calculation shown in the flowchart of FIG. 210.

The microcomputer is 8 bits or 16 bits
The CPU chip with a clock of 10 to several tens of MHz is used. As shown in FIG. 210, the system control routine 45
2p and the error correction calculation routine 452a are processed in a time division manner. The system control routine is started in step 452h, the motor rotation is controlled in step 452j, the actuators such as head elevation and traverse are controlled in step 452k, and the drive display and the input / output drive system of the drive system are controlled in step 452m. If the control is performed and one work unit of the system control is completed in step 452n and the error correction processing is necessary, the error correction operation routine of step 452q is entered, and the interleave or the interleave described in FIG. Deinterleave processing,
The error correction calculation is performed in steps 452b to 452g as described above.

The data rate of the optical reproduction signal of the CD is 1 Mb.
Since there is more than ps, a normal one-chip microcomputer for drive control cannot perform an error correction operation in terms of processing ability. However, the data rate of the magnetic recording signal of the present invention is 30.
Since it is about kbps, system control and error correction calculation can be performed in a time-division manner with one 1-chip microcomputer having a commercially available clock frequency of about 10 MHz of 8 bits or 16 bits. Therefore, the error correction for optical reproduction is performed by the dedicated IC, and the error correction work for magnetic recording / reproduction is time-divisionally processed by the control microcomputer, so that an error correction circuit need not be added. As a result, it is not necessary to newly add an interleave and an error correction circuit, and thus an effect that the configuration is young and simple can be obtained.

The block diagram of FIG. 211 adopts a method of performing error correction once before and after interleaving.
Although the arrangement is changed, the basic configuration is the same as that in FIGS. 1 and 202, and therefore the description thereof is omitted and only the error correction unit will be described. First, the magnetic recording data is C in the error correction code part 35.
ECC with 2 Reed-Solomon error correction encoder 35a
212 is encoded, C2 parity 45 is added, and the data in the horizontal direction of the arrow 51a direction in the table is read out in the direction of arrow 51b and the vertical direction in the interleave unit 35b as shown in FIG. 212 (a). After the data is output as described above, and for example, A1 and A2 are dispersed by the dispersion distance L1, the Reed-Solomon C1 error correction encoder 35c performs vertical error correction encoding to add C1 parity 453, and Magnetically recorded on. At the time of reproduction, after being demodulated by the MFM demodulator 30d, random errors are first corrected by the Reed-Solomon C1 error correction unit by C1 parity, and then the deinterleave unit 3 is used.
6b, the data is mapped in the RAM 36x of FIG. 208, and is converted into the data in the horizontal direction of the original table by the reverse address conversion of FIG. 212 and is output. In this way, burst errors are dispersed and become random errors. After this, FIG.
In the Reed Solomon C2 error correction unit 36a, the random error is corrected and error-free data is reproduced and output.

In the case of the method of FIG. 211, error correction is performed in two stages before and after interleaving, so that an effect of being stronger against burst errors can be obtained. In the case of the present invention, as shown in the experimental data, the one-step error correction shown in FIG. 202 is sufficient. Although the basic system is realized by one-step correction, it is desirable to use the two-step error correction shown in FIG. 211 when recording / reproducing specially important data such as a personal identification number or an amount of money.

As described above, since the influence of scratches is unavoidable in the hybrid media having the magnetic recording portion on the outer surface of the CD without the cartridge, normal data cannot be output in the conventional floppy-like configuration. By carrying out one-step or two-step error correction and interleaving as shown in FIGS.

(Second Embodiment) A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 19 is an overall block diagram of the second embodiment. 19 shows the magnetic head 8a shown in FIG. 1 described in the first embodiment.
And a magnetic head circuit 31a are added. Since the other parts are the same, the description is omitted. As in the enlarged view of the magnetic head portion of FIG. 20, first, the magnetic head 8 performs magnetic recording with a long recording wavelength over the entire magnetic recording layer 3, as in the first embodiment. Next, the magnetic head 8a
Performs magnetic recording with a short recording wavelength on the surface layer portion 3a. Then, finally, magnetic recording can be performed on the surface layer portion 3a with an independent channel of a short wavelength subchannel and on the deep layer portion 3b with an independent channel of a long wavelength main channel. As a result, when a long-wavelength magnetic head such as the magnetic head for magnetic field modulation of Example 1 is used to reproduce a magnetic recording layer having two-layer recording as shown in FIG. 20 of Example 2. , The above main channels can be played. Therefore, if the summary information is recorded in the main channel and the detailed information is recorded in the sub channel, the summary information can be obtained even in the method of the first embodiment, and the compatibility between the two can be obtained. The magnified view of the magnetic head portion of FIG. 21 shows a case where only the short wavelength magnetic head 8 is mounted. In this case, the signal in which the main channel is superimposed on the above-mentioned sub-channel signal is reproduced, and both the main and sub channels Since the data can be reproduced, the cost can be reduced by adopting this configuration in the case of a reproduction-only machine. In the enlarged view of the magnetic head portion of FIG. 22, the upper part of the drawing is a magnetic field modulation head, that is, the case where recording is performed by the magnetic head 8 suitable for a long wavelength.
If the non-magnetized portion is 0, the magnetized regions 1 and 120a are 12
0 is recorded at 0b and 1 is recorded at 120C, and a data string 121 of "101" is obtained. As shown in the lower part of the figure, assuming that the N pole portion is 1 and the non-magnetized portion is 0 using the perpendicular magnetic head 8b suitable for a short wavelength, the data string 122 indicates "101".
10110 ", which is the same area 1 as the upper area 120a
8 bits can be recorded in 20d. When the signal of this area 120d is reproduced by the magnetic head 8, only the N pole is present, so "1"
To judge. This is the same as the area 120a. That is, "1" in the data string 122a can be reproduced. Next, in the region 120e, the S pole portion is "0" and the non-magnetized portion is "1".
If you define, "0100101"
0 "and 8 bits are recorded. When this is reproduced by the magnetic head 8, it is judged as" 0 "because it has only the south pole.
It is a signal having the same polarity as that of the region 120b is reproduced with a slightly weaker amplitude. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22, in the magnetic head 8b for short wavelength, the data string 122a of the main channel D1 is used.
And the signal of the data string 122 of the sub-channel D2 are recorded and reproduced, and the magnetic head 8 for long wavelength for magnetic field modulation reproduces the data string 122a of the main channel D1.
The effect that both are compatible can be obtained. The gap of the magnetic head 8 for magnetic field modulation is 0.2 to 2 μm.

(Embodiment 3) A third embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 23 is an enlarged view of the recording section of the third embodiment.
In the third embodiment, first, on the transparent substrate 5 of the recording medium 2, the reflective film 8 having the pits as shown in FIG.
4 and the magnetic recording film 3 are the same, but C
0-Ferrite is formed by plasma CVD or the like. Since this material has a light-transmitting property, it has a high light-transmitting property when the thickness is thin.

As shown in FIG. 23, a focus 66 is formed on the medium from the back side by the optical head 6. The lens 54 of the optical head 6 is connected to the slider 41 made of a light transmitting material by a connecting portion 150 having a spring effect. Further, the magnetic head 8 is embedded in the slider 41. Therefore, the optical head reads the pits of the reflective film 84 from the back side, and tracking and focus are controlled. Then, the slider connected to this is subjected to tracking control and travels on a specific optical track. The positional error between the lens 54 and the slider 41 is generated only by the spring effect of the connecting portion 150, so that the slider 41 is controlled in the order of microns. Next, since the up and down direction is interlocked with the focus control, it is controlled in the order of several microns to several + microns.

Then, magnetic recording is sequentially performed on the magnetic recording layer 3. In the case of this embodiment, since optical tracking is possible, there is a great effect that a track pitch of several microns can be realized. Further, since the slider 41 and the magnetic head 8 are controlled in the vertical direction by the focus control, they follow the surface accuracy of the substrate 5 of the recording medium 2 even if it is poor. For this reason, since a substrate having a poor surface accuracy can be used, there is an effect that a plastic substrate or a non-polished glass substrate, which is much cheaper than a polished glass substrate, can be used.

Further, FIG. 23 shows a case of reproducing from the back surface of the recording medium 2 by the optical head 6. However, since it is possible to reproduce the same recording medium from the surface by a mechanism like a conventional optical disk player, there is an effect of compatibility. Then, there is a remarkable effect that a memory capacity larger than that of the conventional one by one digit or more can be obtained by the optical tracking.

(Embodiment 4) A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 24 shows a block diagram of the recording / reproducing apparatus of the fourth embodiment. The fourth embodiment has the same configuration and basic operation as the recording / reproducing apparatus of FIG. 1 described in the first embodiment. Therefore, detailed description is omitted and only different parts will be described.
The difference between the fourth embodiment and the first embodiment is that in the first embodiment, the magnetic head 8 uses the magneto-optical recording magnetic field modulation head as it is, so that the perpendicular recording is performed as shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in the enlarged view of the magnetic recording portion in FIG. 25, the magnetic recording layer of the recording medium 3 is used by using the magnetic head 8 having two functions of magnetic field modulation for magneto-optical recording and horizontal magnetic recording. Three
Horizontal recording is performed. The equivalent head gap of the magnetic field modulation head of the first embodiment, for example, the MD head, is usually 100.
Since it is as large as μm or more, the recording wavelength λ becomes a long wavelength of several hundred μm. In this case, a demagnetizing field is generated and the magnetic charge actually recorded is attenuated, so that the reproduction output is lowered. The first embodiment has an extremely great advantage that the cost does not increase because the configuration is not changed at all, but has a disadvantage that the reproduction output decreases.

Horizontal recording is more suitable when a high reproduction output is required for long wavelength recording. In order to realize this horizontal recording, the fourth embodiment basically changes the recording system from the vertical recording to the horizontal recording by changing the configuration of the magnetic head in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 25, the magnetic head 8 of the fourth embodiment has a main pole 8a that also functions as a magnetic head for magnetic field modulation, a sub-pole 8b for forming a closed magnetic path, and a head gap 8c having a gap length L and a coil. It consists of 40. This magnetic head 8 can be regarded as a ring head having a gap length L during horizontal recording. In addition, when magnetic field modulation type magneto-optical recording is performed, a uniform magnetic field is applied to the optical recording layer 4. First, in the case of the magnetic recording mode shown in FIG. 25, the optical head 6 focuses the optical recording layer 4 to read the track information or address information, and controls the optical head 6 so that the focus 66 of a predetermined optical track tracks. To be done. Along with this, the magnetic head 8 connected to the optical head 6 also runs on a predetermined magnetic track.
FIG. 25 is a view as seen from the direction perpendicular to the traveling direction. As the recording medium 2 travels in the direction of arrow 51, the magnetic recording block 9
Horizontal magnetic recording signals 61 are successively recorded on the magnetic recording layer 3 in accordance with the recording signals sent from the magnetic recording layer 3. If the gap length is L and the recording wavelength is λ, then λ> 2L. Therefore, the smaller the gap length L, the larger the recording capacity can be.
However, when L is made small, the range of the uniform magnetic field becomes narrow when the modulating magnetic field for magneto-optical recording is generated. For this reason, the recordable range of the focal point 66 of the optical head is narrowed, and the dimensional accuracy of the recording medium and the tracking mechanism must be increased, which increases the cost. As shown in the enlarged view of the magneto-optical recording in FIG. 26, when performing the magneto-optical recording, the laser light from the optical head 6 heats the focal point 66 of the optical recording layer 4 to reach the Curie temperature or higher. Then, the modulation magnetic field 8 by the magnetic head 8
The portion of the focal point 66 of the optical recording layer 4 is magnetized in the same direction as the magnetic field direction of 5, and the optical recording signal 52 is recorded one after another. In this case, the positional relationship between the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 facing each other depends on the dimensional accuracy of the tracking mechanism such as the head base 19 as described above. In the case of MD, the standard of dimensional accuracy is loose to reduce the cost. Therefore, in consideration of the worst condition, the positional relationship between the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 may be greatly changed. Therefore, the range of the uniform magnetic field region 8e is required to be as wide as possible. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26, by providing the narrowed portion 8d on the main magnetic pole portion 8a of the magnetic head 8, the magnetic fluxes 85a and 85b on the right side are converged and the magnetic field is strengthened. Therefore, the magnetic flux 85c, 85d, 85e, 85f
And has the effect of expanding the uniform magnetic field region 8e. In this way, even if the relative positional relationship between the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 is deviated and the relative position between the focal point 66 and the magnetic head 8 is deviated, the optimum modulation magnetic field is obtained when the focal point 66 is within the range of the uniform magnetic field region 8e. , The magneto-optical recording is surely performed, and the error rate is not deteriorated.

Further, as shown in an enlarged view of the magneto-optical recording portion of FIG. 31, the magnetic flux of the magnetic recording signal 61 of the magnetic recording layer 3 is the magnetic flux 8.
6a, 86b, 86c, 86d. Therefore, at the time of magneto-optical recording, the magnetic field of the magnetic flux 86a due to the magnetic recording signal 61 and the magnetic head 8 are applied to the magneto-optical recording material at the focal point 66 portion of the optical recording layer 4 which has reached the Curie temperature or higher due to the focal point 66.
Two magnetic fields of the modulation magnetic field from are added. If the magnitude of the magnetic field of the magnetic flux 86a is larger than the magnitude of the modulating magnetic field from the magnetic head 8, the magneto-optical recording by the modulating magnetic field in this portion will not operate normally. Therefore, it is necessary to suppress the magnitude of the magnetic flux 86a to a certain value or less. Therefore, the interference layer 81 having the thickness d is provided between the magnetic recording layer 3 and the optical recording layer 4 to reduce the influence. When the shortest recording wavelength of the magnetic recording signal 61 is λ, the strength of the magnetic flux 66 in the optical recording layer 4 is attenuated by about 54.6 × d / λ. In the case of a recording medium, various recording wavelengths λ can be used. Λ = 0.5μ for the shortest recording wavelength
m is common. In this case d is 60 if 0.5 μm
Since the attenuation is about dB, the influence of the magnetic recording signal 61 is almost eliminated. From the above, it is possible to obtain the effect of eliminating the influence of the magnetic recording signal on the magneto-optical recording by using the interference film of at least 0.5 μm for the magnetic recording layer 3 and the magneto-optical recording layer 4 of the recording medium 2. . In this case, the interference film is made of a non-magnetic material or a magnetic material having a small holding force.

When magneto-optical recording and magnetic recording are performed using a magneto-optical recording medium, if the modulating magnetic field of the magneto-optical recording is sufficiently smaller than the coercive force of the magnetic material of the magnetic recording layer, the modulating magnetic field is recorded in the recorded magnetic signal. There is no possibility of damage. However, when the ring head is used as in Example 4, a strong magnetic field is generated in the head cap portion. Therefore, even if the modulation magnetic field is weak, the magnetic signal may be affected and the error rate may increase. In order to avoid this, when a magneto-optical recording medium is mounted for recording, as shown in the sectional view of the recording portion of FIG. 27, the optical recording is planned before the main recording signal is recorded on the optical recording layer by the optical head 6. The magnetic recording signal recorded on the magnetic track 67g on the back surface of the optical track 65g in the area is transferred to the memory section 34 of the recording / reproducing apparatus or the optical recording layer and saved. By saving, there is no problem even if the data in the magnetic recording layer is destroyed by the modulating magnetic field during magneto-optical recording.

This will be specifically described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The flow chart is roughly divided into six. The discriminating step 201 discriminates the attribute of the disc, and in the case of the optical ROM disc, the reproduction only step 20
4 is used. When reproducing the optical RAM disk, a reproducing step 202 and, if necessary, a reproducing / transferring step 203 are performed. When recording on an optical RAM disk, a recording step 205 and optionally a recording / transcription step 206 are used. If there is free time, only transcription is performed in transcription step 207.

This flowchart will be described in detail. In the determination step 201, the recording medium 2, specifically a disc, is loaded in step 220. In step 221, the disc type, for example, ROM or RAM,
The distinction between the magneto-optical medium, the optical recording prohibition, the magnetic recording prohibition, and the like is discriminated by a claw or the like carved in the cassette of the disk in FIG. Next, in step 222, the optical head 6 is moved to the positions of the innermost optical track 65a and magnetic track 67a in FIG. In step 223, the data of the optical information and magnetic information of the TOC is read out, and the data such as the music number at the end of the previous time for a music disc and the end stage number of the game for a game disc are input. In addition, if the user wishes to continue, the state at the end of the previous time can be restored. In step 224, the untranscribed flag written in the magnetic TOC is read. If the untranscribed flag = 1, it means that the magnetic data that has not been transcribed remains in the optical data section. Further, if the untransferred flag = 0, it means that there is no transfer flag. In step 225, it is discriminated whether the disc is a magneto-optical disc or a ROM disc. If the disc is a ROM disc, the process goes to step 238. If it is the magneto-optical disc, step 226.
Head to. If there is a reproduction command in step 238, the optical recording signal and the magnetic recording signal are reproduced in step 239,
When the operation is completed in step 240, various changes occurring during the reproduction period, for example, the change of the reproduction music order and the condition of the music number at the end time are written in the TOC area of the magnetic track in step 241. After the writing is completed, the disc is ejected at step 242.

Now, return to the case of the magneto-optical disk in step 226. If there is a reproduction command, the process proceeds to step 227, and if not, the process proceeds to step 243. In step 227, the reproduction of the main recording signal on the optical recording surface is performed faster than the normal reproduction speed, and the signals are sequentially stored in the memory. In the case of a music signal, in order to be able to store data for several seconds, the music is not interrupted even if the reproduction is interrupted during this period. When the memory becomes full in step 228, the unposted flag = 1 in step 229.
In the case of, the reproduction of the main recording signal is interrupted, and the process proceeds to step 230 in the reproduction transcription step 203. Check if all sub-recording signals on the magnetic recording surface have been played back.
If so, the process proceeds to step 234, and if No, the process proceeds to step 231, where the sub-recording signal on the magnetic recording surface is reproduced and stored in the memory. In step 232, it is checked whether the main recording signal in which the music signal or the like is accumulated can be output. If No, the process returns to step 227 to reproduce and accumulate the main recording signal. If Yes, when the sub recording signal reaches the set memory amount in Step 233, it is checked again in Step 234 whether the main recording signal can be accumulated and reproduced, and if Yes, the sub recording signal stored in the memory in Step 235. Is transferred to the transfer area of the optical recording surface, and it is checked in step 236 whether transfer of all data is completed. If No, step 23
The transfer is continued by returning to 0, and if Yes, the untransferred flag is changed from 1 to 0 in step 237 and the process returns to step 226.

When recording on the optical recording layer, the process proceeds to step 243 in the recording step 205, the recording command is checked, and if Yes, the main recording signal is stored in the memory in step 244 and optical recording is not performed. In step 245, it is checked whether there is enough memory. If No, step 2
Optical recording of the main recording signal is performed at 45a, and the process returns to step 243. If Yes, the process proceeds to step 246. If the untransferred flag is not 1, the process returns to step 243. If the flag is 1, the process proceeds to step 247 in the recording transfer step 206.

In step 247, the main recording signal is stored in the memory while the optical recording is planned this time at the same time.
The sub-recording signal of the magnetic track 67g on the back side of the optical track 65g is reproduced and stored in the memory. In step 248,
It is confirmed whether the main recording signal storage memory has a margin. If Yes, the sub recording signal is transferred to the optical recording layer in step 248a. If No, the process returns to step 245a to perform optical recording. In step 249, confirm whether the transfer of all data is completed, and
If s, the unposted flag is changed from 1 to 0 in step 250, and the process returns to step 243. If No, the process is returned to step 243 without any change.

In step 243, it is checked whether or not there is a recording command, and if No, step 25 in the transfer step 207.
Go to 1. Since neither recording nor reproducing of the main recording signal is required here, only the sub recording signal of the magnetic data surface is transcribed to the optical data surface. In step 251, the sub recording signal is reproduced and stored in the memory, and in step 252, it is transferred to the optical recording layer. Check whether all postings are completed in step 253,
If No, the process returns to step 251 again to continue transcription. Ye
If s, in step 254, the unposted flag is changed from 1 to 0, and in step 255, it is checked whether or not all the operations have been completed.
Then, the process returns to the first step 226. If Yes, the process proceeds to step 256, the information changed in this work and the information that the untransferred flag = 0 is magnetically recorded in the TOC area of the magnetic track, and the disc is ejected in step 257 to perform the work concerning this one disc. Complete.

In step 256, the magnetic recording layer can be restored to the state before the optical recording by rewriting all the sub recording signals accumulated in the memory into the magnetic recording layer. As described above, the data destruction of the magnetic recording surface can be substantially prevented by saving the data of only the magnetic track which is destroyed by the modulation magnetic field of the optical recording among the data of the magnetic recording surface to the memory or the optical recording surface. There is.

Further, after the optical recording operation is completed, the saved data is recorded again on the magnetic track and restored, so that even if magneto-optical recording is performed, the data on the magnetic recording surface is restored when the disc is ejected. In the case of FIG. 28, a method is used in which data that may be destroyed in the magnetic recording surface is transferred to the optical recording surface before magneto-optical recording. On the other hand, in the case of the flowchart of FIG. 29, the method of not transcribing to the optical recording surface is used. 29. Discrimination step 201 and reproduction step 2 in the flowchart of FIG.
02 and the reproduction-only step 204 are the same as those in FIG. Further, since the transcription is not performed, the reproduction transcription step 203, the recording transcription step 206, and the transcription step 207 are unnecessary. Only the recording step 205 is different and will be described in detail below.

Step 226 in the reproduction step 202
Check if there is a playback command and if No, step 2
64. If Yes, go to step 260. In step 260, the optical track corresponding to each magnetic track is managed, the applicable magnetic track destroyed by the magneto-optical recording on the back surface of the optical track is calculated, and it is checked whether it is the same applicable track as the one saved the last time Yes. Then, in step 263, magneto-optical recording is performed on the optical track. N
If it is o, the data of the previous magnetic track can be completely restored by writing the save data to the previous magnetic track in step 261. Next, at step 262, the data of the corresponding magnetic track to be destroyed this time is read and saved in the memory. After that, recording is performed on the optical track in step 263, and the process returns to step 243. No in step 243
In step 261a, the previous magnetic track is restored, and in step 264 of the end step 206, it is checked whether the operation is completed. If No, the process returns to step 226, and Y
If it is es, in step 265, the information changed from the mounting of the disc to the end thereof, for example, the ending music number of the music is magnetically recorded. Then, in step 266, the disc is ejected.
In this way, the work is finished, and when the next disc is loaded, the work is started again from step 220.

In the case of FIG. 28, all the magnetic data is transcribed to the optical recording layer so that the magnetic data may be destroyed by the optical recording, whereas in the case of FIG. The data is managed, and only the magnetic data of the corresponding magnetic track that is scheduled to be destroyed by magneto-optical recording is stored in the read memory. This magnetic track is completely restored at the time of optical recording on the disk. As a result, the memory capacity for magnetic tracks of 1 to 3 can be dealt with, and the memory can be reduced. As is clear from the flowchart, magnetic data can be protected from destruction of magneto-optical recording by simple processing.

As shown in the sectional view when the magneto-optical disk is mounted in FIG. 30A and the sectional view when the CD is mounted in FIG. 30B, the magneto-optical disk and the CD are reproduced using the same mechanism. You can also In this case, in the case of a CD, since the outside is not protected by the cartridge, it is easily affected by external magnetism. For example, the coercive force of the magnetic recording layer 3 of the CD is 1000 to 3
000 Oe, which is much higher than the magnetic recording layer of the magneto-optical medium, has the effect of preventing the destruction of magnetic data by an external magnetic field. In the case of a magneto-optical disk, if the coercive force is increased, the magnitude of the modulating magnetic field in the magneto-optical recording layer approaches, and this has an effect. Therefore 1000
It is lower than Oe.

(Fifth Embodiment) A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. 32 is a block diagram of the recording / reproducing apparatus of the fifth embodiment. The fifth embodiment has the same configuration and basic operation as those of FIGS. 1 and 24 described in the first and fourth embodiments. Therefore, detailed description is omitted and only different parts will be described. The difference between the fifth embodiment and the first embodiment is that in the fourth embodiment, magnetic recording, reproduction of a magnetic recording signal and magneto-optical recording are performed by the ring type magnetic head 8 having one coil 40 as described with reference to FIGS. This is a system in which one coil performs the three functions of generating a modulated magnetic field for use.
For this reason, the structure is simple, but there are contradictory elements in order to make the three compatible, and there is a possibility that problems such as reduction in reproduction efficiency and narrowness of the uniform magnetic field region may occur. Therefore, it is difficult to design the head and also difficult to process. That is,
The wiring is simple because the configuration is simple.
Difficult to process.

In view of this point, the fifth embodiment has two coils, that is, a magnetic field modulation coil 40a and a magnetic recording coil 40b, as shown in an enlarged view of magnetic recording in FIG. Returning to the block diagram of FIG. 32, at the time of magnetic recording or reproduction, the magnetic head circuit 31 applies a current to the magnetic recording coil 40b or receives a current from the coil to perform magnetic recording and reproduction.

When performing magnetic field modulation type magneto-optical recording,
A magnetic field modulation circuit 37a in the optical recording circuit 37 applies a modulation signal to the magnetic field modulation coil 40a to perform magneto-optical recording.

The operation during magnetic recording and reproduction will be described with reference to FIG. The recording current from the magnetic head circuit 31 flows through the coil 40b in the arrow direction. Then the magnetic flux 86c, 8
The closed magnetic paths 6a and 86b are formed, and the magnetic recording signal 61 is recorded in the magnetic recording layer 3 one after another. Horizontal magnetic recording is used. In this case, basically no current flows through the magnetic field modulation coil 40a. With this structure, a closed magnetic circuit including the gap 8c is formed, and the reproduction sensitivity can be optimally designed.

Next, the operation during magneto-optical recording will be described with reference to the enlarged view of magneto-optical recording in FIG. Magnetic field modulation coil 4
0a is wound in the same direction on both the main magnetic pole 8a and the auxiliary magnetic pole 8b of the yoke. Therefore, when the modulation current flows from the magnetic field modulation circuit 37a in the direction of the arrow 51a, downward magnetic fluxes 85a, 85b, 85c, 85d are generated. The magnetization of the magneto-optical recording material having a Curie temperature or higher at the focal point 66 of the optical recording layer 4 is reversed by this magnetic field, and the optical recording signal 52 is recorded. In this case, the strength of the magnetic field at the focal point 66 is generally 5 in the range of the uniform magnetic field region 8e.
It is set to 0 to 150 Oe. In this case, as shown in FIG. 25, it is preferable to provide the interference layer 81 so that the magnetization of the magneto-optical recording material is not reversed by the magnetic recording signal 61. If this thickness is d, then λ> d. With the configuration of FIG. 34, the effect that the uniform magnetic field region 8e can be widened is obtained. Further, since the head can be designed independently for the two coils, there is an effect that the optimum magnetic field modulation characteristic, the optimum magnetic recording characteristic and the optimum magnetic reproducing characteristic can be obtained. Since the head gap 8c in FIG. 33 can be reduced, the wavelength during magnetic recording can be shortened. In addition, since the optimum design for forming the closed magnetic circuit can be performed, the reproduction sensitivity is also improved. Further, as shown in FIG. 34, when the magnetic field is modulated, the magnetic flux 8 of the main pole 8a is
The magnetic flux 85d of the auxiliary magnetic pole 8a and the magnetic flux 85d of the auxiliary magnetic pole 8b are in the same direction.
A strong magnetic field is not generated in the gap portion 8c unlike the case. Only a weak magnetic field of the modulating magnetic field is generated. The coercive force of the magnetic recording layer 3 is 800 to 1500 Oe, which is sufficiently higher than the modulating magnetic field and has an easy axis of magnetization in the horizontal direction, so that the magnetic recording signal 61 is not destroyed by the modulating magnetic field. Therefore, in Example 4, data is not destroyed by making the coercive force Hc of the magnetic recording layer 3 higher than the recording magnetic field Hmax of the magneto-optical recording material.

In this case, since it is sufficient to allow a double margin, H
c <2Hmax. The recording medium 2 shown in FIG. 8 may be manufactured. Further, in the magnetic head 8, as shown in FIG. 35, the main magnetic pole 8a may be independently wound with the coil 40a and the auxiliary magnetic pole 8b may be independently wound with the coil 40b. In this case, during magnetic field modulation,
The magnetic head circuit 31 is also used for the magnetic recording coil 40b to flow a modulation current in the direction of the arrow 51b to generate a magnetic flux 85.
d is generated, and the magnetic flux 85 generated by the magnetic field modulation coil 40a is generated.
In the same direction as c, 85b, and 85a, the same effect as in FIG. 34 is obtained.

Also, wind one winding as shown in FIG.
By providing the tap 40c, two coils can be configured with three terminals. The taps 40c and 40e are used during magnetic recording. Further, at the time of magneto-optical recording, a modulating magnetic field for magneto-optical recording can be created by using the taps 40d and 40e as shown in FIG. This makes 3
Since the head can be configured with one tap, there is an effect that wiring is simple.

(Embodiment 6) A sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 38 is a block diagram of the recording / reproducing apparatus of the sixteenth embodiment. The sixth embodiment is the first and fourth embodiments, and particularly the fifth embodiment, and the basic operation is the same as that of FIGS. 1 and 24 and 32 described above.
Therefore, detailed description is omitted and only different parts will be described. The difference between the sixth embodiment and the fifth embodiment is shown. In the fifth embodiment, one coil is provided separately from the magnetic modulation coil to perform magnetic recording. Therefore, degaussing and recording cannot be performed at the same time. However, the floppy disk requires simultaneous operation. Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, the magnetic head 8 is provided with two gaps 8c and 8e. Further, two coils 40b and 40f are connected to the magnetic head circuit 31, one of which is used for recording and the other of which is used for degaussing. In this way, degaussing and recording can be performed simultaneously with one head.

Next, an enlarged view of the magnetic recording portion of FIG. 39 shows a specific structure of the magnetic head 8. As shown in FIG. 33, in addition to the auxiliary magnetic pole 8b, a second auxiliary magnetic pole 8d is added. As described with reference to FIG. 33, the magnetic recording coil 4
0b for magnetic recording, but before that, the second auxiliary pole 8d
Thus, a degaussing current is made to flow from the magnetic head circuit 31. Thus, the magnetic recording layer 3 can be demagnetized in the gap 8e before recording. Therefore, when magnetic recording is performed in the gap 8c, ideal recording can be performed, and C / N and S / N
Is improved and the error rate is reduced. The top view of the magnetic recording portion in FIG. 41 shows this state as viewed from the vertical direction of the recording medium 2. As shown in FIG. 41, guard hands 67f and 67g are provided on both sides of the recording track 67. First, degaussing is performed with the width of the degaussing region 210 by the gap 8e of the second auxiliary magnetic pole 8d. Therefore, the entire area of the recording track 67 and the guard bands 67f and 67g are
A part of the area is demagnetized. Therefore, the gap 8c does not deviate from the degaussing region 210 even if the magnetic head 8 is displaced from the track. Therefore, when magnetic recording is performed using the gap 8c, recording can be performed in a good state.

As shown in the top view of the magnetic recording portion of FIG. 42, the degaussing gap is divided into gaps 8e and 8h.
It is also possible to provide two. As a result, the recording medium 2 is caused to travel in the direction of the arrow 51 in the opposite direction of FIG. And record. The overlapping portion is demagnetized by the two degaussing regions 210a and 210b. Therefore, the guard bands 67f and 67g are completely secured. As a result, crosstalk between recording tracks is reduced, and the error rate is reduced. Next, a case where the magnetic head 8 is used to perform magnetic field modulation of the magneto-optical recording will be described with reference to an enlarged view of the magnetic field modulation unit in FIG. Since the magnetic field modulation coil 40a is wound around the main magnetic pole 8a, the sub magnetic 8b, and the second sub magnetic 8d, the magnetic fluxes 85a, 85b, 85c, 85d, and 85e are evenly generated in each magnetic pole. Therefore, there is an effect that a wide uniform magnetic field region 8e can be obtained. For this reason, even if the dimensional accuracy of the track position is low, the focal point 66 cannot deviate from the optical recording track 65.

Next, in the magnetic head 8 shown in the enlarged view of the magnetic recording portion in FIG. 43, the winding method of the coil of the magnetic head 8 described in FIG. 39 is changed. As shown in the figure, the magnetic field modulation coil 40d is extended to serve also as a magnetic recording coil, and an intermediate tap 40c is provided. Thereby, magnetic recording can be performed by the taps 40c and 40e. Further, as shown in an enlarged view of the magnetic field modulation unit 44 of FIG. 44, currents in the directions of the arrows 51a and 51b are made to flow through the taps 40d and 40e by causing the arrows 51c to flow through the tap 40f, whereby magnetic fluxes 85a, 85b, 85c in the same direction, 85d,
85e is generated and a uniform modulation magnetic field is generated. In this case, there is an effect that the number of taps is reduced by one and the configuration is simplified. As described in detail above, by using the magnetic head 8 of the sixth embodiment, there is a great effect that one head can share the degaussing head, the magnetic recording head, and the magnetic field modulation head for magneto-optical recording.

(Embodiment 7) A seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. The seventh embodiment mainly relates to a disk cassette for storing a medium. The top view of the disc cassette in FIG. 45A shows a state in which the movable shutter 301 of the disc cassette 42 is closed. Thus, not only the head hole 302 but also the liner holes 303a, 303b, and 303c are protected by the shutter 301, so that there is an effect that dust does not enter. As shown in FIG. 45 (b), the shutter opens as the disc cassette 42 is inserted into the main body in the direction of arrow 51. Therefore, the head hole 302 and the liner holes 303a, 303
Both b and 303c open. As shown in FIG. 46, the rectangular unit 1
The liner hole 303 may be provided. 47 and 48
Head hole 302 as shown in the top view of the disk cassette
You may provide the liner hole in the opposite direction. In this case
As shown in the top views of the liners 9 (a), 9 (b), and 9 (c), the liner 304 and the liner support portion 305 made of a leaf spring or a plastic sheet and the liner support portion plate-equipped portion 3 are shown.
According to 06a-d, the liner has a movable liner portion 305a.
The other parts are fixed to the disc cassette 42. Figure 4
As shown in FIG. 9C, the liner groove 307 is dug in the cassette half. In this groove 307, the liner movable part 3
05a is stored. From above the sub liner support 30
5b holds it down. Thus, the liner support portion 305a
Due to the restoring force of the spring, it keeps a flat plate state unless external force is applied. In this state, the liner 303 does not contact the recording layer on the surface of the recording medium 2. For this reason, the wear of the recording layer 3 is normally prevented.

Next, if an external force is applied from the liner hole 303 to the inside of the disc cassette 42 by the liner pin 310 as necessary, the liner support portion 305 and the liner 304 are pressed against the medium surface unless the liner pin presses the liner. The recording layer of the recording medium 2 does not contact with 305.

Another structure of the disc cassette is shown in FIGS. 50 (a), (b) and (c), in which the leaf spring of the liner support portion 303a is preliminarily deformed in the upper direction of the disc cassette as shown in FIG. 50 (c). Keep it. As a result, when it is fixed to the disc cassette 42 as shown in FIG. 50 (d), it is constantly pressed against the cassette half upper portion 42a. Therefore, the recording medium 2 and the liner 304 do not come into contact with each other unless they are pushed downward by the liner pin 310. Sub liner support 3
The effect that 05b can be omitted is stably obtained.

Next, a method of switching the contact between the liner and the disc by the liner pin 310 will be described.
FIG. 51 is a sectional view taken along the line AA ′ of FIG. 49 (a). The liner pin 310 is pulled up in the liner pin guide 311 in the direction of arrow 51a. Therefore liner 3
04 and the recording layer 3 of the recording medium 2 are not in contact with each other. Therefore, since the frictional force when the recording medium 2 is rotated is small, the recording medium 2 can be rotated even with a weak driving force. Next, as shown in FIG. 52, when the liner pin 310 is pushed down by an external force in the direction of arrow 51, the main liner 304 is pressed against the magnetic recording layer 3 of the recording medium 2 via the liner support portion 305. As the recording medium 2 rotates or runs in the direction of arrow 51,
Foreign matter such as dust and dirt on the magnetic recording layer 3 is removed by the liner 304 made of a non-woven fabric or the like. Therefore, when magnetic recording / reproduction or magnetic field modulation of magneto-optical recording is performed by the recording head 8 in the head hole 301 portion of FIG. 46, the effect that the error rate is greatly reduced can be obtained. The material of the liner is the same as that of the conventional floppy liner, and for example, non-woven fabric is used. In this case arrow 51
In the case of the rotation direction indicated by a, the liner pin 310 is formed on the portion of the magnetic recording layer 3 in front of the magnetic head 8 as shown in FIG.
As a result, the cleaning effect is enhanced. In this case, even if the liner control system of the present invention is used for the contact type magneto-optical recording disk cassette 42 in which the ordinary magnetic recording layer 3 is not provided, dust is reduced and the error rate during magneto-optical recording is improved. The effect is obtained.

The control of the liner pin 310 is shown in FIG. 53, for example.
As shown in (b), the magnetic head 3 and the liner pin 310.
When the magnetic head 3 comes into contact, the liner 304 is always brought into contact with the recording medium 2 so that the actuator can also be used. If the magnetic head 3 is not in contact, the liner pin 310 may be used as necessary.
To prevent the liner 304 from touching. When the liner pin 310 and the magnetic head 8 are interlocked as shown in the elevation views of the magnetic head in FIGS. 53A and 53B, the cassette 42 makes contact only when the magnetic recording layer has an identification hole, and when not present, the liner 304. And the recording medium 2 will not come into contact with each other.
This prevents the surface of the magnetic recording layer 3 from being worn by the liner 304 when unnecessary. At the same time, since the frictional force is reduced, the rotation torque of the motor is small and the power consumption is reduced. Even when the recording medium 2 having no magnetic recording layer is inserted, the magnetic head 8 does not come into contact with the recording medium 2 as shown in FIG. Even if the disk cassette 42 of the present invention is mounted on a conventional recording apparatus that does not support the magnetic recording method of the present invention, the conventional apparatus is used as shown in the magnetic head elevation diagrams of FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b). Liner pin 31
Since the liner 304 and the recording medium 2 do not come into contact with each other as shown in FIG. 54 (b) because they do not have 0 and the raising / lowering function, they can be stably rotated even by a conventional magneto-optical recording / reproducing apparatus having a small drive torque of the disk. Therefore, there is an effect that the compatibility between the medium and the conventional device is maintained. Even if the conventional disc cassette 42 without the liner 304 or the liner hole 303 is mounted on the recording / reproducing apparatus of the present invention, FIG.
The liner pin 310 is not inserted because there is no liner hole 303 as shown in the magnetic head elevation views of FIGS. Therefore, the liner pin 310 does not contact the recording medium 2 or the liner 304. Therefore, inserting the conventional media into the recording / reproducing apparatus of the present invention does not eliminate the problem at all,
There is an effect that compatibility between these is maintained. In this case, the lubricant of the conventional recording medium is the magnetic head 8.
Adheres to the contact surface and the error rate deteriorates. In order to prevent this, a cleaning track 67x is set as shown in the top view of the recording medium of the present invention in FIG. When the recording medium 2 of the present invention is loaded into the recording / reproducing apparatus of the present invention and the recording medium 2 of the present invention is inserted after being detached, the insertion magnetic head 8 is first run over the cleaning track 67x at least once. . As a result, the above-mentioned dust is cleaned by the cleaning truck 67.
Adhere on x. The dust is further in contact with the recording medium 2. Removed by liner 304. As a result, dust on the contact surface of the magnetic head 8 is finally removed, and there is an effect that reliable recording and reproduction with a low error rate can be performed. 57 (a) and 57 (b) are cross-sectional views of the liner elevating part showing the liner pin in the OFF state and the liner pin in the ON state. 58. FIG. 58 is a sectional view of the liner lifting / lowering portion viewed from the running direction of the recording medium 2 in FIGS. 51 and 52, respectively.

Next, an embodiment using a leaf spring type liner pin 310 will be described. The cross-sectional views of the liner pin portion of FIGS. 60 and 61, the front cross-sectional views of the liner pin portion of FIGS. 62 and 63 are full cross-sectional views of the liner pin portion of the leaf spring, and the liner pin 310 of the leaf spring is used. The OFF state and the ON state are shown respectively. In this case, the liner pin 310 is the pin driving lever 31.
It is driven in the directions of arrows 51 and 51a by the lifting motor 21 via 2 and turned on and off. The front sectional views of the liner pin shown in FIGS. 64 and 65 respectively show an OFF state and an ON state when the liner pin 310 is used when the rectangular one-hole liner hole 303 shown in FIG. 46A is used. In this case, there is an effect that the contact area of the liner pin with the liner mounting portion is increased and dust can be reliably removed.

In the front sectional views of the liner pin shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the liner guide 311 is provided with the protective portion 311a. Further, as shown in FIG. 66, the disc cassette 42 of the present invention
Also, a recognition hole 313 is provided. Therefore, when the disc cassette 42 of the present invention is inserted as shown in the figure, the liner pin 310 is inserted into the liner hole 303. However, the conventional disc cassette 42 without the recognition hole 313
67, the protective film 314 hits the case of the disc cassette 42 as shown in FIG.
Does not contact the case of the disc cassette 42. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the liner pin 310 from being soiled or damaged.

(Embodiment 8) Hereinafter, an eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The eighth embodiment discloses a method of pushing up the liner pin from the lower surface direction of the disc cassette to raise and lower the liner.

As shown in the top perspective view of the disc cassette of FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b), there is no liner hole on the upper face. A liner hole 303 is provided adjacent to the recognition holes 313a, 313b, 313c on the back side, and a liner pin is inserted into the liner hole 303 from the back side of the drawing to raise and lower the liner.
69 (a) and 69 (b) are liner elevating parts A- in FIG. 68.
A sectional view of the A ′ plane is shown. First, when the liner pin 310 is in the OFF state as shown in FIG. 69 (a), the liner pin 304 and the recording medium 2 do not come into contact with each other. FIG. 69 (b)
When the liner pin 310 is inserted into the recognition hole 313 as shown in FIG.
16 is pushed rightward in the figure by the liner pin 310 and rotates counterclockwise about the pin shaft 315. Accordingly, the liner driving unit 316 causes the liner supporting unit 30 to
5 is pushed downward to bring the liner 304 and the recording medium 2 into contact with each other, and dust is removed as the line 5 rotates.

Next, the structure of the liner will be described. Figure 7
The structure of the liner is basically the same as the structure described with reference to FIG. However, the difference is that a movable part 305a is provided at the tip of the drive part of the liner drive part 316 and the liner drive groove 30a for accommodating the liner drive part 316 is added as shown in FIG. 70 (c). .

Here, the structure of the liner pin 310 on the main body side will be described. The liner pin 310 and the motor 17 have a positional relationship as shown in the sectional view of the peripheral portion of FIG.
If the disc cassette 42 of the present invention is inserted in the direction of arrow 51, as shown in the sectional view of the peripheral portion of the liner pin of FIG. 72 (a), the liner 304 works together even if the actuator of the liner pin is not provided. Up and down. However, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the conventional disc cassette 42
When the disk is inserted, the liner pin 310 does not have the liner hole 303, so that the liner pin 310 is automatically lowered by the insertion by the spring 317, and there is an effect that the conventional disk cassette 42 is not damaged or adversely affected. in this case,
For example, in an application such as a game machine where the frequency of disk access is low, it is not necessary to provide an actuator on the liner pin, so that the structure is simplified. FIG. 73
As shown in the magnetic head elevating / lowering sections (a) and (b), one elevating motor 21 can be used to interlock the liner pin 310 by the elevating / lowering section 20 and the connecting section 318. When this structure is used, the liner 304 always comes into contact with the recording medium 2 when the magnetic head 8 comes into contact with the recording medium 2, so that the actuator can also serve as the liner 304. Fig. 74
The sectional views of the disc cassettes of (a) and (b) are basically the same as those of FIG. 69, but the liner driving unit 316 is extended and a pin shutter unit 319 is added, so that FIG.
As shown in (a), when the liner pin is turned off, the pin shutter 319 is closed, which has the effect of preventing external dust from flowing into the disc cassette 42. Since this structure uses the vicinity of the recognition hole of the disc cassette, it is only necessary to add one small hole to the conventional disc cassette. Therefore, there is an effect that the compatibility of the cassette structure becomes higher. Further, the structure of FIG. 69 has an effect that the required space in the horizontal direction is small. Therefore, for example, the liner hole 303a can be provided in a portion where there is almost no mounting space as in the BB ′ cross section of FIG. 68, and the degree of freedom in cassette design is improved.

(Embodiment 9) A ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. Example 9 shows an example in which the liner driving unit 316 has a sufficient mounting space. The top view of the disc cassette in FIG. 75 is the configuration viewed from the top of the ninth embodiment, and the configuration of the liner 305 and the liner mounting portion 305a is substantially the same as that in FIG. In this embodiment, the movable portion 305 of the liner mounting portion 305
A liner lifting portion 305c is provided at a. The liner driving unit 316 pushes this portion down in the figure to move the liner 305 up and down. This is A- of FIG.
This will be described with reference to the sectional views of the elevating part in FIGS. 76 and 77 which are sectional views of A ′. As shown in FIG. 76, when the liner pin 310 is OFF, the pin shutter 319 is pushed downward by the spring 307 so that dust does not enter from the outside.
The liner support portion 305 and the movable portion 305a are also pressed against the upper surface by the effect of the leaf spring and the sub liner support portion 305b. Therefore, the liner 304 is not in contact with the recording medium 2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77, the liner pin 310 is used.
When ON, the pin shutter 319 causes the liner driving unit 316 to rotate clockwise around the pin shaft 316 and push down the liner elevating unit 305c. The recording medium 2 comes into contact with the foreign matter on the disk surface as the recording medium 2 rotates in the direction of arrow 51. Therefore, the effect of reducing the error rate can be obtained. Example 9
In this case, the structure is simple and the liner can be raised and lowered reliably. Further, since it is not necessary to provide a groove in the disc cassette 42a, the strength of the cassette is not impaired.

Further, B- in the top view of the cassette of FIG.
When attached to the B ′ sectional view, the structure is as shown in the sectional views of the liner pins of FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b). FIG. 76,
Since the operation is the same as the case of FIG. 77, detailed description will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 78 (a), when the liner pin 310 is off, the liner hole is closed by the pin shutter 319. As shown in FIG. 78B, when the liner pin 310 is on, the liner driving unit 315 rotates counterclockwise to lower the liner elevating unit 305C and push down the liner attaching unit 305a and the liner 304, so that the liner and the recording medium come into contact with each other. In this case, as compared with FIG. 76, there is an effect that the liner can be raised and lowered in a shorter space. When the liner pin 310 is inserted so that the contact between the liner and the recording medium is released, the liner comes into contact when not in use, and the frictional force prevents the recording medium from rotating, which has the effect of preventing damage to the recording medium. is there.

Example 10 Hereinafter, Example 10 of the present invention will be described.
The recording maximizing device will be described with reference to the drawings. The basic configuration is the same as the block diagram of FIG. First, the tracking method will be described in detail. As shown in the uncorrected tracking principle diagram of FIG. 79, in the ideal setting state, the upper magnetic head 8 and the lower optical head 6 are in the same vertical positional relationship. Therefore, when the optical head accesses the optical track 65 of a specific optical address, the magnetic head 8 runs on the corresponding magnetic track 67 on the back surface. In this case, the DC of the tracking error signal of the optical head actuator 18
No offset voltage is generated. However, in reality, due to the product variation of the spring constant of the actuator and the application of gravity G due to the inclination of the apparatus, a deviation of ΔL, specifically, several tens to several hundreds of μm is generated between the center 321b of the optical actuator 18. . Further, the center 321C of the magnetic head 8 facing the center 321a of the optical actuator 18 also has a deviation due to an assembly error. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), a positional deviation occurs between the magnetic head 8 and the optical head 6 which face each other.

The optical head 6 is provided with an optical track of a specific address.
Even if the track is restarted, there is no correspondence with the magnetic track tracked by the magnetic head 8, so that another magnetic track may be accessed. Specifically, the track pitch of the magnetic tracks is usually 50 to 200 μm.
The center of the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 is several hundred μm at maximum. Therefore, under bad conditions, the magnetic head 8 may travel on the magnetic track adjacent to the target track, and incorrect data may be recorded.

In order to avoid this, according to the present invention, FIG.
As shown in (a), an offset voltage ΔV _o is given to the tracking control signal so that the optical head 6 is decentered by ΔL so that the optical pickup 6 comes to the back side of the reference magnetic track 67z. That is, if the eccentricity correction amount ΔL is always eccentric, in the case of a stationary machine, the magnetic head 8 and the optical head 6 always face each other with high accuracy in the vertical direction, and the correlation between the optical track 65 and the magnetic track 67 increases, and The mechanical precision of is within a track deviation of several μm to several tens of μm. In this way, even if the track pitch is 50 μm, the magnetic head can track to the target magnetic track based on the optical address. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), if this offset voltage ΔV _o is applied,
The optical head 6 is eccentric by L, and by accessing the address of the optical track 68, the magnetic head 8 accesses the desired magnetic track 67. Here, a method of calculating the offset voltage ΔV _o will be described. First, as a measure against eccentricity, a method of obtaining the average track radius of the disk will be described. In the CD or mini disk (MD) standard, the eccentricity of the optical track 65 is maximum 200 μm.
On the other hand, the track pitch of the magnetic track 67 is 2DD, that is, 200 μm in the 135 TPI class. Therefore,
If no measures are taken, it is difficult to access the target backside magnetic track 67 by referring to the address of the optical track 65.

As shown in the disk eccentricity amount diagram of FIG. 81 (a), an eccentricity of Δr _n exists between the premastered optical track 65 _PM and the locus 65 _T when the servo is not applied to the optical head 6. Occur. Here, when the tracking servo is applied to the optical head without moving the traverse, it can be detected that the tracking error signal as shown in FIG. 81B is generated due to the eccentricity of the optical track. If you set the optical track address at theta = 0 ° in the read reference point, Ri by the eccentric tracking radius r _n - △ r _n, and the draw smaller radius than the radius r _n of the designed tracking.
When θ = 180 °, on the contrary, r _n + Δr _n , and a radius larger than r _n is drawn. Track pitch is 100-200μ
In the case of m, if the optical track has an eccentricity of ± 200 μm, the track radius itself changes unless track servo is applied. As shown in the figure, θ = 90 ° and θ = 27
At 0 °, the error is the smallest. Therefore, θ = 90
°, by determining the center position of the light tracks on the basis of the address of the optical track 65 _PM at 270 °, determined radius r _n of the n tracks of the set value. As is apparent from FIG. 81, when θ = 90 ° and θ = 270 °, Δr _n = 0 and the standard track radius r _n can be obtained. θ = 90 ° and 27
The 0 ° position is obtained from the tracking error signal shown in FIG. 81 (c). By using the address of the optical track 65 in a position on an extension of this angle, by track the optical head to the optical address 65s, the standard track radius r _n can be obtained, can be tracked by more accurate magnetic head The effect is that
The optical address 320 is the first address of the magnetic track 67.
Record on track or TOC track.

In the case of the CD and MD formats, the number of address information is small in one round of one optical track. Therefore, 360 addresses at all angles cannot be obtained at 360 °. As shown in FIG. 86, it is possible to know what number block of address 1 corresponds to how many times the angle θ is. As a result, an angular resolution of, for example, 1 degree can be obtained. Therefore, by managing this block unit, optical address information of an arbitrary radius on an arbitrary angle can be obtained. The correspondence table of the magnetic track numbers corresponding to the accurate optical address information will be referred to as "address correspondence table" hereinafter.

The method for obtaining an accurate optical track radius has been described above. Next, a method of associating the magnetic track radius r _m with the optical track radius r _o will be described. As for the positional displacement between the optical head and the magnetic head that opposes, the displacement during operation is added to the displacement during manufacturing. These cannot be uniquely determined because there are variations among products. It is important to clarify this correspondence for compatibility.

There are two methods for this. The first method is a method in which no reference track is provided on the magnetic surface of the recording medium. When the magnetic surface is formatted as shown in FIG. 79 (b), there is usually a positional deviation ΔL between the magnetic head 8 and the optical head 6. If formatting is performed in this state, a track shifted by ΔL is recorded. In this case, when recording / reproducing on the same disk and under the same drive under the same condition, there is no problem because everything is done in a state of ΔL shift.

In this case, since there is backlash of the traverse actuator, it is always necessary to move the traverse in the same direction when tracking to a predetermined track, for example, from the inner circumference to the outer circumference. In order to track the nth track again, the magnetic head 8 can be used without applying an offset voltage during tracking.
An offset distance of ΔL exists between the optical head 6 and the optical head 6 as shown in FIG. 79 (b). Therefore, when the same optical track as during recording is accessed, the same magnetic track as during recording is tracked, so that the data of the target magnetic track can be recorded and reproduced.

Next, when this formatted recording medium is applied to another drive, when the offset voltage is not applied, as shown in FIG. 82 (a), the drive has a characteristic of ΔL = 0, for example. In this case, the optical track and the magnetic track are displaced from each other by an offset distance ΔL _o as compared with the time of recording,
Data is recorded / reproduced on the wrong magnetic track.
In order to avoid this, in the present invention, the traverse is controlled and moved so that the reference magnetic track 67 is accessed as shown in FIG.

Next, with the traverse fixed, the offset voltage ΔV is changed so that the optical head 6 accesses the optical track 65 containing the reference address signal to obtain ΔV _o . As a result, the correspondence relationship between the optical track and the magnetic track can be made similar to that of the previous drive that has performed the formatting.

82. By constantly applying this offset voltage ΔV _o to the actuator of the optical head 6, FIG.
As shown in (b), the effect that all other magnetic tracks and optical tracks correspond to each other with an accuracy of several μm to + several μm can be obtained with an inexpensive structure. In other words, if a specific optical address is accessed by applying an offset voltage, a specific magnetic address can be automatically accessed. This effect can be obtained with a configuration in which the optical head 6 is not provided with a lens position sensor, and therefore, the number of parts can be reduced.

Next, the second method, that is, the method of recording the reference track on the magnetic recording surface in advance will be described. As shown in the diagram of the magnetic recording surface of FIG. 83, a magnetic track 67 on which a track for embedded servo is recorded when the disk is manufactured.
1 track is provided.

This servo magnetic track 67s is shown in FIG.
Of as shown in the left, A, B1 different frequencies f _a, f _b
Part of the two magnetic tracks on which the carrier is recorded are overlapped and recorded.

When the magnetic head 8 tracks the center and reproduces, the magnitudes of f _a and f _b are the same. However, if it shifts inward, the output of f _a becomes large, and if it shifts to the outside, the output of f _b becomes large. Therefore, the traverse can be moved to control the magnetic head 8 to the center of the track.

By providing this servo magnetic track, the cost of the medium is slightly increased, but FIG.
In, there is an effect that a more accurate value can be obtained when the offset voltage ΔV _o is calculated. Also, the eccentricity information of the optical track can be obtained more accurately.

As shown in the side views of the magnetic heads of FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (b), the slider 41 of the magnetic head 8 is formed by molding a soft material such as Teflon instead of metal. This has the effect of reducing damage to the magnetic recording layer 3 by the slider 41.

Further, as shown in the side views of the magnetic head of FIGS. 85 (a) and 85 (b), when the magnetic recording is not performed, the slider is tilted by the slider actuator to separate the magnetic head 8 from the magnetic recording layer 3, and the slider 41 Touch a part of the edge.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85B, when the slider 41 is tilted to be parallel to the magnetic recording surface by the actuator only when magnetic recording is performed, the magnetic head 8 contacts the magnetic recording layer 3 and magnetic recording is performed. It will be possible. In this case, there is an effect that abrasion of the magnetic head 8 is reduced when magnetic recording is not performed.

(Embodiment 11) Hereinafter, Embodiment 11 of the present invention will be described.
The recording / reproducing apparatus in will be described with reference to the drawings.

The basic configuration is shown in FIG. 38 described in the sixth embodiment.
Is the same as the block diagram of. The eleventh embodiment employs a method which is generally called a non-tracking method and which does not apply the tracking servo control of the magnetic head.

The block diagram at the time of recording has a structure as shown in the block diagram of the recording circuit in FIG.

Two magnetic heads 8a having different azimuth angles as shown in the magnetic head diagrams of FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b).
And the magnetic head 8b are recorded using the A head 8a and the B head 8b, respectively. As shown in FIG. 88 (b), when the track pitch of the magnetic tracks 67 is T _P , the head width T
_H has a relationship of T _P <T _H <2T _P. Usually T _H = 1.
Used under the condition of 5 to 2.0 T _P. Therefore, when the nth track is recorded, it is also recorded in the area of the (n + 1) th track. At the time of recording the (n + 1) th track, this overlapping portion is overwritten for recording, so that the recording track is formed with a width of T _P.

As shown in an enlarged view of the recording format in FIG. 89, two heads having different azimuth angles, A head 8a and B head 8b, are switched at θ = 0 ° and recording is performed while spirally overwriting data alternately. Do it. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 88, a track width T _P smaller than the head width T _H is formed. A with different azimuth angles
Since the tracks 67a and the B tracks 67b are alternately adjacent to each other, crosstalk between tracks during reproduction does not occur. Further, as shown in the recording format diagram of FIG. 90, a guard band 325 is provided between a plurality of adjacent track groups 326.
Are provided, it is possible to record and reproduce independently of each other.

As shown in the data structure diagram of FIG. 91,
The data of each track such as A ₁ , B ₁ and A ₂ is composed of a plurality of blocks 327, and a plurality of each track are collected,
It is considered as one track group. A guard band 325 is provided between each track group to enable rewriting in track group units. A plurality of blocks constituting one track include a synchronization signal 328, an address 329, and a parity 33.
0, data 331, and error detection signal 332.

Here, the operation at the time of recording will be described. The input data with the specified address is input to the input circuit 21. In the case of the eleventh embodiment, at the time of recording, the data is rewritten with the track group 326 of FIG. 91 as one unit. That is, a plurality of tracks are rewritten all at once. Since each track group 326 is separated by the guard band 325 as shown in FIG. 90, recording / reproducing in this unit does not affect other track groups.

When the input data includes only a part of the information of the track group, the data is insufficient, and the entire one track group 326 cannot be rewritten. Therefore, when the nth track group is rewritten, the nth track group is rewritten in advance.
The track group is reproduced and all the data is stored in the buffer memory 34 in the magnetic reproducing circuit 30. This data is sent to the input circuit 21 as an address and data at the time of writing,
Here, the data of the address matching the input data is replaced with the input data. In this case, the buffer memory 34
The same data as the address of the input data in may be replaced with the input data.

The nth track group 32 to be written in this way
All the data of 6n are sent from the input circuit 21 to the magnetic recording circuit 29, modulated by the modulation circuit 334, and the separation circuit 333 creates the data for the A head 8a and the data for the B head 8b. As shown in the recording timing chart of FIG. 92 (a), A track data 328a1 is recorded by the A head 8a at t = t ₁ , and the B track is recorded by the B head 8b at t = t ₂ when the disc is rotated 360 °. Data 3
Record 28b1. The switching timing signal for the A head and the B head is the rotation signal of the disk motor 17 or the optical address information from the optical reproducing circuit 38.
The rotation of 0 ° is detected and sent from the disk rotation angle detection unit 335 to the magnetic recording circuit 29. Each track data 328
A signalless band 337 is provided at the end of the above, and a signal guard band is provided so that the A track data 328a and the B track data 328b do not overlap.

Although there is a guard band 325 on the disc, it is necessary to accurately set the recording start radius and the recording end radius so as not to erroneously record on the adjacent track group 326 beyond this. The present invention uses a specific optical address as a reference point and uses a method of obtaining a permanent absolute radius. In FIG. 87, the optical address is read from the optical head 6 and the optical reproducing circuit 38. In this case, the optical head eccentricity correction method described with reference to FIGS. The eccentricity correction amount is calculated by the same method, stored in the eccentricity correction amount memory 336, read out when necessary, and the optical head drive circuit 25 causes the optical head 6 to be eccentric. Drive while referring to move the traverse. Thus, the magnetic track 67 can be accurately tracked by referring to the optical address of the optical track.
Although an example in which two magnetic heads 8a and 8b having different azimuth angles are alternately used for recording has been described, this method requires a long recording time. As shown in (c) of FIG. 88, the positions of the two heads in the radial direction are shifted by T _p , A track data and B track data are simultaneously sent from the separation circuit 333 of FIG. 87, and the traverse is performed once every turn. by sending twice the pitch of T _p, as shown in the recording timing chart of FIG. 92 (b), it is possible to record one track group in half the time, there is an effect that it faster.

Thus, the input data is spirally recorded on the track. As a specific design example, even if the eccentricity of the optical track is ± 200 μm, it is not affected by the eccentricity correction means, and the eccentricity of chucking falls within ± 25 μm, for example. The eccentricity of the rotating shaft of the motor is
Within ± several μm. In this case, the width of the guard band is 50
When the track pitch is 10 μm or more, tracks can be recorded with a width within an error of ± several μm even if the track pitch is 10 μm.
Thus, there is an effect that a large capacity recording can be performed by the non-tracking method.

Traverse control for spiral recording will be described. In the recording format of FIG. 89,
Two points, a recording start optical address 320a and a recording end optical address 320e, are set as reference points. In the case of FIG. 89, the traverse may be driven at the same pitch from the start point to the end point while the disk makes four revolutions. In the case of the present invention, a configuration is adopted in which a screw is rotated by a rotary motor to feed a traverse. The rotation pulse from the rotary motor is obtained.

[0120] The traverse as the traverse gear rotation speed diagram in FIG. 97 is moved from the starting point optical address 320a to the optical address 320e of the end point, measure the rotational speed n _o of this period of the traverse drive gear. Since the disk is rotated four, the system controller 10 n _o / 4T r. p.
The rotation speed of s is calculated, and a command to rotate the traverse drive gear is issued at this rotation speed. Then, the magnetic head records data at an accurate track pitch. Moreover, since the magnetic head 8 is near the end optical address 320e at the end of recording, it does not pass through the guard band and reach the start optical address 320x of the adjacent track group. The traverse drive gear rotation speed may be measured once every time the disk is changed. It may also be recorded on a disc. or,
By performing the traverse control while counting the line number of the optical track, smoother and more accurate traverse feeding can be performed.

The cylindrical recording format diagram of FIG. 96 shows the case where coaxial tracks are used. In this case, the optical address 320a, 320b, 32 of each track
The traverse is moved every time so that the optical head accesses 6 points of 0c, 320d, 320e, and 320f in each track recording. As a result, a cylindrical track is formed.

Further, as shown in the optical recording surface format diagram of FIG. 98, the non-address area 3 having no optical address and no signal.
When 46 is present, access by optical address is not possible. In this case, the reference radius and the disk rotation reference angle are obtained in the optical address area 347, and the line number of the optical track is counted to obtain the non-optical address area 34.
Also in 6, the predetermined relative position can be tracked. Line No. from the reference light address point for each track
If the table is created and written in the magnetic TOC area 348, another drive can access the target magnetic track. The method of accessing by line No. has a lower absolute position accuracy than the optical address method, but has an effect of increasing the access speed. It is desirable to use both of them together, but it is preferable to use the line number counting method in many cases during reproduction in terms of high-speed access. There are two types of drives, a high density type and a normal density type. High density type head width T _H is 1 / 2-1 / 3 of the normal type. The track pitch is 1/2 to 1/3 when the normal type is T _bo.
It becomes T _po . In the case of non-tracking, the high-density type can reproduce the normal-density type data, but the reverse is not possible.

In order to ensure compatibility, when recording in the high density type, a compatible track is provided, and recording is performed at a track pitch of T _po as shown in the recording format diagram of FIG. 99, so that the normal type can also be reproduced. As shown in the correspondence diagram between the optical recording surface and the magnetic recording surface of FIG. 100, when the data of the optical surface is divided into three programs 65a, 65b and 65c, each of the magnetic recording data to be saved,
Magnetic tracks 67a, 67b, 67 on the respective surface regions
Setting the area in c has the effect of reducing the traverse movement amount and shortening the access time. Next, the principle of reproduction will be described.

The block diagram at the time of reproduction in FIG. 93 shows blocks related to reproduction. Although it is almost the same as the block diagram of FIG. 87, only the magnetic reproducing unit 30 is different.

First, the system controller 10 issues a reproduction command and a magnetic track No access command to the traverse controller 3.
Sent to 38. Similarly to FIG. 87, the magnetic head accurately accesses the target magnetic track No. Figure 8
9, the magnetic track 67 is spirally tracked, the outputs of both the A head 8a and the B head 8b are simultaneously input to the magnetic reproducing unit 30, and the head amplifier 340 is operated.
a and 340b, respectively, and demodulators 341a and 341
The demodulation is performed at b, the error is checked by the error check units 342a and 342b, and a normal signal is sent to the AND circuits 344a and 344b only for normal data. An AND circuit 344a, 344b separates the data into addresses and data by a data separation unit.
Only data having no error is sent to the buffer memory 34 and each data is stored at a predetermined address. This data is output from the memory 34 based on the read clock from the system controller 10. When the memory of the buffer memory 34 is about to overflow, an overflow signal is sent to the system control unit 10, and the system control unit 10 issues a command to the traverse control unit to reduce the traverse feed width. Or motor 1
7 is slowed down and the playback transfer rate is lowered. In this way overflow can be prevented.

When the error check unit 342 has many errors, an error signal is sent to the system control unit 10, and the system control unit 10 sends a track pitch reduction command to the traverse control circuit 24a. Thus, the track pitch of the playback is normal T _p from _{2 / 3T p, 1 / 2T} p, 1
/ 3T _p , and the data of the same address is 1.5 times, 2
Since it is reproduced twice or three times, the error rate decreases.
Further, if all the data of the next (n + 1) th track is collected before all the data of the nth track is collected in the buffer memory 34, there is a possibility that the data of the nth track cannot be reproduced. In this case, the system control unit 10 issues a reverse traverse command to the traverse control unit to return the traverse to the inner circumferential direction. Then, by reproducing the nth track, the data of the nth track can be reproduced. Thus, there is an effect that the data can be surely reproduced without increasing the error rate.

Next, a non-tracking disc reproducing operation will be described. As shown in the data layout diagram of FIG. 94,
Recording data 345a, 345b, 345 of the A track
The data is recorded on the disc as shown by c and 345d. The data of B track, B ₁ , B ₂ , B ₃ , and B ₄ are also recorded, but cannot be reproduced when reproduced by the A head because the azimuth angle is different.

For ease of explanation, the B track data is omitted. When the recording data 345 of the A track is reproduced by the A head 8a with the same track pitch T _{po as} that at the time of recording, the track of the track has a discrepancy between the disk and the chucking, and therefore the track tracks 349a, 349b, 349.
c, 349d. Head width T of A head 8a
_{Since H} is wider than T _po, it plays half tracks on both sides. Of course, B track is not reproduced. Therefore, the data reproduced without error in the reproduced signal of each track locus is the A head reproduced data 350a, 350b, 350c, 3
It becomes like 50d and 350e. This data is sequentially shown in Figure 9.
3 is sent to the buffer memory 34 and recorded at a predetermined disk address, and the memory data 351a, 351b
The data of each track is completely reproduced as shown in.

In this way, the non-tracking A track data is reproduced. The B track is reproduced in the same manner.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, since recording / reproducing can be performed with a small track pitch without applying tracking servo of the magnetic head, there is an effect that a large capacity memory can be realized with a simple structure. In particular, since the traverse control is performed by using the address of the optical surface, the traverse feed accuracy may be low, and the linear sensor in the radial direction can be omitted. When applied to MDROM, several KB
~ Number + KB block unit, C without cartridge
When it is applied to a DROM, it has a disadvantage that it can be rewritten only in block units of several hundred B to several KB. However, when focusing on multimedia applications for home use, there is no problem because low cost and large capacity are more important than high-speed accessibility. In exchange for this disadvantage, in the case of the non-tracking servo system, there is an effect that the capacity can be dramatically increased by one digit to two digits or more. This large capacity can be realized at a low cost because the system does not require an expensive track servo. This is because in the case of the non-tracking method, basically, the tracking is accurately performed only by the accuracy of the bearing of the rotary motor. And this bearing precision is realized at low cost. In the case of the MD-ROM used in the cartridge, since the recording wavelength can be set to 1 μm or less, the recording capacity of about 2 to 5 MB can be obtained. Example 12 in the case of a CDROM used naked
Since a printing layer and a protective layer are provided on the magnetic layer as described later in 13, the recording wavelength becomes as long as 10 μm or more. For this reason, in the normal method, only a capacity of several + KB can be obtained. But,
Number + KB to 1MB due to adoption of no-tracking method
A recording capacity of some degree can be obtained. As described above, the eleventh embodiment has an effect that the optical access mechanism of the present CD, CDROM, MD, MDROM can be used as it is, and a large capacity can be achieved at low cost.

(Embodiment 12) A recording / reproducing apparatus according to Embodiment 12 of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

The basic structure is almost the same as the block diagram of FIG. 87 described in the embodiment. The recording / reproducing apparatus of the twelfth embodiment uses a recording medium in which a magnetic recording layer is provided on the back surface of a ROM disk which does not use a cartridge like the CDROM described in the previous embodiment. Since the basic operation of the recording / reproducing apparatus has already been described, the description will be omitted and the recording medium will be described in detail.

FIG. 101 is a perspective view of the recording medium 2. The light transmission layer 5, the optical recording layer 4, the magnetic recording layer 3, and the printing layer 43 on the printing layer 43 are arranged from the bottom, and the print 45 such as a label such as a title of a CD is formed on the printing area 44. A hard protective layer 50 having a Mohs hardness of 5 or more may be provided. CD
In a recording medium such as a CDROM or a CDROM which does not have a cartridge and has an optical recording surface on one side, the printing area 44 can be provided on almost the entire one surface on the opposite side. LD and LD
In the case of having a double-sided optical recording surface such as a ROM, as shown in the perspective view of the recording medium in FIG. 102, the print area 44 can be provided in a narrower area in the central portion that does not affect the optical reproduction.

In this embodiment, the case where a CDROM is used as a recording medium will be described. Here, the configuration and manufacturing method of the recording medium will be described. In the manufacturing process diagram of the recording medium of FIG. Let P be P, and when P = 1, prepare a substrate 47 having the light transmitting portion 5 in which the pits 46 are engraved. When P = 2, the light reflecting film 48 of aluminum or the like is formed by vapor deposition, sputtering or the like. Hc is 150 at P = 3
High Hc of 1750 or 2750 Oe above 0 Oe
The magnetic recording layer 3 is prepared by directly applying a magnetic material such as barium ferrite having the above properties, or transferring the material once applied to the base film together with the adhesive layer. The recording medium of this embodiment is not protected by the cartridge. Therefore, it is necessary to use a high Hc magnetic material so that the recorded data is not destroyed by a strong external magnetic field such as a magnet. Hc is 1750O when magnetic media is used naked in industrial applications
It has been confirmed by a field test that data is not destroyed under normal use conditions by using a magnetic recording material of e to 2750 Oe. For household use, as can be seen from the magnetic field strength diagrams of various household products in FIG. 121, only 1000 to 1200 Gauss magnetic fields are usually present in the household. Therefore, H of the magnetic material of the magnetic recording layer 3 is
c may be set to 1200 Oe or more. In this embodiment, by using a material having Hc of 1200 Oe or more, data destruction in daily life is prevented. In order to improve the reliability during data recording, the reliability is further improved by using barium ferrite or the like and increasing the Hc of the magnetic material to 2500 or more. Barium ferrite is suitable for a CDROM type partial RAM disk in which low cost mass production is indispensable because barium ferrite is inexpensive and can be produced by an inexpensive coating process, and since random orientation is naturally performed, a randomizer process is unnecessary. In this case, it is processed on a disk. What is important is that since recording and reproduction are performed in the circumferential direction, recording characteristics are deteriorated when magnetically oriented in a specific direction like a magnetic card or a magnetic tape. In order to prevent such orientation in a certain direction, a magnetic film is formed by applying an external magnetic field in various directions by a randomizer before the applied magnetic material is solidified. As described above, in the case of barium ferrite, the effect that the randomizing step can be omitted can be obtained. However, in case of CD and CDROM,
As shown in 01, the CD standard requires that the title and contents of the medium be printed and displayed as a label so that the consumer can visually recognize and discriminate the contents of the medium. It is also important to enhance the product value by printing photos in color and making the appearance beautiful. Since magnetic materials are usually dark brown or black tones,
You cannot print directly on this. When P = 4, the dark color of the magnetic recording layer 3 is erased, and in order to enable color printing, a printing base layer 43 of a color with many reflections such as white is formed by coating or the like to have a film thickness of several hundred nm to several μm. . From the viewpoint of recording characteristics, it is preferable that the print underlayer be thin, but if it is too thin, the color of the magnetic recording layer below will be transmitted, so the film thickness d ₂ of the print underlayer 43 is required to have a certain thickness. . In order that light does not pass through, a thickness of at least half the wavelength is required, and therefore a thickness of λ / 2 = 0.2 μm or more is required for the shortest wavelength of visible light λ = 0.4 μm. Therefore, d ₂ is required to have a thickness of 0.2 μm or more. By using d ₂ ≧ 0.2 μm, the effect of shielding the color of the magnetic material as a base for printing can be omitted. On the other hand, when d ₂ > 10 μm, the magnetic recording characteristics are significantly deteriorated due to space loss, which is not preferable. Therefore, at least d ₂ ≦ 10 μm can be used for magnetic recording and reproduction. By setting 0.2 <d ₂ <10 μm, there is an effect that both the color cutoff characteristic and the magnetic recording characteristic can be made compatible. Experiments have revealed that it is desirable to use it at around 1 μm. When a magnetic recording material is mixed with the print base layer 43, there is an effect of substantially reducing space loss.

By applying the printing ink 49 made of dye at P = 5, the label printing 45 as shown in FIG. 101 can be displayed. Since printing is performed on the white print base layer 43, full-color printing is possible. P in FIG.
= 5, the printing ink 49 of the dye is applied, so that the ink soaks into the printing base layer 43 at a depth of d ₃ , and no unevenness is generated on the surface of the printing base layer 43. As a result, the head touch of the magnetic head is improved during magnetic recording / reproduction, and the dropout of printing due to running of the magnetic head is prevented. Thus, the recording medium is completed.

As the manufacturing method, the magnetic recording layer 3 with P = 3,
The printing ink 49 of P = 5 and P = 5 is manufactured using a gravure coating process as shown in the overall perspective view of the coating process of FIG. To explain this, the coating material of the barium ferrite magnetic material transferred from the coating material pot 352 to the coating material transfer roll 353 is selectively etched and remains in the CD-shaped etching portion 355 on the intaglio drum. The unnecessary coating material is removed by the scriber 356. CD
The coating material in the shape of is a CD-shaped coating portion 358 on the soft transfer roll 367 covered with the soft resin portion 361.
Is transcribed as. The coating section 358 is transferred and coated on the surface of the recording medium 2 such as a CD. Before being dried, a magnetic field is applied by the random magnetic field generator 362, and a random magnetization orientation is obtained. Since the soft transfer roll 367 is soft, it can be accurately applied to a hard object such as a CD. In this way, P = 3, P = 4, and P = 6 application of FIG. 103 can be performed. However, the printing process of P = 5 may be an offset printing process because the film thickness is thin. Further, as shown by P = 6 in FIG. 103, by applying a protective layer 50 made of a hard transparent material having a thickness d4 of Mohs hardness of 5 or more on the recording medium, it is possible to prevent the falling of the printing ink and to prevent external scratches. Since the magnetic recording layer 3 can be protected from abrasion by the magnetic head, the reliability of data is improved.

As shown in the cross-sectional view of the coating and transfer process of FIG. 106, a protective layer is formed on the release film 359 by the process of P = 6, 5, 4, 3 in the reverse order of the process described in FIG. 50, printing ink 49, printing base layer 43, and magnetic recording layer 3 are applied, and random orientation is performed by a random magnetic field generator 362. The coating film is aligned with the surface of the substrate 4 on the pit 46 side, and after transfer, it is fixed by thermocompression bonding and the release film 359 is removed, thereby completing the recording medium having the same structure as the process P = 6 in FIG. To do. In the case of mass production, the transfer method has a higher throughput and a lower cost. Therefore, when producing tens of thousands of CDs, the production efficiency is improved. Therefore, it is suitable.

Although the dye is used in the printing of FIG. 103, the pigment printing ink 49 may be used as in the step P = 5 of the coating process diagram of FIG. 104. In this case, the thickness is d3, but by providing the protective layer 50 made of a transparent material containing a lubricant satisfying d4> d3 at P = 6, the effect of reducing unevenness on the surface and improving the head touch by the lubricant is provided. is there. The use of pigments has the effect of enabling wider color printing. In this case, after the step of P = 5, hot pressing may be applied to eliminate surface irregularities and the product may be used as it is as a finished product. In this case, since the protective layer 50 can be omitted, there is an effect that one step can be reduced.

Next, a method of forming the magnetic shield layer will be described. Since the magnetic head is on the side of the magnetic recording layer 3 of the recording medium and the optical head is on the side of the light transmission layer, electromagnetic noise from the actuator of the optical head leaks directly to the magnetic head, and the error rate during reproduction of the magnetic signal is increased. Deteriorates. As shown in the diagram of the relative noise amount from the optical pickup to the magnetic head in FIG. 116, noise of nearly 50 dB is generated. By providing a magnetic shield in the recording medium 2 as a countermeasure, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced. As shown in the manufacturing process diagram of the recording medium of FIG. 107, when P = 2, the magnetic shield effect is obtained by providing the high μ magnetic layer 69 such as permalloy having a high μ and a small Hc by a spat or the like. When it is desired to form the low Hc magnetic layer 69 in a short time or to make it thick in the manufacturing process, a permalloy foil having a thickness of several to several tens of μm may be inserted. It can be made thick even by the plating method. By making it thick, the magnetic shield effect becomes higher. Further, in FIG. 103, the light reflection layer 48 is made of aluminum at P = 2, but light reflection and the magnetic shield can be shared by one film by forming permalloy by sputtering. If you want to thicken permalloy, you can make it at low cost by plating method. This has the remarkable effect of halving the number of steps for the reflection shield film. In addition, in the process of the transfer method, FIG.
In addition to the step shown in FIG. 106, a recording medium having a magnetic shield effect can be obtained by sandwiching the adhesive layer 60a and the high μ magnetic layer 69 such as permalloy foil of several μm to several tens of μm. It can be created in the transfer process.

As described above, the recording medium having the magnetic recording layer and the optical recording layer having the printing surface as shown in FIG. 101 can be prepared. Therefore, it is possible to provide the same label as that of the conventional CD that meets the standard of the CD, and at the same time, the magnetic recording surface can be added. Now, as described above in the magnetic field strength diagram of domestic products in FIG. 121, the magnets existing in daily life are mainly ferrite magnets which are inexpensive. And most of the magnets are not directly exposed. Only a magnetic field of about 1000 Oe is generated even when exposed or in the vicinity. Rare earth magnets, such as magnetic necklaces, are rarely used in daily life, but because of their small size, they are unlikely to magnetize barium ferrite magnetic recording materials. Therefore, by using a magnetic recording material having Hc of 1200 Oe such as barium ferrite and 1500 Oe or more with a margin, it is possible to prevent data destruction of the magnetic recording layer by a magnet existing in daily life. Furthermore, since a magnetic shield layer made of a high μ magnetic material can be added, electromagnetic noise from the optical head during magnetic reproduction can be greatly reduced. The above manufacturing method basically uses an inexpensive construction method such as a gravure coating step and an inexpensive material so that the cost is low, and the RAM function and the printing surface can be improved without increasing the cost of the partial RAM disk such as CD or CDROM. There is a remarkable effect of being obtained.

Now, a method of constructing a recording medium having an identifier indicating the presence or absence of a magnetic layer, that is, an HB identifier for short will be described. As shown in FIG. 213, in the case of a CD, 98 pieces of frames having an EFM-modulated data structure form one block in the data of the optical recording layer. In the Q bits of the subcode of the frame in the TOC, for example, P
A code in which OINT is "BO" is an HB identification code 468a
, The symbol "BO" is not used at present, so that there is an effect that the conventional CD or CD-ROM and the HB medium with the magnetic layer of the present invention can be discriminated while maintaining complete compatibility. . Moreover, since it is recorded in the TOC area, the TOC can be identified at the time of the first reading, so that the HB medium can be identified during the rising operation time.

FIG. 255 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the HB medium, in which the aluminum vapor deposition film 3 is provided on the transparent substrate 5. Then, as shown in FIG. 255 (b), an EFM-modulated signal is formed in this pit, and Qbit4 in the subcode 470c in the data string 470b is formed.
For the control bit 470e of 70d, "001
The HB identification code 468a of "1" is recorded. As another method, "B" is included in the POINT 470f of the TOC.
An O ″ identification code 468a is recorded. This recording medium 2 has an effect that the presence or absence of the magnetic layer can be identified without changing the configuration.

Example 13 Hereinafter, Example 13 of the present invention will be described.
The recording / reproducing apparatus in will be described with reference to the drawings. The basic configuration is similar to the block diagram of FIG. 87 described in the eleventh embodiment. The major difference is that a magnetic material having a higher Hc than that of an ordinary magnetic disk is used as described in Embodiment 12, and a nonmagnetic protective layer having a thickness of 1 μm is formed on the upper layer of the magnetic recording layer.
Since a recording medium having a length of m or more is used, a magnetic head suitable for this recording medium is used and measures are taken to prevent mixed noise due to a magnetic field from the optical head.

First, the structure of the magnetic head will be described. In the overall block diagram of the recording / reproducing apparatus of FIG. 110, the magnetic head of the block diagram of FIG. 87 is divided into two, the write magnetic head 8a and the read magnetic head 8b are integrated, and noise canceling Magnetic head 8s
3 heads are used. Since it is possible to reproduce while recording, error checking can be performed at the same time. Since other operations are the same as those in FIG. 87, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The two heads of the magnetic heads 8a and 8b, which are the features of this embodiment, will be described with reference to the cross-sectional view of the magnetic head portion in FIG. The optical head 6 and the magnetic heads 8a and 8b are arranged to face each other on both sides of the recording medium 2, and the optical head 6 accesses a desired specific track of the optical recording layer 4 on the recording medium 2. As a result, the optical head 6
The magnetic heads 8a and 8b which move in tandem with the magnetic head travel on the magnetic tracks on the back side of the optical tracks on the magnetic recording layer 3, and the magnetic recording is performed by the write magnetic head 8a and the reproduction is performed by the magnetic head 8b. Be seen. This recording / reproducing state is shown in FIG.
An explanation will be given with reference to FIG. The magnetic head 8a has a write track width La and a gap length L.
Since the head gap 70a of gap is provided, the magnetic track 67a having the width of La is recorded on the magnetic recording layer 3.
On the magnetic track accessed by the magnetic head 8, there is a disk-shaped disk cleaning section 376 made of a soft material such as felt, which has the effect of removing dust and dirt on the disk and reducing the error rate during reproduction. FIG. 111
In the OFF state, neither the magnetic head 8 nor the disk cleaning portion 376 connected to the disk cleaning portion connecting portion 380 by the spring is in contact with the recording medium 2. Next, when the magnetic head 8 is lowered, the disk cleaning unit 376 first lands on the recording medium 2 as in the case of ON-A in the figure. The magnetic head portion 8 does not come into contact with the recording medium 2 due to the disk cleaning portion connecting portion 380 including a spring. Therefore O
Since the magnetic head 8 soft-landes in two steps of the recording medium 2 in the N-B state, damage to both the magnetic head 8 and the recording medium 2 even if the magnetic head 8 is raised and lowered while the recording medium 2 is rotating. It has the effect of being prevented from giving. Further, as shown in the top view of FIG. 113, since the magnetic track 67a before the traveling of the magnetic head 8 is cleaned, the effect that the error rate at the time of magnetic recording / reproduction is reduced can be obtained. A magnetic head cleaning unit 377 that interlocks with the magnetic head lifting unit 21 is also provided,
When the magnetic head 8 moves up and down when a disk is mounted, the contact portion of the magnetic head 8 is cleaned by the magnetic head cleaning unit 377 at least once. At this time, the disc of the disc cleaning unit 376 rotates a slight angle and becomes a new face, so that the disc is cleaned by the new face when the next disc is mounted. Since the reproducing head gap 70b of the magnetic head 8a has a width of Lb only, only the width of the reproducing track 67b of the magnetic track 67a is reproduced. In the case of the thirteenth embodiment, the head gap length Lgap of the magnetic head 8a is important. Example 1
The recording medium described in 2 is as described in FIG.
A print base layer 43 and a print layer 49 are provided between the magnetic recording layer 3 and the magnetic heads 8a8b, and the protective layers 50 have a thickness of d2, d3, and d4. Therefore, at least d =
A space loss of d2 + d3 + d4 always occurs.
The space loss S is given by S = 54.6 (d / λ) (dB) (1) when the recording wavelength is λ.

Further, the relationship between the head gap Lgap and λ is given by λ = 3 × Lgap .................................... (2).

As a result of an experiment, it is preferable that the print base layer 43 has a thickness of 1 μm or more from the viewpoint of the light shielding property. In addition, the printing layer 49
The protective layer 50 needs to have a total thickness of 1 μm. Therefore d
Is required to be 2 μm, and d = 2 μm ……………………………………………… (3) From the above three conditional expressions, S = 54.6 × 2 / 3Lgap (dB) ... (4)

This can be represented by the relationship diagram between the head gap and the space loss in FIG. If the space loss alone is not suppressed to at least 10 dB or less, sufficient recording / reproducing voltage characteristics cannot be obtained, and the predetermined reliability cannot be ensured. Therefore, from the graph of FIG. 112, it is understood that LGap needs to be set to at least 5 μm or more for a CD-ROM for a computer that places importance on reliability and for an application using a recording medium with a printing layer. But for game C
Since reliability is not so required in D-ROM applications, optimum reliability and slightly high recording density can be obtained by using a magnetic head having a head gap of 3 μm or more. With a head gap of 200 μm or more, the recording density becomes 100 BPI or less, and the capacity for a magnetic disk is greatly reduced.
Only 00 Bytes can be obtained and it does not meet the demand for game use. Therefore, in consideration of consumer applications, when a printing layer is provided,
When the head gap is in the range of 3 μm to 200 μm, the effect that optimum reliability and optimum capacity are obtained can be obtained.

In addition, in a business use where higher density is prioritized than beauty of printing, use of a recording medium without a printing layer reduces space loss, so that the capacity can be further increased. However, in the case of the hybrid medium of the present invention, the CD
It is supposed to be used naked like. Therefore, space loss due to dust cannot be avoided. Space loss due to oil such as fingers and household waste is the worst d = 1 μm ……………………………………………… (5) It is necessary to consider the equation. The attenuation in this case is shown in FIG. From FIG. 112, in the case of using a medium having no print layer, by setting the head gap to be 1.5 μm or more, there is an effect that recording / reproduction can be performed with a higher recording capacity without being affected by space loss. When there is no print layer, it may be set in the range of 1.5 μm to 200 μm. In this case, FIG.
Alternatively, the magnetic recording layer may be provided on the light reading side.
When it is provided on the light reading side, the print layer can be omitted, so that the head gap can be set to 1.5 μm or more, which has the effect of increasing the capacity.

A magnetic head of a recording / reproducing apparatus for recording / reproducing by rotating a magnetic disk for data recording such as a hard disk or floppy has a slider portion and a head gap is usually 0.5 μm or less. When the recording medium of the present invention is recorded / reproduced using such a conventional magnetic head for a magnetic disk, sufficient recording / reproduction output cannot be obtained due to the presence of the protective layer or the printing layer. However, as in the thirteenth embodiment, the slider portion 41 is provided as shown in the magnetic head portion 8a of FIG. 111 and the head gap of at least the recording head 8a is set to 5 μm or more. Therefore, as shown in the graph of FIG. Is 10
It will be below dB. Therefore, there is an effect that a sufficient recording / reproducing output can be obtained at the time of recording / reproducing.

In the thirteenth embodiment, a full-color label can be printed on the surface of the medium, and as shown in FIG.
It is possible to use a recording medium having the same appearance as the ROM. Therefore, even if the CD having the magnetic recording layer of the present invention is adopted, there is an effect that the difference in appearance does not cause confusion to consumers and the basic function of the CD standard is not impaired. In particular, since barium ferrite, which has a high Hc and a low material cost and does not require a random orientation process, is used for the magnetic recording layer, magnetic data is not destroyed even in the worst conditions in daily life and magnetic fields can be manufactured at low cost. .. As described above, since the CD can be handled in exactly the same manner as the existing CD, there is an effect that it is completely compatible with the CD.

Next, measures for suppressing magnetic field noise from the optical head to the magnetic head will be described. Magnetic head 8b for reproduction due to electromagnetic noise from the optical head actuator 18
Noise is mixed in and the error rate deteriorates.

Therefore, as a first method, by using the recording medium 2 having the magnetic shield layer 69 described in the twelfth embodiment as shown in the transverse sectional view of the magnetic head peripheral portion of FIG. It is possible to prevent the error rate from deteriorating due to the mixing of noise into the magnetic head 8. In this case, when the optical head comes to the end of the disk, since there is no magnetic shield outside the disk, electromagnetic noise from the optical head actuator reaches the magnetic head 8. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 110, a magnetic shield 360 is provided in the peripheral portion of the disk on the recording / reproducing apparatus side to block electromagnetic noise outside the disk. As another method, as shown in FIG. 111, the actuator 18 of the optical head is surrounded by a magnetic shield 360 having a high μ such as permalloy or iron, leaving an opening 362 for the lens.
As a result, the effect that the electromagnetic noise generated by the actuator of the optical head is less mixed into the magnetic head 8b, and the mixed electromagnetic noise is significantly reduced.

The relationship between the gap between the magnetic head and the optical head and the mixed noise in FIG. 116 is the magnetic head in a state where the optical head portion of the recording / reproducing apparatus actually manufactured is fixed and the focus control to the optical recording portion is performed. The relative level of electromagnetic noise mixed from the optical head 6 to the magnetic head 8 is measured by moving the position of the part on a plane facing the recording medium. The second method is to detect this noise and add it to the reproduced signal in anti-phase to reduce the noise component. FIG. 111
As shown in the block diagram of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus, a noise canceling magnetic head 8s and a noise detecting unit such as a magnetic sensor are provided, and the noise canceller unit 378 has a constant addition ratio A in antiphase with the reproducing signal of the magnetic head 8b. The noise component is canceled by adding
Noise can be canceled by optimizing the addition ratio A. The optimum addition ratio A ₀ can be obtained by running a magnetic track having no magnetic recording signal and changing the addition ratio so that the reproduction signal is minimized. You can calibrate A ₀ ^`in that way. This calibration work is performed when the mixed noise becomes large. In this case, the same effect can be obtained by using the recording head 8a as a mixed noise detection unit by utilizing the fact that the recording head 8a is not used during reproduction in FIG. 110 and inputting the signal of the recording head 8a to the noise canceller 378. . In this case, there is an effect that the canceling magnetic head 8s can be omitted.

The configuration when the noise canceling magnetic head 8s is provided will be described. As shown in the configuration diagram of the noise canceling magnetic head of FIG. 129, as shown in FIG.
As shown in the side view of FIG. 3, the noise canceling magnetic head 8s is attached to the magnetic heads 8a and 8b via the coupling portion 8t. FIG. 129 (c) shows a view from above. FIG. 129 (b) shows a side view as seen from the direction of travel of the truck. When the recording medium 2 is contacted, a do space loss in height occurs. From equation (1) of this embodiment, λ = 200
Even in the case of μm, if do is 200 μm or more, the reproduction signal from the magnetic recording layer becomes −60 dB and reproduction is hardly possible. On the other hand, as shown in the diagram of the mixed noise in FIG. 116, even if the magnetic head is moved upward by 0.2 mm, the level of the mixed noise hardly decreases within -1 dB. In this case, if the distance Ls between the noise canceling magnetic head 8s and the reproducing magnetic head 8b is, for example, λ = 200 μm, a gap of λ / 5, that is, 40 μm or more can be provided to prevent mixing of the original signal from the reproducing head. Therefore, there is a great effect that it is possible to almost completely suppress the electromagnetic noise mixed from the optical head drive section to the reproducing magnetic head. Further, instead of the canceling magnetic head 8s, as shown in the configuration diagram of the magnetic sensor of FIG. 130, the magnetic sensor 38 such as a Hall element or an MR element is used.
By providing 1 on the slider 41 near the magnetic head 8, the drive magnetic noise of the optical head 6 can be detected. By adding this signal to the magnetic reproduction signal in opposite phase, the mixed noise can be greatly reduced. In this case, there is an effect that the size can be reduced as compared with the magnetic head detection method.

FIGS. 172 to 175 show the more specific structure of FIG. 129, and FIG. 172 (a) shows an example in which a head having a structure in which the recording head 8a and the reproducing head 8b are combined with one gap is used. Shows.

When heads of exactly the same size are arranged as shown in FIGS. 175 (a) and 175 (b), the effect is the highest although the size is large. 175 (a) and 175 (b) show an example in which the width of the canceling head 8s is narrowed and downsized. In this case, the size can be reduced. 172 (a) and 172 (b) show an example using a canceling magnetic head 8s having a uniform width. Especially FIG. 172
In (c), the slider 41 is provided with a groove 41a which also serves as the above groove having a gap of d ₀ . The air contact surface of the slider 41 is secret from the head 8a, and the air pressure of the magnetic head 8a is smaller. Therefore, there is an effect that the contact between the head and the medium is improved. In this case l ₂ > l ₁
And FIG. 173 shows the cancel head 8s of FIG.
Since the head gap is eliminated and the magnetic signal is not read even when it comes into contact with the magnetic surface, there is an effect that only noise can be picked up. 176 to 178 use the coil 499 as a canceling head.

FIG. 176 (a) shows that the groove of the magnetic head 8 has two grooves.
With one coil 499a, 499b arranged. Figure 1
The magnetic flux 85 of noise such as 75 (b) can be detected. FIG. 177 (a) shows the coil 99 parallel to the head gap.
Since a and 499b are arranged, noise in the magnetic field direction of the head can be detected, so that the effect is high. FIG. 177 (b) shows a block diagram of noise cancellation, and shows 499a and 499a.
The signal b is amplified by the amplifiers 500a and 500c, mixed by the amplifier 500b, and input to the noise input section of the noise canceller 378 of FIG. FIG. 178 (a) shows that the noise detection capability is enhanced by using four coils 499a and 499b parallel to the head cap and 499c and 499d perpendicular to the head cap. By adjusting and mixing the outputs of the parallel coils 499a and 499b and the outputs of the vertical coils 499c and 499d as shown in the block diagram of FIG. 178 (b), a noise detection signal optimum for cancellation can be obtained. The spectrum distribution diagram of FIG. 179 shows the result of actually measuring the electromagnetic noise of the optical pickup with the noise cancel head attached. As you can see from the figure, several KH
The noise generated at z overlaps the reproduction frequency range of the present invention using a wavelength of 100 μm, which makes reproduction difficult. However, it is shown in the figure that the adoption of the cancel head reduces the noise of about 35 dB in this region. Therefore, there is an effect that the error rate at the time of reproduction is greatly improved.

As is apparent from FIG. 116, as the third method, when a space of 10 mm is provided, noise of 15 dB is reduced. Therefore, the distance between the optical head and the magnetic head is 10 m
By setting m or more, there is an effect that noise is significantly reduced. When separated as described above, it is important to maintain the accuracy of the positional relationship between the optical head and the magnetic head. A configuration that specifically realizes this will be described.

As shown in the cross-sectional view of the head traverse portion in FIG. 117, the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 are rotated by the same traverse actuator 23 so that the traverse gears 367a, 367b, 367c cause the traverse shafts 363a, 363b to move in the same direction. Rotate. Since these are reverse-threaded to each other, the optical head 6 has an arrow 51.
As indicated by a, the magnetic heads 8 move to the left in the drawing, and to the right in the direction of the arrow 51b, which are opposite to each other. Then, the positions of the respective heads are adjusted as a result of hitting the position reference points 364a and 364b, the optical head 6 moves to the reference optical track 65a, and the magnetic head 8 moves to the reference magnetic track 67a. . Since the initial setting of the positions of both is performed in this way, the accuracy of the positional relationship between the two during movement is maintained. By performing this positioning at least once when a new recording medium 2 is mounted or when the power is turned on, the two simply move by the same distance. Therefore, when the optical head 8 accesses the specific optical track 65, the magnetic head 6 accurately accesses the specific magnetic track 67 on the same radius as the optical track 65. After that, when the optical head 6 is moved, the magnetic head 8 is also moved by the same amount, and therefore, as shown in the top view of the traverse in FIG. To access. In the case of the outermost circumference, both heads are located on the track on the circumference of radius L ₂ . In the case of the innermost circumference, both heads move on the track on the circumference of radius L ₁ . In this case, the distance between the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 is 2L ₁ , but if this distance is 10 mm or more, the noise mixed from the optical head to the magnetic head becomes small. In the case of a CD, since L ₁ = 23 mm, the distance between the two is 2L ₁ = 46 mm, and as is clear from FIG. 116, the mixed noise is 10 dB or less, and there is a great effect that there is almost no effect. As shown in FIG. 117, when the recording medium 2 is mounted, it cannot be mounted as it is because of the magnetic head 8. Therefore, the magnetic head 8 and the traverse portion are largely lifted by the elevating portion 21 of the magnetic head shown in FIG. 1 to mount the recording medium. At this point, the positional relationship between the two heads described above goes wrong. At this time, as described above, the contact surface of the magnetic head 8 is cleaned by the magnetic head cleaning unit 377. Then, the magnetic head 8 and the traverse portion are returned to predetermined positions. When the magnetic head 8 and the traverse portion are returned to their original positions, the accurate relative positional relationship between the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 is deviated. Therefore, even if the magnetic head 8 is moved in conjunction with the optical head 6 as it is, the specific magnetic track 67 on the same radius as the optical track 65 cannot be accurately accessed. By performing the positioning operation described above at least once when the recording medium is mounted, there is a great effect that the positional accuracy when the magnetic head 67 accesses the desired magnetic track 67 is increased with a simple configuration. It can be said that this is an important function for realizing consumer equipment that requires low cost.

As another configuration, as shown in a cross-sectional view of another traverse portion in FIG. 120, a flexible traverse connecting portion 366 such as a leaf spring and a connecting portion guide 3 for guiding it.
By connecting the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 with 75, it is possible to move in an interlocking manner as indicated by an arrow 51,
Similar to the traverse section described with reference to FIG. 117, the effect of moving both heads in conjunction is obtained. In this system, since the traverse connecting portion 366 is soft, the magnetic head 8 can be easily raised in the direction of the arrow 51a. Therefore, the effect of facilitating the lifting of the magnetic head 8 by the magnetic head elevating / lowering portion when the recording medium 2 is mounted is added.

Further, FIG. 117 may be arranged as shown in the transverse sectional view of the traverse in FIG. 126 so that the distance between the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 is always L ₀ . In this case, the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 have arrows 51a and 51b.
Move in the same direction as shown in. In this case, since the distance between the magnetic head 8 and the optical head 6 can be set to be the largest, there is an effect that the mixed noise of the magnetic head from the optical head is reduced. In the case of a CD, there is no great effect, but the radius is small as in the case of an MD disc, and the optical head 6 is used in the method described in FIG.
When the distance between the magnetic head 8 and the magnetic head 8 is not sufficient, the mixed noise is reduced.

In the description of the present embodiment, the case where the magnetic head and the optical head are arranged at an angle of 180 ° with respect to the center of the disk as shown in FIG. 117 has been described.
The arrangement may be 5 °, 60 °, 90 ° or 120 °. In this case, the effect that the mixed noise can be reduced can be obtained by satisfying the condition that the two heads are separated by 10 mm or more when they are closest to each other. Noise is reduced by combining one or more of the above three measures against mixed noise.

Further, when the electromagnetic shield of the optical head 6 is sufficiently effective, the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 can be made to face each other in the vertical direction as shown in the transverse sectional view of the traverse portion of FIG. In this case as well, the position reference parts 364a, 3
The provision of 64b has the effect of increasing the accuracy of alignment of both heads. This face-to-face arrangement method has the effect of downsizing because all components can be arranged on one side of the center of the disc.

Next, the recording format will be described. Data optical disc is CAV (constant rotation speed)
Therefore, the rotation speed is the same even if the radius of the optical head changes. However, when it is applied to a CDROM, the rotation of the disk becomes CLV, and the linear velocity is constant although the rotational speed varies depending on the radius of the track. In this case, recording formats such as general floppy disks and hard disks cannot be used. In the present invention, in order to increase the recording capacity when applied to the CDROM, the recording formats 370a, 370b, 370c, 370 in the recording format diagram of FIG.
As indicated by d, 370e, the data capacity of each track is set larger toward the outer circumference. A sync part 369, a track number part 371, a data part 372 having a different capacity for each track, a CRC part 373 for error check at the end are provided at the beginning of the data, and a no-signal gap part 374 is set after that. Even if the linear velocities are different from each other, the synchronizing portion 369b and the like at the next head portion are prevented from being erased by mistake during recording. With a CD like this, rather than having the same capacity for each track like a floppy,
This has the effect of increasing the recording capacity by about 1.5 times. Also,
Since the magnetic head performs magnetic recording and reproduction by using the rotation control of the CLV motor based on the signal of the optical head of the CD as it is, there is an effect that a motor control circuit dedicated to magnetic recording can be omitted.

Next, the physical format on the disc will be described. Physical format is "normal mode"
And "Variable track pitch mode". As shown in the physical format diagram in the normal mode on the recording medium of FIG. 123, the optical tracks 65a, 65
The magnetic track 67 is provided on the back surface of each of b, 65c, and 65d.
a, 67b, 67c, 67d are arranged, and in the normal mode, the tracks are arranged at an evenly spaced track pitch Tpo.

Further, in the present invention, the “variable angle” method is adopted. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 119, in the case of the present invention, there are various relative angles between the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 such as 0 °, 180 °, 45 ° and 90 °. Normally, in the conventional rotary magnetic disk type recording / reproducing apparatus, the data synchronizing section 369, that is, the Index 45.
Reference numeral 5 is arranged at a position on a fixed angle with respect to the center of the disk. However, in the variable angle type Index of the present invention, as shown in FIG. 123, the angle of the arrangement of the synchronization unit 369 at the data start point is defined as the optical block of the specific MFS of the optical recording unit of the CD as Index. By doing so, it can be arbitrarily selected at a pitch of 17.3 mm in the circumferential direction. Further, in this case, if the MSF information of the optical frame of the index for each track is recorded as shown in FIG. 214, the Index information can be obtained simultaneously with the tracking. When Sync next to MSF is used as Index, recording can be started with an accuracy of 170.8 μm as shown in FIG. 213. In this case, as shown in FIG. 123, the magnetic recording is accurately performed on the Sync36 based on the Index.
You can start at 9, but you can't always end it exactly.
If it does not end correctly, the recording signal at the end causes Sync
369 is overwritten. To avoid this, the number of light pulses for one round should be known. Therefore, first, the optical recording unit of Index is rotated. Then, on the way, the light beam is returned to the original track by one track. Then again Index
Play to the optical address of. If the number of light pulses during this period is recorded, one revolution can be performed accurately. If the data thus measured is recorded in the magnetic recording portion of the magnetic track / optical address correspondence table of FIG. 214, that is, track 0 or track 1, it is not necessary to measure the number of pulses again.

In this way, since the number of MSF blocks and the number of physical frames for one round are known, one frame, that is, magnetic recording is completed with high accuracy of 173 μm, as described above, and destruction of Sync369 can be prevented. Since Gap 374 can be minimized, the recording capacity can be increased.

In this case, in order to obtain synchronization, it is necessary to quickly obtain the subcode data. After the optical reproduction signal is EFM-decoded in FIG. 211, the subcode of the specific MSF is obtained from the subcode synchronization detection unit 456. Further detailed description will be given with reference to FIG. 215.
The index detection unit 457 compares with the subcode of the optical address of the specific magnetic track, and if they match, the data is output from the data buffer 9b and data recording is started from Sync of the block next to the Index address. In this case, since the subcode information that can be obtained fastest is used, the delay time is short and the cue can be accurately performed.

Incidentally, there is a possibility that the data of the optical address which becomes the Index is sometimes destroyed, in which case magnetic recording on the track cannot be performed. Figure 2 to avoid this
As shown in 14, by defining an optical address without error next to the optical address and recording the optical address MSF information in the magnetic track table of the magnetic recording section,
The effect is that the truck can be used again.

As a result, the effect that the detection means and the detection circuit for the absolute angle of the disk can be omitted is obtained. Further, since the head portion of the magnetic recording can be started from the portion of the arbitrary rotation angle, in the case of the CD, the data recording can be started immediately after reading the specific optical address information of the optical recording portion such as the subcode serving as the index. Therefore, at the time of reproduction, the reproduction of the synchronous portion at the head of the magnetic data is started immediately after reading the optical address information of the track, so that there is no loss time of the rotation waiting time at the time of recording or reproduction of the magnetic data, and the substantial loss occurs. There is also a great effect that the data access time is shortened. This method is particularly effective when the same type of recording / reproducing apparatus is used. Here, a method of accessing the magnetic track will be described. FIG. 2 of Example 13
As shown in 13, the optical address information is recorded in the Q bit of the subcode in the form of minutes, seconds, frames, or MSF. When accessing the optical track, it is necessary to access the MSF itself, but the magnetic track width is several hundred μm, which is two orders of magnitude larger than the optical track, and corresponds to several hundred optical track widths.

Therefore, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 253, first, in step 468a, the recording / reproducing of the specific magnetic track is started, and in step 468b, the optical address-
The optical address corresponding to the magnetic track is obtained from the magnetic track correspondence table. In step 468c, the reference light address M
Obtain ₀ S ₀ F ₀ . In step 468d, it is confirmed whether it is magnetic reproduction, and if it is reproduction, in step 468e, the upper limit value M ₂ S ₂ F ₂ and the lower limit value M ₁ S ₁ F ₁ of the search address range are calculated, and the optical address is searched in step 468f. 468g
At step 468h, the magnetic data reproducing operation is started when it is confirmed that the upper limit value and the lower limit value are within the range. If there is no error in step 468j, the reproduction is completed. If there is an error, the number of times is checked in step 468j, and the step is checked. Four
At 68k, the search optical address range is reduced and magnetic reproduction is performed.

Returning to step 468d, for magnetic recording, it is checked in step 468m whether there is an optical index,
If Yes, in step 468n, an optical address in a narrower range than step 468e, for example, ± 5 frames is set, in steps 468p and 468q, the optical head is accessed in the optical track range, and in step 468r, the optical head is indexed based on the optical index mark. Magnetic recording is started at 468 s and completed at step 468 t.

[0174] Returning to step 468m, when there is no light index mark is to search for a specific optical address M ₀ S ₀ F ₀ in step 468u, after the access in step 468v, of M ₀ S ₀ F ₀ in step 468w When the specific codes S ₀ and S ₁ of the EFM modulation signals recorded in the subcode areas of the first and second frames shown in FIG. 213 of the block following the block are detected, magnetic recording is cueed. , Start recording at step 468x, step 468
Completed at t. By using the method of FIG. 253, when accessing the magnetic recording track, it is only necessary to search for a plurality of optical addresses within a range of several tens of frames before and after the optical address, and therefore, compared to the case of searching for one optical address. The effect that the access time of the magnetic track is greatly shortened can be obtained. Further, by making the search range of the optical address in the case of recording narrower than the search range in the case of reproduction by employing ± 20 frames and ± 5 frames, for example, there is an effect that the optical recording can be performed more reliably.

Next, the “variable track pitch mode” will be described. General RO like a game console
Mount the M disk and start the program.
First, the TOC track is read, the specific track in which the program is recorded is read, and the specific track in which the data is recorded is read. This procedure is
It's the same every time. For example, when using a CAV optical disc, as shown in FIG.
4th track, 65c 2504th track 65d, 36th
Let's assume that a fixed track such as 04 track 65e is accessed. When the hybrid disc of the present invention is used, if the magnetic information required at the time of rising is in a magnetic track other than the magnetic track on the back side of the optical track to be accessed at the time of rising, the device is an extra magnetic track in addition to the access to the optical track. Will be accessed. Therefore, the initial rise is delayed accordingly. Further, if the track pitches in the "normal mode" are evenly spaced, the probability that the center of the magnetic track will be behind the optical track is low. Therefore, it is necessary to access a magnetic track different from the optical track, and in this case as well, the rising speed becomes slow. In the "variable track pitch mode" of the present invention, for example, the four optical tracks 65b, 65c, which need to be read at the time of the rising,
Magnetic tracks 67b, 67c, on the back side of 65d, 65e,
The feature is that 67d and 67e are defined. The track number and the address information of the optical recording section which is the index corresponding to each track number, and the subcode information in the case of a CD are recorded in the TOC section of the optical recording section or the TOC section of the magnetic recording section. Next, if you set to record the data to be read on the magnetic track at the time of rising, such as the number of items acquired in the game at the end of the previous time, progress tribute, score, personal name, etc. Even if the magnetic track on which the necessary information is recorded is not specially accessed, the magnetic data is automatically accessed at the time of rising and the magnetic data is read at the time of rising, so there is no loss time and the effect of significantly increasing the rising time can be obtained. . In this case, the track pitches between the tracks are Tp1, Tp2, Tp3, as shown in FIG.
It becomes Tp4 and takes a random value. Therefore, the recording capacity is slightly reduced, but the use in which the rising speed is prioritized is effective.

The “variable pitch mode” and “variable angle mode” are also effective for music purposes, for example, karaoke. When the present invention is applied to karaoke, it is possible to record and store personal environment setting data such as pitch height of each individual sung song, tempo of the song, amount of echo, DSP parameters, etc. for each song. With this, once set, the karaoke CD is automatically inserted into the karaoke machine to automatically play back the song with the pitch, tempo, and echo that match each individual. The effect that you can enjoy is obtained. In this case, a magnetic track on the back side of the optical track 65b, 65c, 65d, 65e of the beginning of each song is defined, and individual karaoke data relating to the song is recorded on the magnetic track 67b, 67c, 67d, 67e. Keep it. Then the light track 6
When a karaoke song of 5c is selected, individual karaoke setting data is recorded on the magnetic track 67c on the back side of the song, and when the reproduction of a specific song is started, the tune of the song is rotated during one revolution of the disc. Music is output with the pitch, tempo, and echo set. As described above, even in the case of music, the variable pitch mode has a great effect that both optical data and magnetic data can be quickly accessed. This is effective when used for environment setting such as a DSP sound field for each song in a portable music application.

When the present invention is applied to a CDROM, Hc
Is set to 17500 e, a RAM capacity of about 32 kB can be obtained. The ROM capacity of the optical recording surface of the CDROM is 5
Since it is 40 MB, there is a capacity difference of nearly 100,000 times. Actual CDROM products rarely use up 540MB, and there is a few + MB free space even in the smallest case. In the present invention, the free area of the ROM is used to record the compression / expansion program for data compression / expansion and various reference tables for compression in the ROM, and the data to be recorded in the RAM area is compressed. This method will be described with reference to the compression method diagram of FIG. In the case of a game, for example, the optical recording unit 4 has information having a strong correlation with the game content that is considered necessary in the process of programming the game, such as a place name reference table 368a and a person name reference table 368b.
A reference table for compression such as is recorded in advance.
Since the capacity of the free area of the ROM is large, various reference tables of information such as personal names, place names, etc., which are considered to be frequently used, can be prepared. For example, "Washin
The word "gton" is used as the magnetic recording layer 3 in the RAM area.
When recording on, the area of 80 bits is consumed as it is. However, in the case of the present invention, when the compression reference table 368a is referred to, "Washington" is "1".
It can be seen that the binary code is defined as "0".
In this case, 80-bit data has been compressed into 2-bit data of "10". By recording this compressed data in the magnetic recording layer 3, recording can be performed with a capacity of 1/40. It is generally known that a lossless compression method can achieve 2-3 times compression. However, by using this compression method, it is possible to compress data 10 times or more if the application is limited.
The magnetic recording capacity of the B CDROM is substantially equivalent to that of a magnetic disk having a magnetic recording capacity of 320 kB. As described above, in the case of the hybrid disc of the present invention, the physical ROM capacity is reduced by using the ROM area of the optical recording unit, but compression is performed, so that the substantial logical RAM storage capacity can be significantly increased. is there. In FIG. 125, since the compression / decompression program is recorded in the ROM section of the optical recording section, RA
There is an effect that the substantial capacity of the M region is not reduced. If the RAM area of the magnetic recording unit has a sufficient margin, the compression / decompression program may be recorded in the magnetic recording unit. Specifically, Hulfman's optimal encoding method and Ziv-Lempe
This can be realized by using the data compression method of l. Zi
Reference table and Hash for v-Lempel method
By recording a function in advance and recording it in the optical recording unit, it is possible to reduce the recording data in the magnetic recording unit.

Here, an example of a specific overall operation will be described with reference to the flowcharts of all operations in FIGS. 127 and 128.

First, with the magnetic head lifted, a disk is mounted in step 410, and the magnetic head is returned to its home position in step 411. In step 412, the optical head is set to T
Moving to the OC track, in step 413, the TOC optical data is read. The first method is the CD of FIG. 213.
Realized by using the control bits Q ₁ to Q _4-bit sub-code data diagram. When Q ₃ = 1 is defined as having a magnetic recording layer, the magnetic layer can be identified. Then, the data track of the magnetic layer after the optical track, for example, in FIG. 213, Q ₁ , Q ₂ , Q ₃ , Q ₄ = 0000, 1000, 0001, 1001 and 0100 are already used. Therefore, Q ₁ , Q ₂ , Q ₃ , Q ₄ = 0, ₁ , ₁ , 0
Is defined as a magnetic data track, the format information of the magnetic track can be recorded in the TOC. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 214, the physical position of the CD of the optical recording section, which is the index that is the starting point of recording and reproduction of each magnetic track, is recorded. For example, for the first track, M
When the optical head accesses SF, that is, a block of 3 minutes 15 seconds 55 frames, the magnetic head accesses the first track. As shown in FIG. 213, the Index indicating the recording start position is only MSF information, and an accuracy of 17.3 mm can be obtained. To further improve the accuracy, if the specific frame of the specific MSF is specified, Inde
The x signal is obtained. Therefore, for example, an Index is created by the Sync signal of the block next to the specific MSF block,
When recording is started, it is possible to find the beginning of recording and reproduction with an accuracy of 176 μm. In this case, C as described in FIG.
Since the Index is not aligned on a certain angle due to the LV,
Although the Index of each track is different, it may be used for actual recording and reproduction. Since the Index is obtained by using the MSF information in this way, there is no need to specially provide the Index, which has the effect of simplifying the configuration. This data contains a flag indicating whether or not the optical disk has a magnetic recording portion, address information such as the subcode number of the CD corresponding to the position of each default magnetic track of the magnetic data, and the presence or absence of the variable pitch mode. . In step 414, the presence or absence of the flag of the magnetic recording layer is confirmed. If Yes, the process proceeds to step 418, and if No, the optical mark indicating the presence or absence of the magnetic recording layer on the magnetic recording surface or the like is read in step 415, and the optical mark is determined in step 416. If not, the process jumps to step 417 of block 8 and no magnetic recording / reproduction is performed on this disc. In step 418, the magnetic recording / reproducing mode is entered, and the magnetic track initialization step 402 is entered. In step 419, the magnetic head is lowered onto the medium surface, and in step 420
After reading the magnetic data of the TOC at step 421
Raise the magnetic head to prevent abrasion. Step 422
At step 423a, the error flag indicating the error state of the magnetic data is checked, and if there is a flag, the process goes to block 5. In the block 5 cleaning instruction block 427 of the magnetic disk surface, the optical disk is ejected in step 427a, and in step 427b, a message "Clean the optical disk" is displayed on the display unit of the device and step 427 is executed.
Stop at c. On the other hand, in step 424, it is checked whether the optical address correspondence table of each magnetic track is the default value recorded on the optical recording surface side. If NO, step 4
At 26, based on the magnetic data information of the TOC track, the contents of a part of the magnetic track one-optical address correspondence table are updated,
Save it to the internal memory of the main unit. If yes, block 1
The reproduction block 403 is entered.

In step 428, if there is a magnetic track read command, the process goes to block 2, if it comes, it goes to step 429. If it is not in the variable track pitch mode, it goes to block 2, and if it does, in step 430, the optical track group number n. To 0. In step 431, n is set to n + 1, and if n is the final value in step 432, the process jumps to step 438. If the final value is not reached, the first optical track of the n-th optical track group is accessed in step 433. In step 434, if the default magnetic track is acceptable, in step 436 the magnetic head is directly moved to the medium surface, in step 437 magnetic data is read and stored in the internal memory, and the process returns to step 431. On the other hand, if the optical address corresponding to the magnetic head has no default value, the optical address other than the default value is accessed in step 435, the magnetic data is read in steps 436 and 437, and the process returns to step 431. Step 43
If n is incremented by 1 in 1 and n reaches the final value in step 432, optical data reading and magnetic data reading are completed in step 438. Therefore, in the case of a game machine, the game program is started and the magnetic recording unit Based on the data recorded in, the game scene that ended last time is reproduced. At step 439, the magnetic head is raised to the internal “memory rewrite” block 405 of block 3.

Now, returning to step 429, if it is not the variable track pitch mode, the process jumps to the normal track pitch mode 405 of the block 2. Step 440
If not in normal track pitch mode, block 3
Jump to, and if Yes, in step 411, n
Step 4 in response to the access command for the second magnetic track
At 42, wait for the optical address corresponding to the nth magnetic track in the internal memory of the microcomputer 10, and then step 443.
Then, immediately after accessing this optical address, step 4
The magnetic data is read at 44, stored in the internal memory at step 445, and the process jumps to block 3. In the rewriting step 405 of block 3, in step 446, it is checked whether or not there is a rewriting command.
5 and if Yes, check in step 447 if it is the final accumulation instruction, and if Yes, go to block 5 and "N".
If "o", the process proceeds to step 448. At step 448, it is checked whether the magnetic data to be rewritten exists in the internal memory of the main body. If "Yes", the process jumps to step 454, magnetic recording is not performed, and only the internal memory is rewritten. If "No", the optical track one-optical address correspondence table is checked in step 449 to access a specific optical track, the magnetic head is lowered in step 450, and step 4
At 51, 452 and 453, the magnetic data is read out, stored in the internal memory, and the magnetic head is raised. At step 454, the information transferred to the internal memory is rewritten, and the process goes to block 4.

Final accumulation block 40 of block number 4
In step 6, first, in step 455, it is checked whether or not it is the final accumulation instruction. If “No”, in step 458, if the work is completed, the process jumps to block 6, and if the work is not completed, the process jumps to block 1 and returns. If step 455 is Yes, step 456
In step 1, it is checked whether there is updated data in the magnetic data in the internal memory, only the updated data is extracted, and if there is no update in step 457, the process proceeds to step 458. Access the optical address of the track, steps 460, 47
The magnetic head is lowered at 0 and 471, magnetic data is recorded immediately after the detection of the optical address, and the recorded data is checked.
If the error rate is large in step 472, block 7
Jump to the magnetic head cleaning block 408 of No. 4, raise the magnetic head in Steps 481 and 482, clean the magnetic head by the head cleaning unit, record again in Step 483, check the error rate, and if OK, go to Block 1. If not, jump to the magnetic disk cleaning instruction block in block 5.

Now, returning to step 472, if the error rate is small, it is checked in step 473 whether the recording is completed. If “N0”, the process returns to step 470. If the result is Yes, the magnetic head is raised in step 474, and in step 475 the entire recording is completed. If the work is completed, the process proceeds to the end block of block 6, and if not completed, the process returns to block 1.

At the end step 407 of this block 6, the magnetic head is raised at step 476, the magnetic head is cleaned at the magnetic head clean portion at 477, and if there is an EJECT command at step 478, the optical disc is ejected at step 479. , EJECT does not need to be stopped at step 480. The recording / reproducing apparatus according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention operates according to the above flow chart.

The mixed noise is reduced even if a band filter having the same band as the frequency distribution of the reproduction signal of the magnetic head is added to the drive circuit of the actuator 18. Also, the electromagnetic noise is reduced by accessing the magnetic track and then turning off the drive current of the actuator of the optical head 6, reproducing by the magnetic head 8b, and starting driving the actuator at the end of reproduction.

Many existing CDs have a thick printing ink applied to the back surface by screen printing or the like, and have a thickness of several tens μ.
There are m irregularities. If the magnetic head 8 is brought into contact with such a CD, the printing ink on the uneven portion may drop off and be damaged. When the recording medium 2 having the magnetic shield layer 69 is inserted, as shown in the ON state of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 115 when the recording medium is inserted, there is no magnetic shield layer 69 as shown in the OFF state. Electromagnetic noise from the actuator of the optical head 6 is significantly reduced as compared with the case where the recording medium 2 is inserted. This noise is output from the magnetic head reproducing circuit 30 and can be easily detected. That is, the recording medium of the present invention and the conventional recording medium such as a CD can be discriminated without contacting the magnetic head 8 with the magnetic recording layer 3. Then, the magnetic head 8 is brought into contact with the back surface of the recording medium having no magnetic recording layer such as CD or LD by bringing the magnetic head 8 into contact with the recording surface only when the recording medium having the magnetic recording layer of the present invention is inserted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the printed matter on the back surface and the optical recording surface from being damaged by the magnetic head. As another method, referring to FIG. 111, the TOC of the optical recording portion of the CD
Discriminating code indicating that the magnetic recording layer of the medium exists in the optical track portion in the vicinity of the magnetic field and the TOC portion is read in advance, and the optical TOC is read without the magnetic head 8 coming into contact with the medium to discriminate the magnetic layer. Only when the code is detected, the magnetic head 8 is lowered onto the medium surface. By this method, existing CD
Since the magnetic head 8 does not come into contact with either the optical recording side or the printing surface side of the medium when the is inserted, there is an effect of preventing damage to the existing CD. A specific optical mark may be provided on the printed surface of the optical disc, and the presence of the magnetic recording layer may be determined only when the mark is present.

(Fourteenth Embodiment) A fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 134 shows a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 14 of the present invention.

In this embodiment, recording or reproduction is performed in the magnetic recording section 3 by performing modulation or demodulation based on the optical clock signal 382 of the optical recording / reproduction signal on the optical recording surface of the recording medium 2. Since the basic operation is the same as that in the case of FIG. 110, detailed description of the entire operation is omitted.

In FIG. 134, the optical clock 382 is reproduced from the optical reproduction signal in the clock reproduction circuit 38a in the optical reproduction circuit. This optical clock 382 is frequency-divided, and the magnetic clock signal 383 shown in FIGS. 134 and 135 is generated in the clock circuit 29a in the magnetic recording circuit 29, and becomes the clock for the modulation of the modulation circuit 334. FIG. 216 is a diagram for explaining this state in detail. The optical clock of the clock regeneration unit 38a of the optical regeneration circuit is 4.3 MHz.
Is. This signal is dropped by a frequency divider 457 into a modulation clock signal of the MFM modulator 334 of the present invention of 15 to 30 KHZ, and magnetically recorded. As mentioned above, Index is indexed.
The detection unit 457 detects the optical address and performs the operation. The rotation control of the motor in this case is performed based on the optical signal. As shown in the time chart of FIG. 218, magnetic recording is started by the periodic signal after the optical index.

At the time of reproducing the magnetic signal, the magnetic reproducing circuit 3
In the clock circuit 30a of 0, the magnetic clock signal 38
3 is reproduced and becomes a clock for demodulation by the demodulation unit 30a.
The operation during magnetic reproduction will be described in detail with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 217. In this case, after the optical address of the Index is reproduced, the power source of the actuator of the optical pickup 6 is turned off as shown in FIG. Is demodulated and the motor rotation is controlled. The reproduction signal from the magnetic head 8 is shaped by the waveform shaping unit 466, and the clock reproduction unit 467 reproduces an approximate reproduction clock, and the pseudo magnetic synchronization signal generator 462.
Sent to. In the magnetic synchronization signal detection unit 459, the magnetic synchronization clock signal is reproduced, demodulated into a digital signal by the MFM demodulator 30b, and error-corrected by the error correction unit 36.
It is output as magnetic reproduction data. Since the magnetic reproduction signal is obtained by dividing the optical reproduction signal by a constant division ratio, when the optical reproduction signal is switched to the magnetic reproduction signal, the PLL 459a of the magnetic synchronization signal detection unit 459 is switched from optical to magnetic. Since the signal obtained by dividing the optical reproduction clock until just before is sent as reference information, the pull-in center frequency is set in the vicinity of this. Therefore, when the light is switched to the magnetism, it is pulled in by the magnetic reproduction clock PLL in a short time. A magnetic recording clock is generated by dividing the optical reproduction clock, and magnetic recording is performed, so that the optical reproduction clock can be switched to the magnetic reproduction clock in a short time even when the optical head 6 is turned off during reproduction of a magnetic signal. effective. When the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 run on the same circumference or on different circumferences, a constant division ratio is sufficient, but when running on different circumferences without being fixed. Can be calculated by calculating the frequency division ratios by obtaining the radii r _M and r _O.

Next, the rotation control method will be described. Rotation control during optical reproduction is performed by the shortest / longest pulse detection unit 460 of the motor rotation control unit 26 of FIG. 217, and the pseudo optical synchronization signal generator 461 to generate an approximate optical synchronization signal.
The motor control unit 26a rotates the number of rotations of the motor 17 to a substantially specified number of rotations at the feed rotation number. At this time, the changeover switch 465 is in the B position. Changeover switch 4 when the optical synchronization signal detector 465 is synchronized
Send a switch command to 65 and switch from B to A.
Next, immediately after the optical reproduction is turned off at t = t ₂ in the time chart of FIG. 218 and switched to the magnetic reproduction, the period T of the MFM of the magnetic reproduction signal is measured by the waveform shaping unit 466 to obtain an approximate value. In the case of the present invention, a magnetic synchronization signal of 15 KHz or 30 KHz can be obtained. This signal is applied to the frequency divider / multiplier 4 via the pseudo magnetic synchronization signal generator 462.
At 64, the optical rotation synchronizing signal and the clock frequency are matched and sent to the changeover switch 465. Immediately after switching from light to magnetism, the changeover switch 465 switches from A to C, and rough rotation control is performed. After that, the magnetic synchronization signal detector 45
When the PLL 459a of No. 9 is locked, the changeover switch is switched from C to D, and accurate rotation control is performed by the magnetic synchronization signal. Thus, at time t = t _{3 in} the timing chart of FIG. 218, the magnetic reproduction signal is synchronized with the reproduction clock, so that the magnetic data is continuously demodulated.

When an error occurs due to a scratch on the medium surface at t = t _{4 and} te continues for a certain period of time, t = t
_{At 5} , the magnetic reproduction is turned off, the optical reproduction is turned on, and rotation control is performed by the optical reproduction signal for the period of t _R to stabilize the rotation of the motor.

When the period of t _R has elapsed, the optical reproduction is turned off and the magnetic reproduction is turned on at t = t ₇ . Since the error has ended, the shift of the rotation control from light to magnetism is completed in a short time, and the magnetic recording synchronization signal is reproduced at t = t ₈ , so that Data 5 is surely reproduced. In this way, even if there is an error due to a scratch on the medium, it can be recovered in a short time, and it does not become a place-name data error. In this way, magnetic reproduction is performed while switching between optical reproduction, signal-based rotation control, and magnetic reproduction signal-based rotation control in a time-division manner, so that a stable magnetic signal reproduction is possible without being affected by electromagnetic noise from the optical pickup during optical reproduction. There is an effect that it becomes possible. Even when the magnetic head 8 and the optical head 6 are arranged at a distance of 1 cm or more, magnetic reproduction can be performed using the method of FIGS. 217 and 218. In this case, optical reproduction and magnetic reproduction can be performed simultaneously. Motor 17
Rotates.

As shown in FIG. 135, the rotation speed ω of the recording medium 2 largely changes due to rotation unevenness of the motor called wow and flutter. When the magnetic recording clock is fixed, the magnetic recording signal recording wavelength λ on the recording medium 2 varies variously due to the above variation even on the same track. As shown in FIG. 135 of the present invention, a magnetic clock 383 is generated from the optical reproduction clock 382 by frequency division or the like to perform magnetic recording, so that a magnetic recording signal having a cycle of an accurate length is recorded on the recording medium 2. Can be recorded. Therefore, there is an effect that reliable recording can be performed at the shortest recording wavelength. Further, since the recording signal can be accurately arranged in one track of the recording section for recording one rotation, the guard gap section 374 for preventing the overlapping recording described in FIG. 123 can be set to the minimum.

Even when reproducing the magnetic signal, the demodulated clock can be accurately reproduced by dividing the frequency of the optical clock signal as shown in FIG. Therefore, the range of the demodulation determination window time 385 during reproduction can be set narrow. Therefore, there is an effect that the data discrimination ability is improved and the error rate is improved.

Further, the recording capacity can be doubled or tripled by using this optical recording / reproducing clock. In normal binary recording, only 1 bit can be recorded in 1 symbol as shown by Data1 in FIG. However, r in FIG.
The optical clock signal 38, as shown in FIG.
By using the accurate time Top of 2, the time width modulation of the magnetic recording signal 384, that is, the PWM can be applied. By magnetically modulating the waveform of one symbol, the magnetic recording signal 38
4 values of 4 a, 384 b, 384 c, 384 d, 4 values of 00, 01, 10 and 11, that is, 2 bits
By allocating, the amount of recording data can be increased because the number of symbols increases from 1 bit to 2 bits. In this case, as shown by the signal 384d, an even period T
When recorded at o, λ / 2 is t ₃ '-t ₃ = T as shown in the figure.
o-dT, which is the shortest recording wavelength, that is, the shortest recording period T
Since it is less than min, normal recording cannot be performed. Therefore,
Shifting the magnetic clock only dT where t = t ₃ of the magnetic recording signal 384d as a new starting point. Then, t ₄ =
The t ₃ 'dT time becomes a discrimination window 384 for discriminating 00 of Data2, and in the case of the pulses of t ₅ , t ₆ and t ₇ , 01 bit, 10 bit, 11 bit and 2 bit data are demodulated respectively.

Thus, in the case of binary recording such as NRZ, only 1 bit can be recorded per symbol, but 2 bits can be recorded according to the present invention. Modulation width of pulse width modulation is 8
The number of types is 3 bits per symbol, and the number of types is 4 bits per symbol, which is a great effect that a recording capacity of less than 3 times and 4 times is obtained. This is because the wavelength of the optical recording is 1 μm or less, whereas the wavelength of the magnetic recording of the present invention has a lot of space loss, so that the wavelength is 10 μm to 1 μm.
Since it is 00 μm, there is a wavelength difference of several tens to 100 times. Therefore, there is an effect that the pulse interval of the magnetic recording signal can be measured by using the clock signal of the optical signal with a resolution of several tenths to one hundredth of the wavelength of the magnetic recording signal.
From this, the recording capacity theoretically becomes several tens to 100 times the recording capacity of the binary recording due to the combination of the PWM and the optical signal clock. Actually, a recording capacity of several times to several tens of times can be obtained due to waveform distortion of magnetic recording.

In this way, the first optical recording clock signal recorded in the CDROM is used as the reference clock signal, and
The method (2) has an effect that recording can be always performed at a constant recording wavelength. In the second method, by performing PWM (pulse width modulation) using the optical recording clock signal as a reference signal,
There is an effect that the recording capacity can be increased from several times to several tens of times.

Next, the area of the magnetic recording portion was previously detected,
A method for preventing the destruction of the magnetic head and the like will be described in more detail. The area of the magnetic recording portion of the recording medium 2 of the present invention varies depending on the application. CD ROM for games and C for personal computers
Since the DROM requires a large recording capacity, the recording area of each track is set on the entire surface of the recording medium 2. On the other hand, the amount of information required to record the information such as the music title and the music order and the copy protection code information on the music CD may be about several hundred B. In this case, since the recording area of one track to several tracks is sufficient, the remaining portion of the CD excluding the magnetic track portion can be printed on the printing surface side with many irregularities such as screen printing. It is also possible to provide a one-track magnetic track on the inner or outer circumference of the optical recording surface. In the case of one track, as shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and (b), the recording material can be added to the read-only disk by simply adding the lifting motor 21, the lifting circuit 22, the magnetic recording / reproducing block 9 and the magnetic head 8. This has the effect of simplifying the configuration and reducing costs. In the case of the 1-track system, the recording capacity is small at the inner circumference. As shown at 67f in FIG. 124, when used on a CD by recording on only one track of the outermost magnetic track 67f, even one track has a wavelength of 4
A capacity of 2 KB is obtained at 0 μm. In this case, since an access mechanism to the truck is unnecessary, the structure is simplified and the size is reduced.

In this case, when the CD is loaded,
At the same time when the TOC of the optical track 64a is read by the optical head 6, the rotary motor 17 is CLV driven by the TOC clock. Since the TOC radius of the CD is constant, it rotates at a low speed. Magnetic recording / reproduction is performed in this state. The magnetic recording index signal and sync signal are read from the optical track 65. At this time, as shown in FIG. 84, if the information indicating that the magnetic recording layer 3 is present is contained in the optical track 65 around the TOC portion or the TOC, the optical recording block 7 detects this information and moves the head up and down. The motor 21 is driven to bring the magnetic head 8 into contact with the magnetic recording layer 3 as shown in FIG. 84 (b) to reproduce the magnetic recording signal.

Reproduced data is temporarily stored in the memory unit 34 of the recording / reproducing apparatus 1 and updated using this data to reduce the number of actual magnetic recording / reproducing operations and reduce wear. As shown in FIG. 84, the TOC optical track 65a and the outermost magnetic track 67f in the case of one track are simultaneously recorded and reproduced, so that the physical distance is close to 3 cm. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 116, the electromagnetic noise emitted by the optical head 6 is reduced by 34 dB from being mixed into the magnetic head 8.
Therefore, there is an effect that the mixed noise is greatly reduced.

In the case of the 1-track system, the magnetic recording layer 3
May be provided on the surface on the optical recording side because the outer peripheral portion is used. In this case, when the magnetic recording layer 3a and the magnetic head 8a shown in the dotted line in FIG. 131 are used for a CD player of the upper lid 38a system as shown in the lifting motor 21a, the magnetic head 8a is housed on the lower surface of the CD, so that the size can be reduced. At the same time, there is an effect that the structure is simple because it is not necessary to provide the upper lid.

By forming the magnetic recording layer 3a of FIG. 131 on the transparent substrate 5 side by a thick film method such as screen printing, a thickness of several tens of μm to several hundreds of μm, that is, a height is generated. Due to this height, the magnetic head 8a contacts only the magnetic recording layer 3a and does not contact the transparent substrate 5. Therefore, the transparent substrate 5 is not scratched, and there is an effect that it does not hinder the optical recording and reproduction. In this case, since the magnetic recording section is provided, the capacity of the optical recording section is reduced accordingly. Also, FIG.
As shown at the left end of the
Only the ho of mm or more is fixed, and the CD is bent by pressing the rubber roller 21d in the direction of the arrow 51 by the elevating part 21b attached to the upper lid 38a or the like.
The magnetic recording portion 3b contacts the magnetic head 8a. In this case, since pressure is applied, there is an effect that even if dust is present, contact is made and magnetic recording characteristics are improved.

In this case, the CD is obtained by applying a magnetic recording material by screen printing a magnetic track 67f on the outermost peripheral portion on the transparent substrate 5 side as shown in the lower right diagram of FIG. In practice, it can be obtained by inverting and printing a CD in a conventional CD printing screen printing process.

Since the existing CD manufacturing line can be used, there is a great effect that it is not necessary to make a capital investment. In this case, when the magnetic head comes into contact with a printed area having many irregularities such as screen printing of a printing section or the transparent substrate section on the optical recording surface side, both are damaged. In order to avoid this damage, an optical mark 387 is provided on the magnetic recording surface side of the recording medium 2 as shown in the sectional view of the magnetic recording apparatus of FIG. This optical mark may be provided on the opposite surface. This optical mark 38
Reference numeral 7 is printed with optical data such as a bar code on the circumference showing the size of the magnetic recording area. The optical mark 387 is provided by the optical sensor 386 provided on the magnetic head 8 side.
You can read data such as barcodes. The data reproduction of the barcode can be easily performed by the conventional method by the light detection unit 386 which is a combination of the LED and the light sensor. The optical mark portion 387 may be provided on the inner circumference of the TOC portion of the CD in the figure, but by providing it on the inner circumference portion of the TOC portion, it is possible to prevent sliding scratches and stains by the magnetic head 8.

As shown in FIG. 131 (b) and FIG. 145 (a), the bar code of the optical mark 387 includes information indicating a region (r = 1m) in the radial direction of the magnetic recording layer of the CD and the magnetic recording material. Hc value, encryption information for copy guard, and a different Disk ID No. for each CD. Information such as is recorded. In this way, since the optical mark 387 can be identified by reading it in advance, it is possible to prevent the magnetic head 8 from contacting the recording medium 2 other than the region of the magnetic recording layer.
Therefore, there is an effect that the above-mentioned destruction of the magnetic head can be prevented.

Next, another configuration of the optical mark will be described. C
In the case of D, the optical recording portion is not usually provided on the inner peripheral portion of the TOC. In the area without the optical recording portion, a transparent portion 388 without the optical recording layer is provided as shown in FIG. Then, the back side of the optical mark 387 is inserted through the light transmitting portion 388 to the optical head 6.
Visible from the side. By printing an optical mark such as a barcode on the recording medium side of the optical mark 387, the optical mark 387 can be read by the optical head 6. This method has an effect that the optical sensor 386 can be omitted. As another method of reading, the optical sensor 386 can be provided on the optical head 6 side. In this case, since the optical sensor 386 can be provided on the fixed portion side in the upper lid opening / closing type CD player as shown in FIG. 131, there is an effect that the wiring is simplified.

Regarding the information of the optical mark 387, the reflected light may be read by the optical head 6, but the transmitted light may be read by the optical sensor 386. In addition, the optical sensor 386 is a CD
By sharing it with a conventional optical sensor that detects the presence or absence of the effect, it is possible to reduce the number of parts. In addition, an optical mark can be created at the time of manufacturing the optical recording film by intermittently providing an optical recording layer by vapor deposition of aluminum or the like and forming it in a circumferential bar code shape. In this case, there is an effect that the manufacturing process of the optical mark becomes unnecessary. Also, a CD manufacturing process diagram of FIGS. 131 (b) and 144 (a) and C of FIG. 145 (a).
As shown in the top view of D, when the magnetic recording layer 3 is manufactured, the magnetic recording area 398 and the print 45 are formed by one step of applying the magnetic material.
By coating the optical mark 387 with the screen printing material 399 twice, three films can be formed in one step. The printed surface of the CD is as shown in FIG. Especially high Hc
Since the material is black, the contrast of the title print 45 is increased. By screen printing,
Since the recording medium 2 of the present invention can be virtually created by simply changing the printing ink of the conventional CD manufacturing line to a high Hc magnetic material ink, a CD with RAM can be obtained at almost the same cost as an existing CD and without any capital investment. It has a great effect that

As shown in FIG. 145 (a), the barcode 38
Data “204312001” can be read from 7a. D different for each disc on screen printing machine 399)
The ID No. is printed on the CD by printing the data. Can be printed. When the CD copy prevention screen printing machine 399, which can perform copy protection by recording the key unlocking program in the optical recording unit or magnetic recording unit of the CD using this, cannot change the print contents one by one, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 4B, the barcode 3 is printed by the circumferential barcode printer 400 in the process described in FIG.
87a, a number 387b indicating a disc ID in some cases,
Is printed. In this case, normal ink may be used and the printing surface is as shown in FIG. 145 (b). In this case, the user can visually check the disc ID No. It has the effect of being able to read. Also, as shown in FIG. 145 (c), the ID is OCR characters in the barcode part 387a.
No. By printing the numeral 387b, the disc ID number. Can be confirmed. There is an effect. Also, as shown by the dotted line on the right side of FIG. 144 (a), the second printing machine 399a prints 4000
A high Hc magnetic recording area 401 of Hc higher than that of the magnetic recording portion 398 such as Oe is provided. This area can be reproduced by a normal recording / reproducing apparatus, but cannot be recorded. For this reason, the disk ID No. And record the code. Then, since a special process is required, there is an effect that it is more difficult to copy by an illegal trader. Also, as shown in FIG. 146 (a), a space 402a is provided in the optical disc 2, magnetic powder 402 such as iron powder is put therein, and magnetic portion 403 having Hc such as iron is provided on the upper portion.
To provide. Then, when it is not magnetized,
As shown in (a), the magnetic powder 402 is not attracted to the magnetic part 403, and no character is shown. However, when magnetized by a multi-channel magnetic head, the magnetic powder 402 is adsorbed and no characters appear, as shown in FIG. 146 (b). When the OCR character described in FIG. 145 (c) is recorded, the user can see the arrow 51a.
This OCR character can be visually recognized from the direction. On the other hand, the magnetic head 8 has an ID No. It is possible to read magnetically recorded information such as. When this method is used, it is not necessary to change the ID of each sheet for printing in the disc process. ID no. Since it suffices to magnetically record data such as the above for each sheet, there is an effect that a conventional process can be used and a new capital investment is unnecessary.

As shown in the lower right diagram of FIG. 98, the magnetic recording layer 3 is provided on the outer peripheral portion on the transparent substrate 5 side to record the tamper-proof copy signal at the factory. There is an effect that compatibility of can be taken. Further, in the case of an MD reproduction-only disc, the shutter has a window only on one side, but the present invention can be applied to a single-sided window shutter by providing a magnetic layer on the transparent substrate side.

Now, here, this ID No. This paper describes a copy protection method using and a key release method for each software. First, there is a logically locked program on the CD.
It is assumed that there are 00 bottles. User I
DNo. The ID No. from the company. Key No. corresponding to To be notified. The key No. for this tenth program Is recorded on the magnetic recording unit TOC of the CD or the like. Then, when the 10th program of this CD is reproduced next time, the key information recorded on the magnetic recording layer and the ID No. recorded on the optical mark portion. By inputting and into the use permission program, the use of the program is permitted with the correct key, and the program can be used without any procedure every time. In the case of a conventional CD or CDROM, ID No. It is necessary for the user to input the key and the key each time. In the case of the present invention, 1
The effect is that the program can be used without entering a key once it is entered. Furthermore, ID No. Cannot be rewritten and is different for each disc, so even if the key information of a disc for one individual is input to another personal disc, the key is not released. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the use of the CDROM software without paying the software fee.

Next, in the case of a portable CD player, as shown in FIG. 131, an upper lid 389 that opens and closes up and down is provided, and a method of attaching and detaching a CD is generally adopted. In the present invention, the magnetic head 8 is opened and closed when the upper lid 389 is opened and closed.
And the magnetic head traverse shaft 363b is the upper lid 38.
It is opened and closed in conjunction with 9. When the upper lid 389 is in the “open” state, the magnetic head 8 is separated from the recording medium 2 together with the upper lid 389 as shown in FIG. 131, so that the recording medium 2 can be easily attached and detached. When the upper cover 389 is “open”, the upper cover 389 is closed and the magnetic head 8 and the magnetic head traverse shaft 363b approach the vicinity of the recording medium 2. The head actuator 22 makes the magnetic head 8 contact the recording medium 2 only when magnetic recording / reproduction is necessary.

The optical head 6 includes the traverse actuator 23, the traverse gear 367b, the traverse shaft 3
Tracked by 63a. At this time, it is transmitted to the traverse gear 367c by the traverse gear 367a, and the magnetic head traverse shaft 367b moves in the direction indicated by the arrow 51
Move in the direction. In this way, the magnetic head 8 moves in the same direction by the same distance in conjunction with the optical head 6, so when the upper lid 389 is closed, the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 are aligned as described above. In other words, the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 access a predetermined magnetic track on the back side of the preset optical track.

By moving the magnetic head 8 and the magnetic head traverse in conjunction with the upper lid 389 in this way, the present invention can be applied to a CD player of an upper lid opening / closing method, and therefore the entire player is downsized. There is an effect that can be converted.

Next, a cartridge that houses the CDROM of the present invention will be described. First, FIG. 133 shows a perspective view of the optical disk cartridge of the present invention. Now, with reference to this drawing, a conventional cartridge for a CDROM will be described. A conventional CDROM cartridge is a CDROM
In order to take out the recording medium 2 such as the recording medium 2, there is a cassette pig 397 that rotates in the direction of the arrow 51c around the rotary shaft 39, and at the same time, there is a window on the optical recording surface side on the back side of the drawing, and a shutter 301 for the optical recording surface. .

In the case of the cartridge of the present invention, a magnetic surface shutter 391 is added to the cassette pig 390. When the shutter 392 of the optical recording surface is opened in the direction of the arrow 51a, the window of the optical recording portion is opened and the connecting portion 392 causes
The magnetic surface shutter 391 slides in the direction of arrow 51a, and the window on the magnetic recording surface side of the recording medium 2 opens. Thus, by using the disc cassette 42 of the present invention, a CD
The windows on both sides of the magnetic recording surface and the optical recording surface can be opened / closed at the same time as being removable, so that the optical recording / reproducing of the present invention and the magnetic recording / reproducing can be performed at the same time. Further, there is an effect that it is completely compatible with the conventional single-sided window type CDROM cartridge for optical recording and reproduction.

Example 15 Previous Examples 1, 2, 3
Then, an example in which the auxiliary magnetic recording layer 3 is provided on one surface of the recording medium 2 in the cartridge 42 has been described. The fifteenth embodiment shows the case where the magnetic recording layer 3 is provided on the outer surface of the cartridge 42 of the disk 2. FIG. 136 is a block diagram of the entire recording / reproducing apparatus of the fifteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 137a, 138b, 138a, b, and c are recording / reproducing states of the fifteenth embodiment when the cartridge is inserted, fixed, and ejected. Indicates. Also, FIGS. 139a, b, and c show cross-sectional views of FIGS. 137a, b, and c.

FIG. 136 shows an overall block diagram. The basic configuration and principle of the optical recording / reproducing unit and the magnetic recording / reproducing unit are
Since the noise canceller of the magnetic recording / reproducing unit is removed from the block diagram of FIG. 87 and the block diagram of FIG. 110, duplicated portions will be omitted.

The recording / reproducing apparatus 1 of FIG. 136 has an insertion port 394 of a disc cartridge 42, and FIG. 136 shows a state after the cartridge 42 is inserted in the direction of arrow 51.

137 and 138 are perspective views at the time of inserting and removing the cartridge, respectively, showing a state when the cassette is attached and detached, and FIG. 139 is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic head portion when the cassette is inserted.

As shown in FIG. 137 (a), when the cartridge 42 is inserted into the recording / reproducing apparatus 1, first, the optical sensor 386 causes the optical mark 387 such as a bar code provided on a part of the label portion 396 to be read. The sensor 386 reads the data, and the optical reproduction circuit 38 of FIG. 136 reproduces the data and the clock reproduction circuit 389 reproduces the synchronous clock signal. The above reproduction data is sent to the system control unit 10,
If it is determined that the magnetic recording layer 3 is present, a head elevating command is sent and the head actuator 21 causes the head elevating unit 20 to move.
Thus, the magnetic heads 8a and 8b are moved toward the magnetic recording layer 3. Thus, the data of the magnetic recording layer 3 is transferred to the magnetic heads 8a. 8b and demodulated into data by the demodulators 341a and 341b of the first and second magnetic reproducing circuits 30a and 30b. At this time, by using the synchronous clock signal reproduced by the clock reproducing circuit 38a based on the signal of the optical mark portion 387, demodulation can be surely performed even if the traveling speed changes. Therefore, there is an effect that the data recorded in the magnetic recording layer 3 can be surely read even if the cartridge 42 is manually inserted and the traveling speed at the time of insertion largely fluctuates. Further, by recording identification information such as the cartridge ID No. or software title name in the optical mark 387, data can be managed for each cassette.

In this case, only one magnetic head 8 is required.
However, by reading and writing the same data twice with two magnetic heads as shown in FIG. 136, the reliability of reading the data is improved. The synthesizing circuit 397 synthesizes the error-free portions of the data 1 and the data 2 to create error-free complete data, reproduces data including index information such as TOC data, and stores it in the IC memory 34. The TOC data includes information on the previous directory of the cartridge 42, the recording / reproducing process, and the result. Therefore, when the cartridge 42 is inserted, the contents and progress of the optical disc can be known.

As shown in FIG. 137 (b), magnetic recording / reproduction is arbitrarily performed while the cartridge 42 is mounted therein, new information is added, or recorded information is deleted. It is done. In this case, the contents of the TOC have to be changed each time, but in the case of the present invention, the data in the magnetic recording layer 3 is not rewritten as described in many previous embodiments, and the T memory of the IC memory 34 is not rewritten.
Rewrite OC data. Thus, the new TOC data in the IC memory 34 and the old TOC data in the magnetic recording layer 3 have different data contents. As shown in FIG. 137 (c), when the cartridge 42 is taken out, the magnetic head 8
The data of the magnetic recording layer is updated by b. The written data is immediately reproduced and verified by the magnetic head 8b.

In this case, the number of tracks on the magnetic recording layer 3 is 1
In the case of ke, nothing needs to be done. But multi-track,
For example, when there are three tracks, of these, it is necessary to rewrite the TOC data, for example, the data of only the second track is rewritten to reduce mistakes during recording. In this case, as shown in FIG. 137 (C), only the third track is recorded by the magnetic head 8b when the cartridge 42 is taken out.

This is completed for one head. On the other hand, in the case of two heads as shown in FIG. 137, the signals 68 recorded by the magnetic head 8a are simultaneously read to perform an error check. As shown in FIG. 139 (C), the magnetic head 8b
The magnetic signal 68a recorded by can be verified by the magnetic head 8a. If there is an error, the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus 1 displays an error message on the display unit 16 and displays the message "Please insert the cassette into the main body again." At the same time, the operator is instructed to insert the cartridge 42 into the insertion portion 394 again. When it is inserted again, T
Since OC data is recorded, the second time can be recorded with a high probability without error. If you repeat this many times,
It is determined that the magnetic recording layer 3 of the cartridge 42 has been destroyed, the ID No. of the optical mark 387 is recorded, and when the cartridge 42 of that ID No. is reinserted, the command to lower the magnetic head 8 is not issued. Do not read magnetic data. The data of this ID No is backed up and stored in the IC memory 34. In this way, TOC data can be surely recorded and reproduced in the cartridge 42 of each disk. The present invention has an effect that the table of contents of a disc can be detected when the disc cartridge is inserted by adding a few parts. Since it is only necessary to attach a magnetic label on the medium side, the effect of being able to be added to the conventional cartridge 42 is realized at low cost.

Example 16 Example 16 is Example 1
The disk cartridge described in 5 is changed to a tape cartridge. Specifically, the magnetic recording layer having the protective layer 50 described in FIG. 103 of the present invention on the upper surface of the cartridge 42 of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus 1 having a rotary head type magnetic head such as a VTR, DAT or DCC or a fixed magnetic head. 3 is attached.

FIG. 140 shows an overall block diagram. Since the basic configuration and principle are the same as those in FIG. 136, description of overlapping parts will be omitted.

The recording / reproducing apparatus 1 of FIG. 140 has an insertion port 394 of the cartridge 42 of the cassette of the VTR.
Reference numeral 40 denotes a process in which the cassette 42 is being inserted in the direction of arrow 51. The perspective views of FIG. 141 and FIG. 142 when the cassette is inserted and taken out show the state when the cassette is attached and detached, and FIG. 143 is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic head portion when the cassette is inserted.

As shown in FIG. 142 (a), when the cartridge 42 is inserted into the VTR, first, the optical sensor 386
Then, the optical sensor 386 reads the optical mark 387 on which information such as a bar code and the synchronization signal recorded on a part of the label portion 396 are read, the data is reproduced by the optical reproducing circuit 38 of FIG. 140, and the clock reproducing circuit 389. Causes the synchronous clock signal to be reproduced. The above reproduction data is sent to the system control unit 10. If it is determined that the magnetic recording layer 3 is present, a head elevating command is sent and the head actuator 21 is moved by the head elevating unit 20 to the magnetic heads 8a, 8a.
b is brought into contact with the magnetic recording layer 3. Thus, the magnetic recording layer 3
The data recorded on the magnetic head 8a. 8b is detected, and the original data is demodulated by the demodulators 341a and 341b of the first and second magnetic reproducing circuits 30a and 30b. At this time, by using the synchronous clock signal of the clock reproducing circuit 38a at the time of demodulation, demodulation can be surely performed even if the traveling speed changes, so that the cartridge 42 is manually inserted and the traveling speed at the time of insertion is greatly increased. Even if it fluctuates, there is an effect that the data of the magnetic recording layer can be surely read. Further, by recording index information such as ID No. and software title on the optical mark 387, management for each cassette can be performed.

In this case, the magnetic head 8 basically operates by one, but the reliability of reading the data is improved by reproducing the same data twice by the two magnetic heads. The synthesis circuit 397 synthesizes the error-free portions of data 1 and data 2 to create complete data without error,
The reproduced data including TOC data is stored in the IC memory 34. Cartridge 4 for TOC data
The absolute address at the end of the previous 2 and the absolute address of the start and end of each song and each segment are included. Therefore, the current absolute address of the tape at the time when the cartridge 42 is inserted can be known when the magnetic data is reproduced. Therefore, the contents of the absolute address counter 398 of the system control unit 10 are rewritten by the information of the absolute address.

Here, the case where the tape has music is described as an example. For example, it can be seen that the current address is 1 minute 32 seconds of the eighth song and the current absolute address is 62 minutes 12 seconds. If you want to access the point at 42:26 of the absolute address of the 6th song, rewind the tape while referring to the data of the absolute address inspection head 399 by the amount of the absolute address of 19:46 seconds. Cue can be done at high speed. In this case, in order to know in advance how much tape will be rewound to reach the target point, the access speed can be significantly increased compared to the conventional method by accelerating and decelerating at the highest rewind speed. Also, a list of TOC information can be displayed instantly when the tape is inserted. Therefore, the tape recorder can be made intelligent with VTR, DAT, and DCC. As shown in (b) of FIG. 141, magnetic recording and reproduction are arbitrarily performed while the cartridge 42 is mounted therein, so that a new song is added or a recorded song is deleted. To do. In this case, the contents of the TOC must be changed each time, but in the case of the present invention, the TOC of the IC memory 34 is not rewritten as described repeatedly in many of the previous embodiments. Rewrite only the data. In this way, the content of the data is different from the old TOC data of the new TOC data magnetic recording layer 3 in the IC memory 34.

In this case, the number of tracks on the magnetic recording layer 3 is 1.
In the case of ke, nothing needs to be done. But multi-track,
For example, when there are three tracks, of these, it is necessary to rewrite the TOC data, for example, the data of only the second track is rewritten to reduce mistakes during recording. In this case, as shown in FIG. 137 (C), only the third track is recorded by the magnetic head 8b when the cartridge 42 is taken out.

In the case of one head, this is completed. On the other hand, in the case of two heads as shown in FIG. 137, the signals 68 recorded by the magnetic head 8a are simultaneously read to perform an error check. As shown in FIG. 139 (C), the magnetic head 8b
The magnetic signal 68a recorded by can be verified by the magnetic head 8a. If there is an error, the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus 1 displays an error message on the display unit 16 and displays the message "Please insert the cassette into the main body again." At the same time, the operator is instructed to insert the cartridge 42 into the insertion portion 394 again. When it is inserted again, T
Since OC data is recorded, the second time can be recorded with a high probability without error. If you repeat this many times,
It is determined that the magnetic recording layer 3 of the cartridge 42 has been destroyed, the ID No. of the optical mark 387 is recorded, and when the cartridge 42 of that ID No. is reinserted, the command to lower the magnetic head 8 is not issued. Do not read magnetic data. The tape of this ID No. is stored in the IC memory 34 while being backed up. In this way, surely VTR
TOC data can be recorded and reproduced for each tape cartridge 42. In the case of DAT, VTR, DCC, etc., TOC data cannot be instantly accessed because it is a tape medium. For this reason, there are problems that the contents list cannot be displayed and that the current song number cannot be known at the time of insertion. However, the present invention realizes the TOC function which does not require additional access time for a few parts. Since it suffices to attach a magnetic label to the cartridge side of the tape, it can be added to the existing cartridge 42 of the tape, and at the same time, the above effect can be realized at low cost.

(Embodiment 17) Embodiment 17 describes in detail the method of unlocking a specific program of an optical disk such as a CDROM in which a large number of programs with a key such as Password are recorded. Figure 1
47, the optical mark portion 387 of the CD has a different ID No. Is recorded. This is an optical sensor 38 including a light emitting portion 386a and a light receiving portion 386b.
In step 6, data such as “204312001” is read and Di of the key management table 404 in the memory of the CPU is read.
sk ID No. Put in (OPT). This method is usually sufficient, but the optical mark may be duplicated. In order to further enhance the anti-duplication effect, as described above, the high Hc of 4000 Oe or the like due to barium ferrite is very high.
A magnetic field ID No. is provided at the factory. (Mag)
The data “205162” is magnetically recorded. Since this data can be reproduced by a normal magnetic head, the data can be reproduced, and the Disk ID No. of the key management table 404 can be reproduced. (Mag)
Can be entered in the item. Here, the specific procedure will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 148. In step 405, the program No. When the activation command of N comes, Step 40
At 5a, it is read whether the key information of the program is recorded on the magnetic track. At this time, a recording current is passed through the magnetic head to erase this data. If the disc is legitimate, the key information cannot be erased because Hc is high. The key information will be lost if the disc is invalid. Next, in step 405b, it is checked whether or not there is key data, that is, Password, and if No, in step 405c, a key input command is transmitted to the user as shown in the screen view of FIG. 170, and in step 405d, the user indicates, for example, "123456". Enter, step 405e
Check if it is correct, and if “No”, go to step 405f.
Then, the screen is displayed, "The key is incorrect or it is a duplicate disk", and if Yes, the program proceeds to step 405g. The key data for opening N is recorded on the magnetic track of the recording medium 2, and step 405i is skipped.

Returning to step 405b, if Yes, in step 405h the program number. The N key data is read, and in step 405i, the disc ID (OP
T) is read, the disc ID (Mag) recorded in the magnetic recording layer is read in step 405j, and it is checked in step 405k whether it is correct. If No, in step 405m, the message "Duplicate disk" is displayed and the operation is stopped.
If Yes, in step 405n the key data and disk ID
(OPT) and the disk ID (Mag) are deciphered and the correct data is checked. Step 405p
If No, the error is displayed in step 405q, and if Yes, the program No. is displayed in step 405s.
Start using N.

Using this method of the invention, a CD
If so, put 120 songs that are voice compressed to 1/5, and if you have game software, enter several hundred titles and 12 CDs or 1
If you only listen to the game first, you can sell it at a price commensurate with the copyright fee for 12 songs or 1 game. Then, after the user pays the fee, the software company makes the disc ID No. By notifying the key corresponding to, it becomes possible to use software such as an additional song or an additional game as shown in FIG. 147. In this case, by adopting the voice expansion block 407, it is possible to store up to 120 pieces of music software in one CD because 370 minutes, which is five times as long as a CD, can be stored in one CD. be able to. Since the key data is recorded when the key is released once, there is an effect that it is not necessary to insert the key every time. The same effect can be obtained by using an electronic dictionary or a photo CD general program in addition to the music CD and the game CD. In addition, in order to reduce the cost, the ID No. of the high Hc unit 401. May be omitted.

(Embodiment 18) Embodiment 18 implements a copy guard function in the case of software that installs software on a plurality of specific personal computers such as an OS or a general personal computer program. FIG. 149 shows a block diagram,
Similar to FIG. 147. Describe the different points so that the explanations do not overlap. First, the maximum number of personal computers in which this disc can be installed is recorded in the optical mark portion 387 or the high Hc portion 401 of the disc, and this data stores the Disk ID No. of the key management table. (OPT) or D
isk ID No. It is stored as (Mag) data. For example, "ID = 204312001, N ₁ = 5, N ₂
= 3 ”, which means“ DiskID is “204”
"03121" means that the maximum number of installed models of the first program is 5 and the maximum number of installed second programs is 3 ". Program 1 as shown
If you install it on the personal computer "408" which is "XXXXX11", the table of Program1 is 5 out of 5.
Since the remaining key remains, the key release decoder 406 transmits data and installs a program such as an OS on the hard disk 409 of the first personal computer 408 via the external interface unit 14. At this time, the device I of the personal computer 408
DNo. "XXXX11" is sent to the CDROM drive 1a, and this data is stored in the Prog of the key management table 404.
After being stored in the n = 1 portion of ram1, the data is recorded on the magnetic track 67 of the CDROM.

Next, using this CDROM 2a, "XXXXX
When an OS or the like is to be installed on the second personal computer 408a of "23", the key management table 4 is similarly set.
Check 04. Then, you can see that you can still install 4 units, so the installation starts and Pro
In the column of n = 2 of gram1, the personal computer No. which becomes "XXXXX23". Is recorded on the magnetic track 67. In this way, you can install up to 5 computers.
However, if you try to install the OS etc. on the sixth personal computer, there will be no room in the column of Program1. Cannot be recorded and installation is prevented. In this way, unauthorized installation of software can be prevented because the software can be installed only on the number of computers paid for by the software maker. On the other hand, if the software on the computer that you have legally installed is broken and you need to reinstall it, the machine ID No. Is already registered as one for five, so it has the effect of being installed as many times as you like. Disk ID No. In addition, since the recording portion 401 with high Hc and the optical mark 387 are recorded in two different processes, the cost and labor for the duplication is increased, and thus the duplication prevention effect is enhanced.

This method, that is, this program is shown in FIG.
This will be described in more detail with reference to the flowchart of 50. In step 410a, the program No. N installation instructions are issued. First, in step 410b, the machine ID No. For example, "XXXX11" is read. Next, the CDROM 2a is set in the CDROM drive 1a, and the magnetic data is sent to the memory of the personal computer 408 in step 410c, and the key management table 404 is created. In step 410e, the program No. of this table is changed. Machine ID No. registered in the N column. Is read out and the machine ID No. of the personal computer to be installed is read in step 410f.
Check if it matches, and if Yes, step 410
Go to q, if No, step 410g with machine IDN
o. Check if you can afford to register. Specifically, if 5 units can be installed, check how many units can be installed later. If No, the process goes to step 410n and installation is naturally prevented, and the process stops at step 410P. If Yes, in step 410h, the machine ID No. of the personal computer to be installed is set. Is registered in the table 404. Then, the number of remaining computers that can be installed decreases. In step 410c, this machine ID No. Is recorded on the magnetic track 67 by the magnetic head. If the installation is started in step 410j and succeeded in step 410k, the installation is stopped in step 410p. If it fails, the ID No. of the PC to be installed in step 410m. Is deleted from the magnetic track, and the process stops at step 410p.

(Embodiment 19) In Embodiment 18, the exchange of data between the personal computer 408 and the CDROM drive 1a has been described, but in Embodiment 19, the personal computer and CDRO are exchanged.
The configuration and operation of the interface with the M drive will be described in detail. Except for the interface, it operates basically the same as a conventional computer. As shown in the block diagram of the personal computer and the CDROM drive in FIG. 151, the application 412 of the program such as WP software in the software unit 411 of the personal computer 408 is the shell unit 41.
Information is exchanged with the kernel unit 414 that manages the system via the command line 3. This kernel part 414 is MSDO
S. OS 415 and IO in a narrow sense such as SYS. An input / output control system 416 such as SYS. The input / output control system 416 has a device such as a hard disk and a device driver 417 for inputting / outputting the device. In the case of the figure, the external storage device includes four drivers A, B, C and D, 417a,
417b, 417c, and 417d are logically defined, and usually a personal computer, an HDD 409, and a CDR via a BIOS 419 that is composed of hardware including software such as ROMIC and an interface 420 such as SCSI.
The interfaces 14 and 424 of the external storage device such as the OM 2a and the FDD 426 are physically connected to each other to input / output data. The above operation is the same as the conventional method. Also, the interface between the HDD 409 and the FDD 426 is the same as the conventional one.

By the way, in the case of the conventional CDROM drive or optical disk drive, in the case of one physical drive, one drive is logically defined. However, in the case of the CDROM drive 1a having the magnetic recording unit of the present invention, in the input / output control system 416, the two drivers A, that is, the driver 418a and the B driver 418 are provided.
b is defined. The driver A reproduces the data of the logically defined optical recording file 421 through the interface 14 in the CDROM drive 1a, but does not record the data. Physically, as described in the previous embodiment, the data on the optical recording layer 4 dedicated to reproduction on the optical disc is read by the optical reproducing unit 7, and the data is sent to the personal computer 408 via the driver A. Similarly, the driver B records / reproduces the data of the magnetic recording file 422 logically defined. Physically, the magnetic recording / reproducing unit 9 causes the optical disk 2
Data is recorded / reproduced on / from the magnetic recording layer 3 of the driver B4.
Data is input to and output from the personal computer 408 via the device driver 417 as 18b.

In the case of the present embodiment, one CDR with RAM
For the OM drive 1a, two drivers 417a,
418b is defined. As a result, when the OS 415 multitasks, the personal computer 408 can record or reproduce the magnetic file 422 while reproducing the optical recording file 421.
Compared with the case of 8, the file input / output processing can be performed at high speed. Especially, the effect is high when a virtual file described later is used.

Next, a method of physically performing the above simultaneous processing will be described. The first method is described. First, in FIG.
An optical address table 433 and a magnetic data table 434 of the AM-equipped CDROM 2a are shown. Since it is a CDROM, all the data in the optical address table 440 have a write-inhibit flag set, while all the data in the magnetic address table 441 are writable unless otherwise specified.
As described above, the CD ROM drive 1a of the present invention is a CD
When the ROM 2a is inserted, the frequently used data is read into the drive memory 34a in advance. Therefore, the addresses of necessary data in the magnetic address table 441 are arranged in the magnetic address table, for example, in the magnetic data 442 of the physical address 00 in the order of frequency of use. Therefore, when the disk is inserted, the magnetic data at address 00 is read out, and the drive memory 34a composed of the IC memory is arranged in the required data order.
Move to. Therefore, when recording / reproducing magnetic data of the CDROM, it is only necessary to physically access the data in the drive memory 34a of the IC memory to record / reproduce.
Therefore, when the CPU of the system control unit IO simultaneously executes the time-division processing, the optical reproducing unit 7 can reproduce the optical data and at the same time, read and write the magnetic file 422 in the drive memory 34a. Therefore, the recording / reproduction of the magnetic recording layer 3 of the CDROM 2a physically needs to be performed only once, and the damage on the recording surface is reduced. The contents of the drive memory 34a are turned off by the power supply of the CDROM drive 1a.
Even if it becomes, it is held by the memory backup unit 433. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is ON or OFF, the CDROM
The changed magnetic recording data in the drive memory 34a is selected and recorded on the magnetic recording layer 3 only when the disc 2a is ejected, so that the number of recordings becomes a maximum of one time from the insertion of the disc to the ejection to prolong the life. There is an effect. Parallel file processing is possible and transfer speed is increased. This drive memory a is stored in the CD by the memory backup unit 433.
The stored contents are retained even when the power of the ROM drive 1a is turned off. Therefore, even if the power is turned on again, it is not necessary to read the magnetic data of the CDROM unless the CDROM is replaced.

In this case, the substantial capacity of the magnetic file 422 can be increased by providing the data compression / expansion unit 435 as described in FIG. 125 in the system control unit 10 of the CDROM drive 1a.

Next, a case where the CDROM drive of the present invention is handled as one drive will be described. Since the operation is basically the same as in the case of two drives, duplicate description will be omitted.

As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 153, the CDROM with RAM of the present invention in the input / output control system 416 of the personal computer 408 can be handled as one drive, for example, the A drive 418. In this case, the data of the CDROM drive with RAM 1a can be read and written even with a single task OS. The file structure is shown in FIG.
As in the address table of No. 4, the optical file 421 and the magnetic file 422 are given consecutive addresses and the optical data table 440 and the magnetic data table 441 are treated as one file.
Data up to 51 "is assigned to the CDROM and all write-inhibit flags are set. Logical address" 0125
After 2 ", magnetic data is assigned and a writable flag is set.

Then, when viewed from the personal computer side, optical data can be reproduced and magnetic data can be recorded / reproduced as if they were one disc. In this case as well, the logical address "0125
Since the address of the data frequently used for the magnetic data is recorded in 2 ", as shown in the block diagram of FIG. 9 and the data compression / decompression unit 435 to move to the magnetic file 422 of the drive memory 34a, it becomes unnecessary to physically read the data of the magnetic recording layer 3 thereafter.
Recording and reproduction of magnetic data are virtually performed by rewriting the data in the IC memory of the drive memory 34a. This is because the magnetic data can be stored in an IC memory having a small capacity because the magnetic data is as small as 32 KB. This extends the life of the disk and speeds up access and I / O. As described above, physical magnetic data is recorded only when the disc is ejected. The other operations are the same as those in the above-mentioned two-drive method, and therefore will be omitted. In the case of the 1-drive system, the system configuration becomes simple.

Next, reproduction of data on the magnetic recording layer 3 and
A method for efficiently reproducing the data on the optical recording layer 4 will be described. In order not to reduce the transfer speed of the CDROM, it is desirable to reproduce the magnetic recording layer during the reproduction time of the optical recording layer. Furthermore, it is most important to shorten the rise time when inserting the CDROM. First, the file structure of this embodiment will be described using the file structure address table of FIG. As shown in the figure, the CDROM 2a with a magnetic recording layer is composed of an optical file 421 and a small capacity magnetic file 422, each having an optical address table 440 and a separate physical optical address and magnetic address. And FIG.
As shown in the cross-sectional view of the optical disk of No. 1, the magnetic drives 67a,
67b, 67c, 67d, 67d, 67e, 67f are arranged, and the magnetic addresses a, b, c, d, e, f correspond respectively. This correspondence is the magnetic T of the magnetic address 00.
It is recorded in the OC section 442 together with the above-mentioned frequency management data. The system control unit 10 of FIG. 153 has a 1-address link table 443 indicating the physical positions of the optical address and the magnetic address in the drive memory 34a. As shown in FIG. 154 (b), link contents of two addresses are recorded in this content.

Now, specifically, a method of simultaneously reproducing magnetic data and reproducing optical data will be described. When the CDROM is inserted and the minimum program is started, the minimum optical data is reproduced. It is sufficient to record the minimum magnetic data necessary for starting the program, for example, individual score data and progress data of the game software, on the magnetic track just behind the optical track of the optical data to be reproduced without fail.

This operation will be described using the flowchart of FIG. 156. An initial value of m = 0 is set in step 444a, and m = m + 1 is set in step 444b.
In step 444c, it is confirmed whether m is the final value. If Yes, the process jumps to step 444m, and if No, the process proceeds to step 444d to reproduce the optical data of the m-th optical address A (m). Next, at step 444e, a subroutine for searching for an optical track corresponding to the magnetic track that is close to the optical address A (m) is entered. In this subroutine, n = 0 is set in step 444f, and step 444
In g, n = n + 1 is set, and in step 444w, it is checked whether n is the final value. If Yes, the process jumps to step 444m and "N
If "o", the nth step 444h is executed at step 444h.
Then, the optical address M (n) on the back side of the nth magnetic address is read from the address link table 443, and in step 444i, for example, M (n) +10 is checked,
Check if this optical address is near. If No, the process returns to step 444g to check the optical address of the next magnetic track. If Yes, the magnetic head is moved down to the magnetic recording layer 3 in step 444j, the reproduction of the data of the magnetic address n and the fixing of the optical traverse are fixed during this period, and it is checked in step 444k whether the reproduction of the magnetic data is completed. If No, step 444j Is executed again, and if Yes, the process returns to step 444b, and the number of m is incremented by one again. Repeat the above work. However, if m is the completion value, jump to step 444m to check whether all the magnetic tracks containing magnetic data necessary for launching a program such as a game have been reproduced. If completed in step 444, step 444v Jumping to No., and if No, the reproduction subroutine 444p of the remaining n ₀ magnetic tracks is entered, and the remaining magnetic magnetic data is reproduced. Explaining this subroutine, n = 0 in step 444q, n = n + 1 in step 444r, and n in step 444s.
Is completed, and if Yes, step 444v.
If it is No, the corresponding optical address of the nth magnetic address is accessed, the magnetic data is reproduced in step 444u, the process returns to step 444r, n = n + 1 is set again, and the same operation is repeated unless completed. When completed, the process jumps to step 444v to complete the reproduction work of the initial rising data of the program.

From this flowchart, by recording the minimum amount of magnetic data required for program startup, that is, ILP, on the magnetic track on the back side of the optical data optical track, the program startup time can be shortened. In this case, as shown in FIG. 154, selecting the magnetic tracks on the back side of the various optical tracks as described above means that the magnetic tracks are not necessarily arranged at equal intervals. Therefore, by adopting the variable pitch magnetic track of the present invention described above, this program start-up time can be shortened.

Further, as shown by the magnetic TOC 442 in FIG. 154, each magnetic track 01, 02 ...
By recording the optical address of the optical track on the back side of, the magnetic track with a free pitch can be set. By arranging these magnetic tracks in the order of frequency of use described above,
There is an effect that the frequency management data can be omitted and the substantial capacity is increased.

(Embodiment 20) Embodiment 20 discloses a method of correcting the bag of the program of the CDROM software by using this CDROM 1a. As shown in the data table of the file in FIG. 157 (b), the capacity is 540 MB
A bug correction program 455 is recorded in the optical file section 421 of the CDROM 1a. OS for the rest
Programs such as are recorded as ROM data.
The magnetic file 422 is about 32 KB in the present invention. Only bug correction data 446 having a small capacity is recorded here. No fix has been recorded. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 157 (b), the correction data, the correction contents, and the optical address of the optical ROM data to be corrected are entered. As shown in FIG. 157 (c), only a specific file having a bug in the OS or the like is read into the memory 34, and by the bug correction program 447 and the bug correction data 46,
The corrected data 448 is output. A specific procedure will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 157 (a). First, at step 445a, when a specific file having a bug is read, all the specific files are moved to the memory 34. In step 445b, N = 0 is set, in step 445c, N is incremented by 1, and in step 45d, the Nth bug correction data of the specified file is read out, and in step 445e, it is checked whether or not there is no address change, and if yes, step 445f.
In step 445h, the line is deleted, in step 445j, the logical address of the optical file is changed, and the process proceeds to step 445k. If No, Step 445
Go to k. In step 445k, it is checked whether a line is added. If No, the process proceeds to step 445p. If Yes, the line is added in steps 445m and 445n, the logical address of the optical file is changed, and the process proceeds to step 445p. At step 445p, it is checked whether or not there is another process, and No.
If so, proceed to step 445r, and if Yes, step 44
Other processing is performed at 5q, and it is checked at step 445r whether N reaches M and the correction is completed. At step 445s, the correction is completed and the corrected specific file is output. In the case of the present embodiment, since the correction program is recorded in advance in the optical ROM section and the correction data is recorded in the magnetic file 422 at the time of shipment, there is a great advantage that bugs such as the OS can be corrected after the optical disc is manufactured. Further, the correction program is recorded in the optical ROM section. Therefore, only the correction data need be recorded in the magnetic file 422 having a small capacity. Therefore, there is an effect that a larger amount of correction data can be recorded.

Twenty-first Embodiment A twenty-first embodiment describes a method of correcting bug data of a CDROM in real time when reading a file such as a dictionary. As shown in FIG. 158 (b), an optical ROM data correction table 446 is recorded in the magnetic file 422, and the corrected data corresponding to the optical address is recorded. FIG. 158
As shown in (c), each data of the optical file 421 is corrected in real time by the correction program 447 in the optical file 421 and the correction data of the magnetic file 422, and output as corrected data 448.

This flow will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 158 (a). File data modification program 44
7 receives a specific optical data read command in step 447a, and sets N to the start number of the optical address of the data read in step 447b. N at step 447c
The increased number 1, to check whether the k ₁ to k _M light address modification table 446 in step 447e reads the data of the optical address N in step 447D. If No, go to step 447g; if Yes, go to step 447g.
At f, the data of the optical address N is corrected based on the correction table, and at the next step 44g, it is checked whether all necessary optical data have been read. If No, the process returns to step 447c, and if Yes, the process proceeds to step 447h to output the corrected optical data. In the case of the present embodiment, since the data is corrected and output in optical address units, there is an effect that the data is output in real time. Therefore, it is effective in the case of outputting data in small units such as dictionary CDROM software.
The CD of the present invention when each correction data is, for example, 10 B on average.
Since the ROM 1a has a magnetic recording area of about 32 KB, 3
It is possible to modify 000 places. Therefore the dictionary CDRO
Suitable for modifying M software, etc. In the case of a dictionary, by using the magnetic recording layer 3 for recording frequently used data or marking important data, a new function can be added, which is highly effective.

(Embodiment 22) In the embodiment described above, the method of substantially expanding the capacity of the data of the magnetic file 422 by several times by the data compression / expansion program was disclosed. In the twenty-second embodiment, focusing on the current situation where the hard disk 425 is standardized like a recent WINDOWS personal computer, a large capacity file is physically defined on the hard disk 425, and this large capacity file is logically stored in the magnetic file 422. Using a virtual memory scheme such as
A method for logically increasing the capacity of the magnetic file 422 will be described. In this case, the basic configuration and operation are shown in FIG.
Since it is the same as the case of 3, the duplicate description will be omitted.
As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 159, the personal computer 408 with the machine ID = Ap, the CDROM drive 1a, and the disk I
The HDD 425 of D = A _H , the DD of disc ID = B _H , and the exchangeable optical disc 428 of the optical disc are physically connected via an interface. Also, magnetic file 4
22 is connectable to a personal computer 408a having a machine ID = Bp via an application program 412, a network OS 431, a network BIOS 436, a communication port 432, and a LAN network 437 such as TOPIP, and a disc ID = directly connected to the personal computer 408a. both hard disk 405a of C _D and has a possible connection. Therefore, the magnetic file 422 of the present embodiment
The virtual large-capacity disk can be physically set in three places: the hard disk 425 of the personal computer 408, the replacement disk 428, and the hard disk 425a of another personal computer 408a. Virtual disks 450 and 450 respectively
A and 450b are indicated by hatched portions in the drawing.

By using this virtual disk 450, for example, the capacity of the magnetic file 422 capable of recording only 32 kB per CDROM is virtually 100 MB.
Or increase to 10GB. HDDs are indispensable for WINDOWS personal computers in recent years, and most personal computers have network functions in the office. In this embodiment, a virtual large-capacity memory space can be obtained even if the CDROM 1a of most of the personal computer is inserted by using the free space of the hard disk of the personal computer and the network function. Next, FIG.
A specific data structure will be described with reference to the file data structure diagram of FIG.

The CDROM 1a is composed of an optical file 421 physically existing and a magnetic file 422, and a virtual file 450 logically defined. Actual data of the virtual file 450 is the physical file HDD4 of the HDD 425, the exchangeable disk 428, or another personal computer 408a shown in the figure.
It is recorded in the physical file 451 in 25a. C
In the magnetic file portion 422 of the DROM 1a, a virtual directory entry 452 including link information of the virtual file 450 and the physical file 451, and directory information such as the name and attribute of each virtual file is recorded. The virtual directory entry 452 is 1: address 438 in the magnetic file, 2: connection program number 453, 3 containing the number of the communication program containing the command to connect to another personal computer via LAN; The machine ID No. of the personal computer or drive to which the disk containing the physical file 451 is connected. Machine ID containing
Numbers 454, 4: Disk ID 455 containing the ID number of the disk containing the physical file 451, 5: File name 456 of the virtual file 450, 6: Extension 45
7, 7: Attributes indicating the type of virtual file 458, 8: Reserved area 459, 9: Change time 460 indicating the change date and time of the file, 10: Start cluster number 461, 11: File indicating the cluster number at which the file starts Size 46
It is composed of 11 items of attribute data of 2. Of these items, items 5 to 11 are almost the same as the directory used for os such as MSDOS and are usually composed of 32 bytes. All items are 48 to 64 bytes.

By the way, as shown in the magnetic file table 422a, the magnetic file 422 contains the virtual directory entries 452 for the number of virtual files.
In FIG. 160, items 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 1 are related to the drawing.
Only 0 is displayed. First, the first virtual directory entry 452a is the connected program number 453 of item 2.
"A _N " is in the box. Next, the secondary machine IDN of item 3
Looking at o454, it can be seen that the machine ID containing the physical file 451 is Ap. In case of figure CDROM
Since 1a is connected to the CDROM drive of the personal computer with the machine ID = Ap, it is understood that it is not necessary to start the connection program A _N for connecting the LAN to access the disc of another personal computer. When the main machine ID 454 is another personal computer, the connection program A _N is activated to connect to the personal computer having the LAN address of the main machine ID 454 and access its disk 425a. Since almost all of the directory information is recorded in the link data 452, it is not necessary to access the physical file 451 when viewing the directory on the personal computer side, and the physical file can be accessed only when reading / writing the data of the virtual file 450. Good. Therefore, the link data 45
2 has the effect of reducing access to physical files.

In this way, when the physical file 451 is reached, the sub-virtual directory entry 467 in the normal format is recorded in the physical file directory 463 as shown in the directory area table 465. This data is the main virtual directory entry 452.
Items 5 to 11 among items 1 to 11 are recorded. On the other hand, in the sub-reserved area 468 of item 8, the main disk ID on the original main CDROM side where the virtual file 450 is located, the user ID 470 that set the virtual file 450, the memorization number 471 for each file, and the final master that created the virtual file. Data such as the main machine ID 472 of the personal computer is added as compared with the virtual directory entry 452. This added data is a virtual file 450 and a physical file 451.
It is recorded in order to confirm the relationship with the physical file 451 side. If checked and the relationship is low, the OS does not allow writing. Further, in the attribute 458 of item 7, a reproduction-only code of “01H” in the case of MSDOM is recorded in order to prohibit normal writing unrelated to the virtual file 450. Therefore, recording is not possible in principle. When data is recorded in the virtual file 450, the CDRO of the virtual file 450 is stored in the input / output control system of the personal computer.
Information such as MID 469 and modified sub-460 is sent. It is checked that this data matches the sub file link data 467, and if it is OK, the IOS of the kernel section permits writing to the physical file 451, and the recording is executed. When data is added to "File A", the directory 463 of the physical file 451 is viewed, the contents of FAT466 are added like FAT466a, and the additional data of "File A" is physically recorded in a new data area. To do. In this case, since the file size becomes larger than that before recording, the data of the file size 462 of each of the virtual directory entry and the directory entry 467 of the physical file and the virtual file is rewritten to, for example, “5600 KB”.

In this way, the data of the physical file 451 corresponding to the virtual file 450 can be recorded and reproduced. Since the OS, the input / output OS, and the network OS all perform the work realized by the virtual file 450, from the user's point of view, the magnetic recording unit 3 of the CDROM 1a has, for example, 5
It can be handled as if a physical file of 600 KB exists. 1 of virtual directory entry 452 of about 48B
Virtual file 450 from several data and several dozen KB to several G
By physically linking the physical file 451 of B, data can be physically recorded and reproduced. Therefore, even if the capacity of the magnetic file 422 of the present invention attached to the CDROM 1a is only 32 KB, it is possible to virtually record and reproduce 500 to 1000 virtual directories 452, that is, 500 to 1000 virtual files 450. it can. One file having 10 MB has a remarkable effect that a virtual RAM disk capacity of about 5 GB can be obtained. Then C
A method of realizing a virtual file for DROM will be described based on a flowchart. First, a method of reproducing a virtual file will be described using the virtual file reproduction routine flowchart of FIG.

In Step 481a, the file “
It is assumed that an instruction for calling X "has been received. Next step 481b
In step 481d, it is checked whether only the contents of the directory information are sufficient, and if Yes, the virtual directory entry in the magnetic file 422 is read.
Display character 4 on screen 495 of the screen display diagram of FIG.
As shown at 96a, only the directory contents such as file name or directory name, file size, creation date and time are displayed on the screen of the personal computer.

Here, the screen display will be described. FIG.
In FIG. 4 (a), the display characters 495b and 495c are each 1
0 MB still image file 1 GB moving image file recordable virtual file 450 is drive A, that is, C with RAM
It is shown that it is logically present in the DROM 1a. It seems as if the operator has a large recordable file. Of course, the 540 MB CDROM file for reproduction and the like is also displayed in the display character 496 d, and the display character 496 e of “total 4 files” is also displayed. In this embodiment, the personal computer is equipped with a 20 GB hard disk. The virtual disk setting capacity VMAX of the virtual disk for one CDROM 1a is recorded in the column of the sub disk ID of the default main machine ID 474 in FIG. Here, either the physical file capacity of the secondary disk ID or the virtual disk set capacity is the maximum capacity that can be recorded on the virtual disk. The remaining recording capacity is obtained by subtracting the current used capacity of the virtual file from this value. In the case of FIG. 164 (a), a virtual file having a total capacity of 10 GB is set, and a 1020 MB virtual file is consumed. It is 10,000 MB-1020 MB, and it is displayed on the screen that there is a virtual file 450 with a remaining capacity of 8980 MB. A virtual file is shown like a display character 496g. Since the symbol "V" is attached to the virtual file, it can be distinguished from other files.

[0264] Also, the personal computer screen diagram of FIG. 165 and FIG.
As shown in the block diagram of FIG.
If you divide the driver of A drive into A drive B drive
The ROM part of M is displayed like the display character 496h, and C
In the RAM portion of the DROM, since the ROM and the RAM are separately displayed like the display characters 496i and 496j, there is an effect that the operator can easily handle. Further, in the case of multitask processing, since the ROM section and the RAM section can be independently read and written simultaneously, there is also an effect that the processing speed becomes faster. Now, step 481 of the flowchart in FIG.
Return to b. If No, the process proceeds to step 481e, and it is checked whether the currently used machine ID No. and the main machine ID number 454 recorded in the virtual directory entry 452 are the same. If No, there is no physical file on this personal computer and the process proceeds to step 482a. If Yes, since the physical file 451 exists in the personal computer 408, the process proceeds to step 451f, the drive name of the physical file is read from the secondary disk ID 455, and it is checked whether the drive is operating. If No, in step 481g, a display for instructing "power-on of drive ID" is displayed on the screen, in step 481h it is checked whether or not the drive has operated, if NO, step STOP is performed in step 481i, and if yes, the process proceeds to step 481j. In step 481j, it is checked whether or not the disc with the secondary disc ID 455 exists.
If No, the process proceeds to step 481k, and it is determined whether the medium is an exchange medium such as a floppy disk or an optical disc by looking at the exchange medium identifier in the secondary disc ID. If No, step 481n
Display "Error" on the screen and stop. Ye
If s, in step 481m, display "Insert disk" of secondary disk ID 455 on the screen, and then step 481
Return to j. Returning to step 481j, if Yes, it proceeds to step 481q to look for the corresponding file name 456 by looking at the directory area 465 of the disk of the secondary disk ID. If it is No at step 481r, an error message is displayed at step 481p. If yes, step 4
The information is collated at 81 s to confirm whether or not the physical file really corresponds to the virtual file. Specifically, the virtual directory entry 452 and the directory entry 46
Match the data in 7. Also, the disc ID of the CDROM and the ID of the CDROM side main disc ID 469 in the directory entry 467 are collated. Also check the modification time and file size. Do not check attributes. At step 481t, it is checked whether all the items to be collated are the same. If No, an error is displayed at step 481u, and Yes.
If s, in step 481v, reading of the physical data of the corresponding file "X" in the directory area 465 is started.
First, wait for the start cluster number "YYY" of FAT,
In step 481w, the cluster numbers consecutive to “YYY” of the FAT are read out, and in step 481x, necessary data among all the data of the above-mentioned cluster numbers in the data area is read out. At the next step 481y, the reading of the file “X” is completed, and the virtual file 450 becomes the personal computer 408.
Any capacity value can be obtained within the range of the hard disk capacity.

By the way, returning to step 481e, when there is no physical file corresponding to the virtual file in the hard disk of the current personal computer, the process jumps to step 482a and the personal computer with the main machine ID containing the physical file of the child Start the connection. In this case, the connection routine 482 is handled by the network OS. LAN of the main machine ID
The address is read from the item of the main machine ID of the virtual directory entry, the number of the connection program is read in step 482b, the predetermined network connection program is executed, the above-mentioned LAN address is input, and connection is tried. In step 482c, the connection is checked and it fails (N
If it is o), an error message is displayed in step 482d, and if it is successful (Yes), the corresponding file read command is transmitted to the sub personal computer 408a via a network such as a LAN.

From step 482g, the sub personal computer 40 is started.
It becomes the OS work of 8a. First, from the main computer Fil
The data in the physical file is read in response to the e "X" read command, and this operation is exactly the same as the physical file data read subroutine 483 described above. Therefore, in step 483a, this subroutine is used in this subroutine 483a. At step 482h, the completion of reading the file is checked, and Yes
If s, the data of the corresponding file is advanced to step 482j, the data of the file "X" is transmitted to the main personal computer 408, and the operation is advanced to step 482k. If No, step 482.
Proceed to i, send an error message to the main personal computer, and proceed to step 482k.

At step 482k, the connection routine 482 of the network OS of the main personal computer 480 is again executed via the LAN. In step 482k, the secondary personal computer 40
The data of the corresponding file or the error message from 8a is received, and it is checked in step 482m whether it is the error message. If Yes, an error message is displayed in step 482p, and if No, the process proceeds to step 482y, and the file reading operation is completed.

Next, the procedure of the virtual file rewriting routine 485a will be described by opening the flowchart of FIG. Display characters 49 on the screen as shown in FIG.
6, the virtual directory entry 452 of this specific file "x" is read in step 485b when the user issues a command to rewrite the data of the specific file "x" in step 485a, and this file is written in this file in step 485c. Check if there is a recitation number. If Yes, in step 486d, the display character 496 in FIG. 166 (a) is displayed.
As in p, "password?" is displayed on the screen.
The operator displays "12345 as indicated by the display character 496q.
6 "is input to the keyboard, and this number is checked as a recitation number. If No, step 485e displays" error "on the screen.

If Yes, the process proceeds to step 485g to check whether the physical file 451 exists in the computer of the personal computer. If the current machine ID and main machine ID 45
Check if it matches with 4, and if Yes, step 485.
If no, the process proceeds to step 486a in the connection routine 488 for connecting to another personal computer through the network. If Yes, the process proceeds to step 485h of the physical file data rewrite subroutine 487, the drive name of the secondary machine ID in the virtual directory entry 452 is taken out, and it is checked whether the drive with this drive name exists in the personal computer. If "No", as shown in FIG. 166 (b), the display character 496r of "Please turn on the drive power" of step 485i is displayed on the screen, and step 48
The presence or absence of the corresponding drive is checked in 5i. If "No", the process proceeds to step 485j, and the "error" display character 4 is displayed on the screen.
Put out 56s. If Yes, go to step 485k. At step 485k, it is checked whether there is a disk having the same ID number as the secondary disk ID 455 of the driver. If No, skip to step 485m to check the exchange medium attribute, and if Yes, go to step 485n and see FIG.
As shown in (d), "Please insert the exchange medium disk xx" is displayed and the process returns to step 485k. If No, it jumps to step 485j and displays "error".

If step 485k is Yes, the directory area 465 in the disk having the secondary disk ID is read, and the corresponding file name 456 is searched for and checked. If No, the process jumps to step 485j to display an error. If Yes, the process proceeds to step 485r to check whether this physical file is a virtual physical file. Specifically, except for the contents of the virtual directory entry 452 and the attribute data of the directory entry 467,
Check if the data are the same. In particular, the CDROM main disk ID 46 included in the disk ID of the client side CDROM and the server side disk entry.
Check with 9.

The check is made in Step 485s, and if No, the process goes to Step 485j and “Error” is displayed. Ye
If s, proceed to step 485t, and the system such as OS is F
attribute data “0” of the directory entry of ilex
Temporarily erase the write-protected clubs such as 1H "or" 02H "so that they can be stored." Invisible code "is included even if you try to view these files other than the virtual files of the CDROM. So you can't see the file, and of course you can't modify it.

In this way, the virtual file is the corresponding CD
It is protected so that it can be modified only from ROM and cannot be seen. In step 485u, it is checked whether or not the disk containing the physical file has free space. If No, the error display in step 485j is displayed, and if Yes,
Proceeding to step 485v, the data of the corresponding file in the directory is read and the starting cluster number is obtained. In step 485w, the cluster number following this starting cluster number is obtained from the FAT area 466. In step 485x, the data in the data area 473 is rewritten in the entire data area of the corresponding cluster number. If the new data has a larger capacity than the old data, the data is also recorded in the new cluster. In this way, the data is actually recorded in the physical file 451.

It is checked whether or not the process is completed in step 485y, and if No, the process returns to step 485x, and if Yes, the process proceeds to step 485z and first rewrites the directory and FAT of the physical file 451. At this time, the attribute of the directory entry 467 is "02H" invisible attribute (invisibility
Record the single) again. Thus, as shown in the screen display diagram of the sub personal computer in FIG. 167, the substance of the physical file becomes invisible to the operator, so that the virtual file 450 of the CDROM 1a cannot be rewritten except by the OS in principle. Therefore, there is an effect that data is prevented from being improperly rewritten. The above code number
By setting each virtual file, data can be protected twice.

Then, proceeding to step 486n, the data of the directory entry 467 is transferred to the virtual directory entry 452 of the magnetic file except the attribute data. In this way, the contents of both are exactly the same, including the date and time, so that writing to the physical file 451 is permitted by the collation work at the time of rewriting. The operation ends at step 486p.

[0275] Here, returning to step 485g, "N
When it is "o", the routine for connecting to the LAN is started at step 486a. First, from the virtual directory entry 452, the LA of the main machine ID where the physical file exists is located.
Read N address. In step 486b, FIG.
As shown in the network connection diagram of No. 8, L of the main machine ID
Currently CDR to sub-computer 408a with AN address "A"
A plurality of program numbers are read from the LAN address "B" of the main personal computer 408 to which the OM 1a is attached via a network such as a LAN, and the LAN addresses are input to execute the connection programs one after another. If the connection is checked in step 486c and the connection can be made by any of the programs, the process proceeds to step 486e of Yes. If No, the process proceeds to step 486d to display an error. In step 486e, the rewriting command of the physical file 451 and the new data to be rewritten are transmitted to the sub personal computer 408a.

Next, in step 486f, the OS of the main personal computer is changed to work of the network OS and the input / output control OS of the sub personal computer 408a. First, receive the rewrite command and rewrite data for the file,
In the next step, the above-mentioned physical file data rewriting subroutine 487 is executed, and it is checked in step 486g whether the file data rewriting has succeeded.
If so, the process proceeds to step 486h, and the information of completion of rewriting to the main personal computer 408 and the latest data of the directory entry 467 of the physical file are transmitted to the main personal computer 408 via the network, which is the work of the network OS of the main personal computer 408. Glimpse. Step 4
Return to 86g, if No, skip to step 486i,
An error message is sent to the main personal computer 408 via the network, and the operation of the main personal computer is performed in step 48.
Jump to 6j.

At step 486j, which is the operation of the network OS of the main personal computer 408, the directory entry 467 of the physical file 451 from the sub personal computer 408a is entered.
Data or error message is received, and if there is no error message in step 486k, step 48
In 6n, the virtual file 4 of the magnetic file of the CDROM based on the data such as the date of this directory entry 467.
The 50 virtual directory entries 452 are rewritten so as to be the same, and the rewriting operation is completed in step 486p. Returning to step 486k, if there is an error message, proceed to 486m and display "error" on the screen.

Thus, as shown in the network connection diagram of FIG. 168, the CDROM 2a with RAM, for example, 10G
The virtual file 450 of B actually has only a physical memory of 32 KB at most in the magnetic recording layer 3 of the optical disk 2, but a large capacity file is logically realized by using the method of the virtual disk of the present invention. it can.

In some cases, H of the main personal computer 408
It may be the physical file 451 defined in the DD or the physical file 451 of the HDD of the secondary personal computer 408a located at a remote place. FIG. 220 represents the network connection diagram of FIG. 168 in a directory configuration diagram.
Computer A as main machine 408, Computer B as sub machine 408
An example in which the hybrid media medium 2 of the present invention is inserted into the main machine 408 is defined as a. If the optical ROM part of the CDROM drive is defined as the F drive and the magnetic recording layer is defined as the G drive, 100% of the data of the F drive is actually present in the medium.
It is a ROM of 600 MB. However, the magnetic recording portion of the G drive is 32 KB, and the actual RAM file 469
Has only 32KB. However, as described above, the virtual RAM file 470 is made logical by the OS or the device driver, and the C drive of the HDD or the network 47.
Virtual RAM in the real RAM file 471 physically defined in the HDD of another computer 408a via
Actual data of the file 470 is recorded. Then, only when the actual data, data A, data B, C, D, E, F of the virtual RAM file 470 are opened, the OS is sub-existent based on the magnetic recording layer, that is, the connection table 473 in the main actual RAM file 469. The data in the RAM file is read out, and the operation is performed as if the actual data is recorded in the virtual RAM file 470.
A virtual RAM file 470 is stored in the connection table 473.
Real RAM file 47 in which the actual data inside is recorded
Since the network address such as the TCP / IP address and the Ethernet address on the network of the computer 408a in which the HDD 1 exists and the drive name and the directory name password of the connected protocol real RAM file 471 are recorded, this connection table is stored. Based on 473, as long as the network 472 is functioning, the OS can retrieve the data of the sub-real RAM file 471 containing the actual data of the virtual RAM file 470 as described above.

From the user's point of view, as long as the network is connected and functioning, no matter which computer the hybrid medium 2 of the present invention is put in, the magnetic file 422 contains the files A, B, C, D, E and F. Inside data A, B,
It looks like C, D, E and F are recorded. However, in reality, what is recorded in the magnetic recording unit is usr1,
Directory names such as usr2 and FileA, B, C,
Only the attribute data of the files such as the file names of D, E, and F, the capacity, the creation date and time, that is, only the directory entry information of the files are recorded. In the case of MS-DOS, the directory entry data is 32 bytes, and therefore the hybrid recording medium of the present invention having a capacity of 32 KB can actually record about 1000 files or directories. Most conventional CD-ROMs have one floppy attached. In the case of the present invention, since the data capacity of each virtual file is set to 1.44 MB, which is the same as that of the floppy disk, as a default value, it is easy to handle in terms of compatibility. Of course, it is also possible to set to 10 MB and 100 MB as described above. In this case, there is a great effect that the data of about 1000 files, that is, the data of about 1 GB can be recorded virtually in the ROM / RAM medium having the physical RAM capacity of 32 KB. Large capacity and low cost ROM
Although a medium combining a small capacity and a low cost RAM is economical, the present invention allows a user to obtain a replacement medium having a large capacity RAM virtually without increasing the cost. This system has been described by using the example of the CD-ROM with the magnetic recording layer, but it can also be used for an optical disk having a ROM and a RAM or an IC card. 220 and 2
56 and FIG. 257 show an example in which a virtual RAM file is realized in an IC card having a ROM and a RAM. ROM is very cheap in the case of IC card, but non-volatile R
The cost of AM is several orders of magnitude higher as seen in the example of flash memory. The same applies to optical disks. Generally, the price of ROM is much lower than the price of RAM as seen in optical disks and ICs. According to the present invention, a CD with a magnetic recording layer
-A cheap ROM part such as a ROM has a large capacity and a high RA.
Even if a medium having a small capacity in the M portion is used, the RAM capacity can be virtually increased in the device connected to the network, and thus the capacity of any exchangeable RAM medium can be virtually increased. 53% in the US and 13% in Japan PCs are connected to the network and are increasing. Therefore, the present invention has an extremely large effect of virtually dramatically increasing the capacity of the exchangeable RAM / ROM medium in the coming network age.

Needless to say, the capacity of the exchange-type RAM dedicated medium can be virtually increased as shown in the medium 2y of FIG. 257. In this case, for example, even an IC card having a capacity of 32 KB can virtually record and reproduce 1000 files without limiting the capacity.

By the way, the reproduction procedure and the rewriting procedure of the existing virtual file have been described above. A method of newly creating a virtual file will be described using the flowchart of FIG. First, in step 491a, FIG. 169 (a)
It is assumed that the user inputs a save command or user ID for the new file name "x" data file as shown in the screen display of FIG. The OS checks whether there is free space in the magnetic file 422, and if No, stops at step 491c.
If Yes, in step 491d, the default main machine ID 474 and secondary disk ID of the user ID are read out, and in step 491e, the default machine ID 474 and FIG.
The screen is displayed as shown in (a). If No, step 49
Ask the user to enter the default value changed in 1f and check again. If yes, go to step 491g,
Default main machine ID linked to virtual file
Then, it is checked whether the machine IDs in which the CDROMs are currently bundled are the same. If No, the process proceeds to step 492a of the network connection subroutine, and if Yes, the process proceeds to step 491h of the file new registration subroutine 493. In step 491h, it is checked whether or not there is a disk with the default disk ID. If No, in step 491i it is checked whether the disk is a replaceable disk or data.
“Insert disk xx” like 69 (a)
Is displayed and the process returns to step 491k, it is checked whether the disk has a physical capacity for securing a physical file. If No, the message “Error” is displayed in step 491u, and if Yes, the process proceeds to the next step 491m, the data is recorded from the cluster start number xx in the free area of the data area 473 of the physical file, and it is checked in step 491n whether it is completed. If No, the error display of step 491u is displayed. If Yes, the FAT area 466 of the physical file is displayed.
And the directory area 465 are rewritten based on the recording file. At step 491q, the OS determines the attribute 4 of the directory entry 467 of FIG. 160 of the physical file.
An invisible attribute such as “02H” is recorded in 58. "01
H "write protection may be recorded. In this way, the input control OS treats only such a virtual file specially so that the file is linked to the virtual file to be recorded / reproduced. In the next step 491r, the main machine ID and password are recorded in the directory entry 467. In the next step 491s, the registration date and file name of the same contents as the directory entry 467 of the physical file 451 are recorded. By recording unique information such as "etc." in the virtual directory entry 452 of the recording medium 2, when the virtual file is rewritten in the future, the collation with the physical file 451 can be surely performed, and the information can be mistakenly stored in another personal computer on the network. It is prevented to rewrite some other physical file 451. Step 4 Create a new file routine in 1t is completed.

Now, returning to step 491g of the connection subroutine 488, if No, the process proceeds to step 492a, reads the LAN address of the main machine of the virtual directory entry 452, connects to the main personal computer via the network, and connects to the sub personal computer 408. The physical file 451 of the virtual file 450 is registered in the disk of (1) using the file new registration subroutine 493, and the result is reported to the main personal computer. From step 492a to step 4
The flow up to 92j is the same as in the case of FIG. The new registration is confirmed in step 492i, the process proceeds to step 491s, the data of the directory entry 467 of the physical file 451 is recorded in the virtual directory entry 452 of the recording medium 2, and the new file registration is completed in step 491t.

Next, the recording medium 2 will be described. When the directory information is recorded on the magnetic recording layer in this way, if this data is destroyed, the virtual file will be destroyed.
Therefore, in the case of applying to a CDROM or the like, the same virtual directory entry is recorded at two or three physically separated locations as shown in FIG. A separate track 67x, to protect from the circular damage peculiar to discs such as CDs,
Record at 67y and 67z. Further, in order to protect from scratches in the radial direction, by disposing the virtual directory entries 452x, 452y, and 452z on different angles θx, θy, and θz, it is possible to prevent destruction of directory information.

In recent years, the price / capacity of the HDD has dropped nearly 1000 times in recent 10 years, and the number of personal computers having a capacity of several to several tens GB is increasing. Focusing on this point, the system defines the physical file by utilizing the capacity of the HDD having a sufficient capacity, and
RA of optical disk 2 with small capacity RAM of ~ 32KB
By logically defining a large-capacity virtual file in the M area, the user can treat the ROM disk with optical RAM as if it has a large-capacity recording memory of several MB to several GB. There is such a remarkable effect. Further, almost 100% of recent business personal computers are connected to some LAN network. In addition, the OS of personal computers in recent years
Also has a network function. Therefore, even if the main personal computer 408 in which the optical disk 2 is inserted happens to have no physical file 451 on the server side corresponding to the virtual file 450, the physical file of the sub personal computer 408a is automatically transmitted via this network as shown in FIG. File 45
In this embodiment, a method of accessing 1a to record or reproduce data is clarified. With this method,
There is a remarkable effect that the physical file of the virtual file can be accessed no matter which personal computer the optical recording medium 2 of the present invention is inserted into. Although the embodiment in which these methods are incorporated into the network OS or the output control OS is shown, they can be realized by an application program.

As described above, by providing the magnetic recording layer 3 on the back side of the recording medium 2 having an optical recording surface, a magnetic field modulation type magneto-optical recording is performed in the RAM type recording / reproducing apparatus like magneto-optical recording. By sharing the magnetic field head between the magnetic field modulations of the recording / reproducing apparatus, magnetic recording of information of independent channels provided on the recording medium can be performed with almost no increase in the number of parts and cost. In this case, since the slider tracking mechanism for the magnetic head is originally provided, there is almost no increase in cost on the recording / reproducing device side. Therefore, there is an effect that a magnetic recording / reproducing function independent of optical recording can be added at substantially the same price.

[0287] Further, the recorded recording medium is used as a music C
Apply to D, HD, CDROM and MDROM for games,
When a magnetic recording track is provided on the back surface of the recording / reproducing apparatus 1 of the ROM type shown in the block diagram of FIG. 17, it is possible to obtain a remarkable effect such as being able to return to the state at the time of the reproduction or the previous use. Even when recording is limited to only one track in the TOC area as described in the first embodiment, several hundred bi when the gap width is 200 μm.
t can be recorded. This capacity meets the requirements required for the use of the current game IC-ROM with a flash memory. T
When the track is limited to one track in the OC area, the magnetic track access means is not required, and the system is simplified.

Further, in a read-only recording / reproducing apparatus for optical recording, it is necessary to provide a magnetic head portion or the like on the opposite side of the recording medium facing the optical head. Since it can be shared with the magnetic field modulation head, the price can be reduced due to the effect of mass production. Originally, the cost is much lower than that of the magnetic recording component for low density, which is an optical recording component, so that the price increase is small. No tracking mechanism is added because the optical head and the magnetic head on the opposite side are mechanically linked. Therefore, the cost does not increase.

Tracking accuracy of the optical head is not high due to the tracking of the optical head based on the address information or the time information engraved in the optical recording layer on the surface of the RAM type or ROM type recording medium. The magnetic head can be tracking-controlled at an arbitrary position. As a result, for consumer applications such as linear sensors and linear actuators found in floppy disks, it is possible to obtain the effect that no expensive parts need to be added.

The protective layer on the back surface of the conventional magnetic field modulation type magneto-optical recording medium is manufactured by spin coating from a binder and a lubricant. In the case of the present invention, a magnetic material is added to this material and spin coating is performed in this same step, and the number of manufacturing steps does not often increase. This increase in cost is of a negligible order from the overall cost perspective. Therefore, the new value of the magnetic recording function is added with almost no increase in cost.

As described above, according to the present invention, the magnetic channel can be added with almost no increase in cost.
A RAM function can be added to an OM type optical disc or a ROM dedicated player.

Further, the high Hc magnetic sheet of the present invention is attached to the label portion of an audio cassette such as DCC or VHS or a video cassette, and when the cassette is loaded, the data recorded on the magnetic sheet is read by the magnetic head 8 and read by the microcomputer. When the data is stored in the IC memory and the data on the magnetic sheet needs to be updated, only the contents of the IC memory are updated while the cassette is being inserted, and only the updated data of the data stored in the IC memory when the cassette is taken out is read. By rewriting the data on the magnetic recording layer of the magnetic sheet with a fixed magnetic head provided at the outlet of the cassette, index information such as the address and TOC of the cassette tape can be recorded in the cassette independently of the tape. The effect is that information retrieval can be done instantly.

Further, the display 44a having the configuration of FIG.
By using the present invention in a video game machine to which the keypad 450 is connected and the reproduction is not performed unless an illegal copy identification signal is recorded on the magnetic recording layer 3, it is possible to eliminate the illegally copied CD. Of course, since data such as game results, scores, user name, and environment setting data can be recorded / reproduced on / from the magnetic recording layer 3, the user can turn off the power or use another machine before using the previous The effect is that the game can be restarted from the middle of the game. Although the magnetic recording layer 3 is provided on the print surface side of the CD in FIG. 180, it may be provided on the transparent substrate side as described above. In this case, there is an effect that the size can be reduced.

(Embodiment 23) FIG. 181 shows a block diagram of a twenty-third embodiment. Example 23 will be described with reference to a recording / reproducing apparatus having a simple structure. In general, a CD player of the type in which the upper lid is opened and a recording medium such as a CD is taken in and out has a simple structure and therefore has a small number of parts. In the case of this method, the top view of FIGS. 182 (a) and (b) and FIG. 183 (a).
As shown in the cross-sectional views of (e) to (e), the magnetic head is moved onto the CD only when the upper lid 389 is closed according to the opening / closing of the upper lid 389 to facilitate the mounting of the CD. Figure 1
In 82 (a), the upper lid 389 is in the "open" state. At this time, CD2 is not included. If the magnetic head 8 is present, not only can the CD 2 not be mounted, but if it is forcibly mounted, the magnetic head 8 will be destroyed. Therefore, when the upper lid is "opened", the magnetic head 8 is retracted below the magnetic head protection portion 501 provided outside the CD2.

Next, when the CD 2 is mounted and the upper lid is “closed”, the magnetic head 8 and its suspension section move in the direction of arrow 51 in conjunction with the upper lid 389 and move onto the CD 2.
This procedure will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 183
In (a), when the upper lid 389 is closed in the arrow 51a direction, the lid rotation shafts 393, 393a rotate, the head retractor 502 moves in the arrow 51b direction, and the coupled magnetic head 8 moves in the arrow 51c direction. . Thus, FIG.
As shown in (b), the magnetic head 8, the slider 41, and the suspension 41a move onto the recording medium 2 such as a CD.

Next, regarding the elevation of the magnetic head 8, FIG.
3 (c) (d) (e). FIG. 183 (c)
The optical head 6 has the innermost track 65a such as TOC as shown in FIG.
184, and the media identifier 504 as shown in FIG. 184.
Read to determine if the media has a magnetic track 67,
If Yes, as shown in FIG. 183 (d), when the optical head 6 is moved inward from the innermost track, the head elevating link 503 pushes the head elevator 505, and the magnetic head 8 contacts the outermost magnetic track 67a. Then, the magnetic recording signal is recorded or reproduced.

In this case, the rotation servo control method is shown in FIG.
As shown at 85 (a), a servo signal area 505 is provided. At the time of manufacturing, a high Hc portion is applied as shown in FIG. 185 (b), formatted at a factory etc. as shown in FIG. 185 (c), and servo signals, sector information, and a unique medium unique number for each medium. 506 is a sync signal area 50
7 is recorded by a factory or a dedicated machine using a magnetic head capable of recording even a magnetic material having a strong Hc of 2750 to 4000 Oe. Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (d), a general magnetic portion 402 of Hc of 1600 to 2750 Oe having a slightly low Hc is applied. Figure 185 on it
The protective layer 50 shown in (e) is applied. According to this method, although the high Hc portion of the final medium is difficult to record magnetically, the magnetic portion 402 and the protective layer 50 are on the upper side, and therefore, rewriting cannot be performed due to space loss. Therefore, the media unique number 506 recorded in the synchronization signal area 507 cannot be rewritten, and there is an effect that the above-mentioned illegal copy prevention function is not broken.

Further, the servo signal 505 and the address signal cannot be recorded / reproduced by a recording / reproducing apparatus which is usually commercially available, and they are not demagnetized even if they are erroneously recorded. Therefore, under any use condition, the data in the sync signal area is almost completely protected after shipment from the factory, so that there is an effect that stable recording is realized.

[0299] Now, let us now return to the description of the rotary servo in Fig. 183 (d). If there is an optical recording part inside the innermost circumference of the CD2, the rotation speed of the motor becomes constant by performing the normal rotation control of the CLV motor with the sync signal of the optical track, and magnetic recording / reproduction is performed. You can

However, when there is no optical recording portion inside the innermost circumference according to the CD standard, the magnetic head 8 reproduces the servo signal 505 in the synchronization signal area 507 described with reference to FIG. The rotation servo signal reproducing unit 30c of 181 reproduces the rotation servo signal and sends the rotation servo signal to the motor drive circuit 26 to control the motor at a constant rotation speed. In this way, data is stably recorded / reproduced in the sectors requiring recording / reproduction in the data recording areas 508, 508a of the magnetic track 67a in FIG. 185.

Next, when recording / reproduction is completed, FIG.
As the optical head 6 moves to the outer peripheral portion as shown in (e), the head elevating link 503 returns to its original position, the magnetic head 8 moves upward in the arrow 51e, and the magnetic track 6
Keep away from 7a to prevent wear. Since the magnetic head 8 can be moved up and down by the traverse motor 23 in this manner, it is not necessary to separately provide a head up / down actuator, and the number of parts can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 186 (c), (d) and (e), the optical head 6 is forcibly moved to the outside of the outermost circumference by the traverse motor 23 as shown in FIG. 186 (d). Since the head elevating link 503 is moved in the direction of the arrow 51a, the magnetic head 8 is lowered in the direction of the arrow 51b and brought into contact with the magnetic track 67a, so that the magnetic signal can be recorded and reproduced. At this time, if the magnetic noise of the optical head 6 interferes, the operation of the optical head actuator 18 is stopped. Further, when the operation is stopped or when the signal of the optical track cannot be reproduced by the medium, the drive current of the optical head is stopped, and the servo signal 505 of the magnetic track shown in FIG. Playback is performed by the playback unit 30c, and rotary servo is applied.
This allows optical reproduction and magnetic reproduction to be temporally separated. Therefore, the influence of noise from the optical head on the magnetic reproduction is eliminated, and the effect of magnetic reproduction with a low error rate can be added.

The method of the twenty-third embodiment can be used for a plurality of magnetic track methods and one track, but in the one-track method as described in another embodiment, the head access is unnecessary. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration of the device is simplified. In the case of the outermost track,
This has the effect of increasing the capacity.

In the embodiment of the multi-track system described with reference to FIG. 1 and the like, during magnetic reproduction, magnetic noise from the optical head 6 to the magnetic head 8 occurs as shown in FIG. 116, increasing the error rate. . In this case, as described above, as shown in FIG. 187, as shown in FIG.
By using a medium in which the magnetic servo signal 505 is recorded at a factory or a formatter, the drive current of the optical head 6 can be stopped by switching from the servo based on the optical signal to the servo based on the magnetic signal during magnetic reproduction. Therefore, there is an effect that noise from the optical head can be blocked. Next, FIG. 188 (a) shows a method of applying rotation servo with an optical servo signal without using a magnetic servo signal.
This will be described with reference to cross-sectional views (f) to (f).

FIG. 188 (a) shows the state at t = 0.
The optical head 6 is located on the outer peripheral track of the TOC track 65a. At t = t ₁ in FIG. 188 (b), the optical head 6 reads the TOC track 65a, and the media identifier 504 indicates the TOC subcode or the audio track in FIG. 184 (b) as shown in FIG. 184 (c). Subcode part and Figure 184
Search from the first track of the CDROM of (a).
At this time, since the head lifting link 503 is moved from the dotted line A to the dotted line B position by the optical head 6, the mechanical delay device 50 is
The switch 511 of 9 is turned on. However, the delay time t
_The head lifting link 503a does not operate until it reaches _D. Then, the reproduction of the TOC data is completed at t = t ₂ in FIG. 184 (c). Since this time is a fraction of a second, when the delay time t _D > t ₂ is set, the magnetic head 8 does not go down. When there is no media identifier, that is, when it is OFF, t
_D > t ₃ . In FIG. 188 (d) at t = t ₃ , the optical head 6 moves in the direction of arrow 51d and the head elevating link 503 stops pressing the switch 511, so the head does not descend.

When there is a media identifier, there is always a magnetic track 67a. That is, when ON, t ₄ > t _D
= T ₄ , as shown in FIG. 188 (e), the switch 511 is pressed for the set delay time t _D or more, so that the output of the mechanical delay device 509 operates and the head elevating link 503a.
Pushes down the supporting portion including the suspension of the magnetic head 8 in the direction of the arrow 51e, and the magnetic head moves to the magnetic track 67.
Contact a. At this time, since the optical head 6 is reproducing the optical track 65a such as TOC, the optical servo signal is reproduced, and the optical servo signal causes the motor 17 to move to C.
The LV rotates at a constant rotation speed. Therefore, the magnetic signal is
It is reproduced in synchronization with the sync signal of the optical reproduction signal. In this case, since the rotary servo can be applied at the same time by the magnetic reproduction and the optical reproduction signal, it is not necessary to add a separate rotary servo structure, and the structure of the medium and the device can be simplified. In this case, the rotary servo signal reproducing unit 30c can be omitted from FIG.

When the reproduction or recording of the magnetic signal is completed, the system control unit 10 of FIG. 181 sends a signal to the traverse movement circuit 24a to move the optical head 6 in the direction of the arrow 51f, and the switch of the mechanical delay unit 509 is switched. 511
Is released and t = t ₅ after a delay time t _DS shorter than t _D has elapsed.
188 (f), the head elevating link 503a rises in the upward direction of the arrow 51g, the magnetic head 8 rises, and is released from contact with the magnetic track 67a. Thus, the magnetic head can be moved up and down with a simpler configuration, and optical reproduction and magnetic reproduction can be performed at the same time.

[0308] Further, as shown in FIG. 185, in the case of using a plurality of magnetic tracks 67, as shown in cross-sectional view of the medium of FIG. 189 (a), first, the magnetic track width T _WH of the magnetic head 8 The width T _{W of the} track 67a is made larger by the amount of eccentricity. As a result, the recording head and the reproducing head can be shared. This is because by setting T _WH >> T _W , recording can be performed in all the tracks of the magnetic track 67a, and the previous recording section does not remain at all. By providing a plurality of tracks with separate magnetic layers as shown in FIG. 189 (a), the recording / reproducing head can be shared.

By the way, in the case of the multiple track system, setting of the track pitch T _P is important. In the case of the CD standard, an error Δr of ± 0.2 mm in the radial direction between the position of the optical track 65 and the center of the circle of the CD is allowed. Under ideal conditions, the magnetic track 67a is arranged on the back side of the specific optical track 65a as shown in FIG. 189 (a), and the magnetic track can be accurately accessed by an optical address. However, in reality, the worst condition is + Δr as shown in FIG. 189 (b).
If the optical track 65a and the magnetic track 67a are misaligned, or if the optical track 65a and the magnetic track 67a are misaligned by -Δr as shown in FIG. Conceivable. In order for the magnetic head 8 to not accidentally access the adjacent magnetic track 67b, it is necessary to satisfy r-Δr-T _WH / 2> r + Δr + T _WH / 2-T _P , and T _P > 2Δr + T _WH Becomes

In the case of a CD, since Δr = 0.2 mm, T _P > 0.4 mm, that is, it is necessary to set the track pitch wider by 0.4 mm or more. By separating the magnetic layers as shown in FIGS. 187 (a) and 189 (a) and recording the magnetic servo signal by using a single magnetic head, the system has a simple structure as shown in FIG. Has the effect of becoming.

In addition, FIG. 183 (c) (d) of this embodiment.
The method of raising and lowering the magnetic head 8 by using the traverse motor 23 described in (e) is used even when the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 are on the same surface side with respect to the medium as shown in the transverse sectional view of FIG. Applicable. When the identifier is determined from the state of the TOC track 67a in FIG. 191 (c),
The optical head 6 moves in the direction of arrow 51a to the state of FIG. 191 (d), the head elevating link 503 moves in the same direction,
The magnetic head 8 is lifted up in the direction of the arrow 51b to contact the magnetic track 67a provided on the outer peripheral portion on the optical recording surface side to perform magnetic recording / reproduction. At this time, the optical head reproduces the optical servo signal by the optical track provided on the inner peripheral portion to apply the rotary servo, or performs the rotary servo with the magnetic servo signal previously provided on the magnetic track 67a to rotate at low speed. .

After the magnetic recording is completed, the optical head 6 moves to the position shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 1 (e), the magnetic head 8 moves to the outer peripheral portion, and the magnetic head 8 is lowered and released from the contact. Also, FIG.
As shown in (c) to (d), the optical head 6 moves to the outside of the outermost peripheral portion in the direction of the arrow 51a, whereby the magnetic head 8 is moved.
Can be lifted up to the arrow 51b to contact the magnetic track 67a. Since the operation is almost the same as that of FIG. 186, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, by providing the magnetic recording track 67a on the outer peripheral portion on the optical recording surface side, the magnetic head 8
Even if the optical head 6 is provided on the same side as the optical head 6, the traverse motor 23 can move the magnetic head 8 up and down, and the number of parts can be reduced. When this same-side system is used for a CD player or the like of the upper pig, as shown in FIG.
When the CD 9 is opened and the CD 2 is not mounted, the magnetic head 8 and the suspension 41a are exposed to the outside.
Unlike the optical pick 6, these will break if you touch them with your hands.
In order to avoid this, when the upper lid 389 is open, the magnetic head shutter 512 covers the upper portion of the magnetic head 8. When the CD 2 is mounted and the upper lid 389 is closed, the magnetic head shutter 512 moves in the direction of arrow 51a to expose the magnetic head 8. This operation is shown in Figure 1.
The upper pig 389 will be described with reference to the cross-sectional view of 91 (a).
As is closed in the direction of arrow 51, the lid rotation shaft 393 rotates in the direction of arrow 51d, the magnetic head shutter 512 moves in the direction of arrow 51e, and the magnetic head window 513 opens as shown in FIG. 8 can be lifted and lowered. The same applies to the cases of FIGS. 192 (a) and 192 (b). By providing the magnetic head shutter 512, it is possible to reliably prevent the magnetic head 8 and the suspension 41a, which are weak against external force, from being inadvertently broken by the operator's finger or the like.

Next, as shown in the top views of FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b), there is no problem if the traverse positions of the magnetic head 8 and the optical head 6 are separated, but the traverse movement range is designed. When it is necessary to provide the magnetic head 8,
As shown in FIG. 194 (e), the spring 51 is attached to the magnetic head unit 8.
4 is provided, the magnetic head 8 moves in the direction of the arrow 51a only when the optical head 6 reproduces the outermost optical track 65a.
By being pushed by and retracted to the outside, there is an effect that the access range of the optical head 6 can be secured. This is particularly effective when reproducing a medium such as a CD in which the magnetic recording track 67a is not provided on the optical recording surface side, because it is necessary to access the outermost optical track.

MD (Min in the cartridge 42
An embodiment in the case where the magnetic track 67 is provided on the ROM disk of (i Disk) will be described with reference to FIGS. 254 (a) to 254 (f). As shown in the top view of FIG.
Since the ROM disk cartridge 42 has only a small radial shutter window 302 on one side, when the magnetic head 8 and the optical head 6 are both provided, the same straight line 514c is provided.
Will be placed on top. Therefore, the tracking range of the optical head 6 and the position of the magnetic head overlap. The presence of the magnetic head 8 makes it difficult to access the outermost optical track 65a to the optical head 6. In the present invention, FIG.
As shown in 54 (e), the magnetic head 8 has a movable structure in the radial direction, and is pressed against the stopper 514d by a spring 514 to be fixed at a predetermined position. Therefore, FIG. 254 (f)
When the optical head 6 accesses the outermost optical track 65a as shown in FIG. 5, the magnetic head 8 is temporarily retracted from the moving area 514c of the optical head 6 in the radial or circumferential direction as shown in the magnetic head 8a. To do. In this way, even if the magnetic head 8 is arranged in one of the shutter windows 302, the optical head 6 can access the outermost optical track 65a. When the optical head 6 returns to the inner peripheral portion, the magnetic head 8 also returns to the predetermined position by the spring 514 and the stopper 514c. Further, the magnetic track 67 is provided in the outermost peripheral portion of the medium on the light reading side, with only one track having a thickness h on the surface on the light reading side. Because of this thickness, the influence on the optical recording section is minimized because it does not come into contact with the optical recording section, and the maximum capacity in one track is obtained because the outermost circumference is used. In this case, expected interference between the arrangement of the magnetic head and the optical head can be avoided by the retracting method of the present invention, so that the medium and system of the ROM disk with the magnetic recording layer can be realized while maintaining compatibility with the conventional MD disk. The effect is obtained.

Here, in describing the method of using the elevating motor of the magnetic head also as the traverse motor of the optical head, the inhibition and cancellation of the elevating and lowering of the magnetic head will be described first. FIG. 254 (a) shows a ROM medium 2 having a magnetic layer.
There is a magnetic recording layer identification hole 313a as shown in FIG. Since the cartridge of the medium having no magnetic layer does not have the identification hole 313a, as shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the magnetic head 8 from being accidentally moved up and down to damage the medium 2. Since the movable state is maintained in the optical head traveling area 514c direction, the optical head 6 can access the outermost optical track 65a. When the medium 2 having a magnetic layer is loaded, as shown in the diagram of FIG. 254 (d), since the magnetic layer identification hole 313a is provided, the magnetic head raising / lowering prohibiting means 514b is not pushed downward in the figure, so that the magnetic head 8 is raised / lowered. Is not limited. Since the lifting and lowering of the magnetic head can be prohibited and canceled by a simple mechanical component such as the magnetic head lifting prohibiting means 514b, there is an effect that an identification electric switch and an actuator for prohibiting the lifting can be omitted.

Next, a method of raising and lowering the magnetic head will be described. When the optical head 6 is located at a position other than the innermost peripheral portion, the state shown in FIG.
The magnetic head 8 is in the OFF state as shown in (c). However, as shown in FIG. 254 (e), when the optical head 6 moves to the innermost circumference, the head elevating and connecting means 51a moves in the direction of arrow 51b, and the magnetic head 8 rises in the direction of arrow 51c.
It contacts the magnetic track 67a. Thus, magnetic recording / reproduction becomes possible. When the optical head 6 returns from the innermost peripheral portion to the normal position, the magnetic head 8 is lowered and the contact with the magnetic track 67a is released, as shown in FIG. 254 (c). Now, this method is suitable for a ROM medium in which a directory or TOC is recorded in the innermost circumference such as CD and MD. This is because in the case of the present invention, magnetic recording / reproduction may be performed only twice at the beginning and the end of disk mounting.
In case of D and MD, TOC must be done once at the beginning of disc loading.
Read for a few seconds. In this embodiment, the magnetic head 8 comes into contact with the magnetic track 67a during this period to reproduce the magnetic data. Since optical reproduction of the TOC area is performed at the same time, rotation servo is also performed, and the write clock for magnetic recording can be obtained by dividing the frequency from the optical synchronization clock. In this way, the traverse motor 23 of the optical head can move the magnetic head up and down, so that the structure can be simplified. When it is necessary to rewrite the data on the magnetic track 67a at the end of the disk reproducing operation, when the optical head 6 is moved to the innermost circumference again at the end, the magnetic head 6 and the magnetic track 67a come into contact with each other. The magnetic track data stored in the cache memory 34 is
After the transfer to the magnetic track 67a, the optical head returns to its original position, the magnetic head 8 is brought into a non-contact state, and all the work is completed.

Next, when the optical head and the magnetic head are arranged on different sides of the medium, the magnetic field from the magnet may be large depending on the design of the optical head 6. FIG. 195 shows measured data of the magnetic field of the optical recording layer portion of the CD of the CDROM optical pickup made by “SANYO”. 400 gauss when there is no magnetic head, 8 when the magnetic head 8 is facing
It is 00 gauss. Therefore, if the Hc of the medium is low, the magnetically recorded data may be erased. As a countermeasure, first, the Hc is raised to 1500 Oersted as in the present invention, and when using such an optical head, the magnetic heads 8 should not be opposed to each other as much as possible. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 196 (c), the magnetic head retract link 51 is
When the optical head 6 accesses the outer optical track 65a, the magnetic head 8 moves
However, by being pushed to the outside of the recording medium 2, concentration of magnetic flux by the magnetic head 8 is avoided, and there is an effect that destruction of magnetic recording data can be prevented.

[0319] Not only the magnetic field of the DC from such an optical head 6, an alternating magnetic noise as shown in FIG. 116, the optical head 6 containing an optical head actuator, as shown in FIG. 197 L _H only By providing the magnetic head 8 at a distance or more, direct current from the optical head 6,
The effect that the interference of AC noise can be prevented is obtained. It can be seen that this L _H should be separated by at least 10 mm or more from FIG. 116 because noise of 15 dB is reduced by separating it by 10 mm or more.

Next, in the case of the 1-track system, the structure is simple, but even if the outermost track is used, the CD has a diameter of 12 cm, and since there is no cartridge, high H
Considering c and space loss, a recording capacity of only a few KB can be secured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 198 (a), when the multi-track head 8 in which the track 67a is divided into three is used, the capacity is tripled. Considering the eccentricity of the CD,
As shown in FIG. 198 (b), azimuth heads 8a, 8b, 8
By using the magnetic head 8 having three azimuth angles of c, the track density can be tripled. A non-azimuth head requires a track pitch T _P of 0.4 mm + track width, but an azimuth head has a track pitch T _P of 0.13.
It can be packed up to mm + track width. Figure 198 (c)
Azimuth head 8 with two azimuth angles as shown in (d)
Double capacity can be obtained by using a and 8b.

Next, a method of recording the media identifier in the TOC section will be described. The optical track 6 as shown in FIG. 199 (b) is added to the TOC portion of the top view of the medium of FIG. 199 (a).
5a, 65b, 65c, 65d meandering,
By wobbling and recording the signal, the TOC
New information can be recorded in the section. As shown in FIG. 200, by providing the wobbling signal demodulator 38c in the optical reproducing section, this wobbling signal can be reproduced. By this method, since information such as a media identifier can be recorded in the TOC, the media can be identified only by playing the TOC, and a new effect that a song title and a title name can also be recorded in the TOC is produced.

Although the method of raising and lowering the magnetic head by using the traverse motor 23 has been described, the head can be raised and lowered by using the loading motor 516 in the tray type CD player as shown in FIG. Figure 201
In (a), the loading motor 516 rotates, the tray moving gear 518 moves in the direction of arrow 51a, and loading of the tray 520 starts. In FIG. 201B, the tray 520 is stored and the micro switch 521 is stored.
When is pressed, the motor stops and CD playback starts.
When the media identifier is present, the motor 516 further rotates in the direction of the arrow 51g, the tray moving gear 518 further advances in the direction of the arrow 51b, and the head lifting link 503 is rotated to move the head lifter 519 as shown in FIG. 201 (c). The head 8 is pushed up in the direction of the arrow 51c to move the head 8 to the magnetic track 67.
The magnetic recording / reproduction is performed by contacting a. When the magnetic recording / reproduction is completed, the motor 516 rotates in the opposite direction, and the tray moving gear 518 moves in the direction of the arrow 51d.
The head lift 519 rises in the direction of the arrow 51e, the magnetic head 8 is released from the contact of the magnetic track 67a, and normal optical reproduction is performed. As described above, the magnetic data is stored in the memory section 34 of the IC memory, and the data is updated using the data in this memory section 34. Then, just before the tray is ejected, only the updated data is actually magnetically recorded and reproduced, and the magnetically recorded data is updated.

Then, as shown in the perspective view of FIG. 258, the magnetic head 8 is provided on the side opposite to the optical head 6 in the method of the present invention on the recording / reproducing apparatus such as the upper lid opening / closing method CD player.
An example of a system in which is attached will be shown. Figure 1 of the previous embodiment
In the method described in 31, the tracking movement direction of the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 and the opening / closing axis 521 of the upper lid are perpendicular to each other. Therefore, the facing position of the magnetic head 8 and the optical head 6 is changed by opening and closing the upper lid. There was a problem of slippage. On the other hand, in the method of FIG. 258, the moving direction of the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 by the traverse motor 23a indicated by the arrow 51 is parallel to the opening / closing shaft 521 of the upper lid 389. For this reason, even if the upper lid 389 is opened and closed, the position where the suspension 41a and one set of the magnetic head 8 and the optical head 6 face each other does not shift at all. Thus
The magnetic track on the back side of the optical track can be accessed more accurately. Since the upper lid 38a is provided with the optical sensor 386, when the upper lid is closed, the optical sensor 386 reads the optical mark on the label surface of the CD2, and only when the magnetic layer is present, the lifting motor 21 raises and lowers the head. Bowl 51
By driving 9 and lowering the magnetic head 8 to the magnetic layer, it is possible to prevent the conventional CD from being destroyed.

Next, a case where the present invention is applied to a CD player having a video CD playback function will be described. Photo C in FIGS. 180, 181, and 200 described above
The Hyb of the present invention can be applied to a D player or a video CD player.
Although the example using the Rid medium is shown, it will be described in more detail with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 259. Since the block diagram of FIG. 259 has the same basic configuration and operation as the block diagram of FIG. 181, detailed description thereof will be omitted and only different parts and parts related to the video CD will be described. The moving picture reproducing section 33b in the output section 33 has an MPEG video decoder 33e of the MPEG1 standard, which decompresses the reproduced image-compressed video signal and restores the original video moving picture image signal. And D / A converter 33f and NTSC / PA
The L encoder 33g outputs the analog TV signal of NTSC or PAL to the monitor 449. The audio is output as analog audio by using the MPEG2 level 2 by the MPEG audio decoder 33j and the D / A converter 33k.

A characteristic of the block diagram of FIG. 259 is that the menu screen-selection number table 522 in which the numbers selected for each menu screen in the playback function of the video CD are recorded is stored in the memory. Then, a part or all of the contents of the menu screen-selection number table 522 is obtained by reproducing the track 67a of the magnetic recording layer 3 of the recording medium 2 by the magnetic recording / reproducing circuit. Menu screen-selection number table 5 at the end
The changed data is recorded in the magnetic recording layer only when there is a change in the contents of 22.

This will be described from the viewpoint of the file structure using the data structure diagram of FIG. 260.
Video CD format of ROM is CD-ROM
Made according to ISO 9660 standard of XA standard, track 1 of FIG. 260 is a video CD data track 526.
The video CD index, menus, control signals, etc. are recorded. A list ID offset table 525 is included therein, and a moving image address 525a and a still image address 525b are recorded therein. Further, the playback control section 523 stores a playlist 523a showing a moving image playback procedure and a selection list 523b showing a playback procedure of the menu screen, and contains control information of the playback procedure.

An ordinary CD-ROM video CD is shown in FIG.
Since there are only 60 optical recording data, only temporary work can be performed. However, in the case of the CD-HB of the present invention, there is magnetically recorded data, and the menu screen number-selection number table 522 is recorded in this, which can be updated, so that the past menu selection number of the operator can be reproduced again. . For example, in educational software, the screen can be advanced to the last branch point learned last time. Therefore, the operator does not need to input the number again in the menu.

Next, the operation of the video CD player of the present invention will be described in terms of procedure. FIG. 261 shows a flowchart of the present invention. The reproduction of the video CD is started in step 524a, the presence or absence of magnetic data is checked in step 524b, and if No, normal reproduction is performed in step 524t and the screen is reproduced in the procedure shown in step 524u. Y
If it is es, the operator name of the magnetic data is reproduced in step 524c to display the magnetic data menu screen, and the operator's name is selected. If the magnetic data is used in step 524d, if No, normal reproduction is performed, and if Yes, step 52
4e, the magnetic data is reproduced, and the data of the menu screen number-selection number table 522 corresponding to the operator is reproduced. Next, in step 524f, reproduction is performed based on the branching procedure of the playback control area of the optical recording layer. In this case, the address of the moving image is obtained from the play list 523a and the address of the menu screen is obtained from the selection list 523b. In steps 524g and 524h, the moving image is reproduced and the Nth menu still image is output. At this time step 524
262. Menu screen as shown in FIG. 262-The Nth data 522n is read from the selection number table 522, the number corresponding to the operator, for example, the selection number N-1 is read, and the menu is automatically set as the default value in step 524p. The next screen is reproduced in step 524q. If the selection number is not recorded in step 524k, the operator is prompted to select in steps 524m and 524n.
Completion and continuation are checked in steps 524r and 524s, and if not continued, the process proceeds to step 524u, and in step 524w, asks whether to save the menu selection number, Yes.
If so, it is checked at step 524x whether or not there is change data in the table 522. If Yes, only the change of the selection number of each menu is recorded on the magnetic recording layer, and the process ends at step 524z. In this way, there is an effect that different rotation reproduction can be performed for each operator of the video CD.

The normal video CD playback procedure is shown in step 524u, but the screen is stopped at menu screens 1 and 2, and the operator has to manually input a number each time, which is troublesome in the conventional method. was there. According to the present invention, there is an effect that the operator does not need to input again once inputting. FIG. 263 (a) shows a data structure of image and sound. Further, FIG. 263 (b) shows the index number of MPEG data of one track.

Next, a method of accessing the magnetic track at a higher speed will be described. When accessing a magnetic track by searching for a specific address as shown in FIG. 264, it takes time to search for an optical address. In order to search the optical address at high speed, the subcode P shown in FIG.
One bit is recorded continuously for about one lap. Then, as shown by the optical tracks 65a and 65b in FIG. 264, when the optical head 6 moves on the track 65, P = 1 is always reproduced and can be detected. In the present invention, the magnetic track search information 5 in which, for example, Tbit of the subcode is set to 1 near one turn
27 independently of the optical address search information 526 and the optical track 65x. By providing it in 65y, the effect that the corresponding magnetic track can be searched much faster can be obtained. The magnetic address may be recorded in, for example, the subcode Ubit.

(Example 24) A disk medium according to a twenty-fourth example of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 221 shows the recording method of the disk medium in the embodiment of the present invention. In FIG. 221, 625 is a data sector and an identifier area 623.
And a data area 624. Further, the data sector 625 is divided into approximately equal angles circumferentially, but in the present embodiment, it is divided into six, and the recording track 1
The book will have 6 sectors. In this embodiment, one track has six sectors, but in the present invention,
It suffices if one track has one sector or more. 626, 62
Reference numerals 7 and 628 denote a group of tracks (hereinafter referred to as ZONE), and each ZONE has at least one recorded concentrically.
It is composed of one or more data recording tracks (not shown). FIG. 228 shows the structure of the data sectors 625 of ZONE1 to ZONE3. The data sector 625 is composed of an identifier area 623 and a data area 623. In the identifier area 623, a synchronization pattern for synchronizing the reproduction data and the clock of the apparatus and an address mark indicating the beginning of the identifier, a track number indicating which track the reproduced data is from the starting point of the track, It is composed of a sector number indicating the number of the sector currently being read from the starting point (eg, index position) of the sector, a code indicating the data length recorded in the data area, and an error detection code of the reproduction data of the identifier. ing. In the data area 624, user data 618 and error correction code 619 are recorded. In this embodiment, the error correction code 619 is described as being recorded on the disk medium, but the error correction code 619 may not be recorded. The structure of the disk medium configured as described above will be described below with reference to FIGS. 221 and 228.

In FIG. 228, (A) is ZONE
1 and (B) are ZONE 2 and (C) are ZONE 3 data sectors 625. User data is recorded in 512 bytes in ZONE1, 576 bytes in ZONE2, and 640 bytes in ZONE3. As described above, in this embodiment, the user data represented by the equation (3) is recorded in ZONEn.

ZONE (n) = 512 + 64 × (n−1) (3) The error correction code length is recorded in the same 32 bytes as each ZONE. Therefore, the number of ZONEs N is the capacity I of the identifier area, the innermost track radius r0, and the outermost track radius r.
m, linear recording density L, user data length D of the innermost track
0 (512 bytes in this embodiment), error correction code E
If the number of bytes is 1 and the outer circumference is ZONE, and M bytes (64 bytes in the case of the present embodiment) are increased, it can be obtained by the equation (4).

N = int {(rm / r0-1) (I + D0 + E) / M} +1 (4) Further, when the equation (3) is described by D0 and M, the equation (5) is obtained.

ZONE (n) = D0 + M × (n−1) (5) For example, I = 40 [Byte], D0 = 512 [Byt
e], r0 = 25 [mm], rm = 38 [mm], E =
If 32 [Byte] and M = 64 [Byte], then Z
The number of ONEs N is N = int (4.75) + 1 = 5 (6), which is 5 ZONE. In equation (4), ZON
To increase the E number N, it is sufficient to increase D0. For example, as shown in FIG. 231, one data track has one
With the structure of one sector, one sector as shown in FIG.
D compared with the structure having 6 sectors in the data track
0 can be approximately 6 times, and the ZONE number can be 26. Further, the value of M is set to 64 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 228, but if M = 32, it is easy to double the ZO.
The number of NEs can be set. From formula (4), ZO
It can be seen that the NE number N is not related to the linear recording density L.
Therefore, the ZONE number N can be freely set even for a medium having a low linear recording density L. Like this, ZON
The E number N can be freely set using D0 and M as parameters, and data can be efficiently recorded on the recording medium 600. Next, the recording / reproducing operation will be described with reference to FIG. 222. No. 222
In the figure, a disk medium 600 is a spindle motor 6
01 and the motor control circuit 602 rotate at a constant speed. First, the controller 608 determines the recording / reproducing head 60.
The actuator 606 is instructed to position 9 at the starting point of the track (for example, the innermost track). Next, the controller 608 sets the R / W clock 612 for recording data in ZONE1. Next, in synchronization with the index signal 603, the R / W timing signal 607 which instructs the R / W circuit 605 to start writing is output. The R / W circuit 605 has an R / W timing signal 607.
Is input, the recording data 611 is added with the identifier shown in FIG. 228 by the data encoder 610, encoded into a recording / reproducing code (for example, MFM, 1-7 code, 2-7 code), and recorded in the recording head 609. Output and disk media 6
Record at 00. Next, the controller 608 outputs a positioning command for the next track to the actuator 606, waits for the index signal 603, and outputs the R / W timing signal 607 to the R / W circuit to output the disk medium 60.
Record data at 0. When this operation is repeated and the recording track reaches ZONE2, the controller 608
Is a clock generator 613 for R / R compatible with ZONE2.
A command is output to generate the W clock 612. In the case of the recording configuration shown in FIG. 228, if the data capacity of the identifier area is 40 bytes, the R / W clock 612 of ZONE2 is (40 + 576 + 32) / (40 + 512 + 32) = compared with ZONE1.
The R / W clock may be 1.1096 times. Similarly, R of ZONE3
The / W clock 612 may be 1.2192 times as high as the ZONE1 clock. Like this, ZON
By setting the R / W clock 612 for each E and recording each track, a disk medium as shown in FIG. 221 can be created. Next, the reproducing procedure will be described. The controller 608 first outputs a positioning command to a track to be reproduced to the actuator 606, and the reproducing head 60
Position 9. Next, the clock generator 613 sends the R / W clock 61 corresponding to the ZONE of the track to be reproduced.
2 is set, and a timing signal 607 for reading is output to the R / W circuit. The R / W circuit 605 is the second
The reproduction data obtained from the reproduction head 609 and the R / W clock 6 according to the synchronization pattern of the identifier area 623 in FIG.
Synchronize with 12. Next, the address mark is detected, the track number, the sector number, and the recording data length are read, and the three data read by the error detection code are confirmed. Next, the data decoder 610 demodulates the digital data in the data area 624 reproduced by the R / W circuit 605 and outputs it as reproduction data 611, and decodes the record data length recorded in the identifier area 623 to decode the data area 624.
Output until the end of. When the error correction code 619 is added as shown in FIG. 228, the data decoder 610 performs error correction.

FIG. 234 is an explanatory diagram of a method of generating the error correction code 619 in the case of the data sector structure shown in FIG. 228. In FIG. 228, M in equation (5)
Is 64 bytes, and the error correction code is fixed at 32 bytes. At this time, as shown in FIG. 234, the interleave length P is fixed and the frame length is increased by M / P = 8 bytes. Further, the error correction code 619 is
Four bytes are added to one frame. Basically, M may be a positive positive number, but in the case of the embodiment shown in FIG. 234, M is preferably an integer multiple of P. Generally, a continuous error that can be corrected when 4 bytes are added to one frame is (2 × P−1) × 8 + 1 bit, where the interleave length is P. In the case of FIG. 234, since the interleave length P of each ZONE is the same, the ability to correct continuous errors on the inner and outer circumferences is the same. Since many continuous errors occur due to scratches on the medium 600, it is probabilistically that larger scratches are more likely to occur on the outer peripheral portion.

Therefore, a method for improving the continuous error correction capability in the outer peripheral portion will be described below. As shown in FIG. 229, a lot of error correction codes can be added to the outer zone ZONE to enhance the continuous error correction capability in the outer zone. FIG. 230 is an explanatory diagram of an error correction code generation method in the case of the data sector configuration shown in FIG. 229. In FIG. 230, since the interleave length P of ZONE1 of the innermost zone ZONE is 8, 121 bits of continuous error can be tolerated, and since ZONE2 has the interleave length P of 9, 137 bits of continuous error can be tolerated. Further, since ZONE3 has an interleave length of 10, it has 153 bits, and the error correction capability for continuous errors increases toward the outer periphery. The redundancy of the error correction code in the case of FIG. 230 will be described below.

ZONE1 32/512 × 100 = 6.25% ZONE2 36/576 × 100 = 6.25% ZONE3 40/640 × 100 = 6.25% As described above, ZONE (n) is equal to ZONE (n−). Compared to 1), the error correction code 619 increases by 4 bytes, but the user data 618 also increases by 64 bytes.
Redundancy does not increase. Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly reliable disk medium by improving the continuous error correction capability in the outer peripheral portion without increasing the redundancy. Further, in this case, assuming that the frame length is F, M is preferably an integral multiple of F because the configuration shown in FIG. 230 is obtained.

Further, in order to increase the number N of ZONEs in order to improve the recording efficiency, it has been described above that one track has the maximum efficiency of one data sector 625. However, if one data sector 625 is provided for one track, the unit of recording and reproduction becomes large and the amount of data differs for each track, which makes the logical handling of data troublesome. However, as shown in FIG. 232 (A), the data sector 625
If the user data recorded in (1) is divided into logical sectors, the unit of reproduction can be reproduced in the logical sectors, which facilitates logical handling. When the error correction code is generated by the same method as in FIG. 230, the error correction processing of all frames must be performed to reproduce one logical sector. For example, in order to reproduce the logical sector 1 from FIG. 232 (A), it is sufficient to reproduce only D0 to D63, but in FIG. 230 (A), the data from D0 to D63 are dispersed in each frame. There is. Since the error correction process is performed on a frame-by-frame basis, the error correction process on all the frames must be performed in order to reproduce one logical sector. If the user data are arranged in the frame direction and an error correction code is added as shown in FIG. 232 (B), the error correction of one frame is sufficient for reading one logical sector, and the process is simple. Also, at this time, the user data recorded on the medium is recorded in the interleave direction as shown in FIG. 232 (C), so that the user data is dispersed and recorded as D0, D64 ,. Will be done. Further, if the logical data length and the number of logical sectors are described as a code indicating the user data length in the identifier area, logical handling becomes easy. Further, as shown in FIG. 233, it is desirable that M be equal to the frame length F.

As described above, according to this embodiment, each ZON is
The user data capacity recorded in the data sector 625 of E is the innermost circumference ZONE as a starting point (n = 1), and the innermost circumference ZO
When the NE user data capacity is D0, D0 + M × (n−
By setting 1), data can be efficiently recorded on the disk medium 600.

In the structure of the recording / reproducing apparatus shown in FIG. 222, when the disk medium 600 shown in FIG. 221 is reproduced by the reproducing head 609, the data frequency is changed to each ZON.
It depends on E, and each frequency is proportional to the radius of the innermost track of each ZONE. Especially, the innermost track radius r
The recording / reproducing frequency changes greatly as rm / r0, which is the ratio of 0 to the outermost track radius rm, increases. For example, the R / W circuit of a magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus generally makes a reproduction signal pass through a low-pass filter for removing noise to perform differential detection. In such cases,
If the upper limit of the pass frequency of the low pass filter is set in the outer peripheral part where the frequency of the reproduced signal is maximum, the reproduced signal of the innermost track has a low frequency, so unnecessary noise will be passed by the low pass filter. Reliability deteriorates. On the contrary, if the low-pass filter is set on the innermost track, the signal component will be removed at the outermost track position. Therefore, the disk medium 6
Even if the linear recording density of the data recorded in 00 is almost constant, the reliability of the data varies depending on each ZONE. For this reason, the setting of the R / W circuit 605 is set for each ZON.
It may be possible to change it by E, but the circuit becomes complicated and the cost increases. Further, although the data reproduction is described, the reliability of the data is different between the inner circumference and the outer circumference due to the influence of the inductance of the magnetic head even when writing the data. Therefore, it is desirable that the frequency of recording / reproducing data is constant, but a recording / reproducing apparatus that realizes this will be described below.

(Embodiment 25) A twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 223 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus showing a twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention. In the figure, 600 is a disk medium, 601 is a spindle motor, 606 is an actuator, 610 is a data encoder / decoder, and the above is the same as the configuration of FIG. 222.

The difference from FIG. 222 is the controller 60.
8 outputs a speed command to the motor control circuit 614, and a clock generator 615 generates a constant clock. The operation of the recording / reproducing apparatus configured as described above will be described below.

First, the controller 608 outputs to the actuator 606 an access command to the starting point of the track (for example, the innermost zone ZONE). Then, the rotation speed command for the innermost track (ZONE) is output to the motor control circuit. Next, the write timing signal 607 is output to the R / W circuit 605 in synchronization with the index signal 603. The clock generator 615 has an R / W of a predetermined frequency.
The clock 612 is output to the R / W circuit 605. R / W
When the timing signal 607 is input, the circuit records the data input by the data encoder 610 on the disk medium 600 by the recording head 609. The controller 608 issues an instruction to access the next track to the actuator 606, moves the head 609, and repeats data recording. The recording head 609 is the next ZONE
The controller outputs a new rotation speed command to the motor control circuit 614. In the case of the data recording structure as shown in FIG. 228, the rotation speed command V of ZONE (n)
(N) may be expressed by equation (7).

V (n) = {(I + D0 + E) × V0} / {I + D0 + E + M × (n-1)} (7) V0: Innermost track ZONE rotation speed D0: Innermost track user data capacity I: Identifier area Data capacity n: ZONE number E: Error correction code length M: Increment of user data for each ZONE As described above, by providing the configuration in which the speed command can be sent to the motor control circuit 614 from the controller 608 to change the rotation speed, The frequency of the recording / reproducing signal can be kept constant, and the reliability of the data can be improved.

(Twenty-sixth Embodiment) A twenty-sixth embodiment of the present invention in which the frequency of the recording / reproducing signal can be made constant as in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 224 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus showing a twenty-sixth embodiment of the present invention. In the figure, 601 is a spindle motor, 606 is an actuator, 610 is a data encoder / decoder, and 615 is a clock generator. The above is the same as the configuration of FIG. 223. Second
The disk medium 600 shown in FIG. 24 has an optical information medium on the lower surface and a magnetic recording medium on the upper surface. Servo information for rotating the spindle motor 601 at a constant tangential velocity is recorded on the optical information medium on the lower surface (for example, a compact disc). Therefore, the optical head 616 allows the disk medium 600 to
If the servo information recorded on the lower surface of the spindle is read and the spindle motor 601 is controlled by the motor control circuit 614,
The linear velocity of the disk medium 600 at the position of the optical head 616 is constant regardless of the inner and outer circumferences of the disk. Further, since the actuator 606 drives the recording / reproducing head 609 and the optical head 616 in association with each other, even if the R / W clock 612 is constant, the 221st
Data can be recorded on the disk medium 600 by the recording method as shown. However, in this case, since the rotation speed changes for each track, one ZONE has one track configuration.

(Twenty-Seventh Embodiment) A recording / reproducing apparatus according to a twenty-seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 235 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus showing one embodiment of the twenty-seventh invention, and FIG. 236 is a detailed configuration diagram of the recording / reproducing apparatus showing one embodiment of the twenty-seventh invention.

FIG. 237 shows measured data of the amount of magnetic flux leaked from the optical head. In FIG. 235, reference numeral 901 denotes a magnetic head for recording / reproducing a signal in / from a magnetic recording area.
Reference numeral 02 denotes an optical head unit having an optical head capable of reproducing at least a signal from the optical recording area and a mechanism for magnetically controlling focusing and tracking, 982 a recording medium having a magnetic recording area and an optical recording area, and 990 A magnetic recording area in the recording medium 982 is denoted by 989.
2, an optical recording area 903, a magnetic area signal processing means 903, an optical area signal processing means 904, and a signal processing means 905. Reference numeral 920 denotes a distance from the central axis of the optical head 902 in the magnetic recording area 990 to the recording / reproducing gap position of the magnetic head 901.

In FIG. 236, 901 is a magnetic head for recording / reproducing signals in / from the magnetic recording area, and 906 is magnetic flux generated and leaking in the optical head portion. 907
Is a focusing coil for controlling the tracking of the optical head with respect to the optical recording surface, and 908 is a tracking coil.
Reference numeral 2 is an optical head, and 909 is recording / reproducing means for recording / reproducing a signal on / from a magnetic recording surface using a magnetic head.
Reference numeral 0 is a focusing control means, 911 is a tracking control means for controlling the tracking of the optical head with respect to the optical recording track, 912 is an optical signal reproduction processing means for reproducing a signal from the optical head and processing it, and 905 is a signal processing means. 913 is a magnetic recording / reproducing signal, 914 is a focusing control signal, and 915 is a tracking control signal.
Reference numeral 16 is an optical reproduction signal. The operation of the storage / playback apparatus configured as described above will be described below with reference to FIGS. 235 and 236.

As shown in FIG. 235, the optical head unit 90
When the magnetic head 901 and the magnetic head 901 are arranged close to each other, electromagnetic induction occurs between the coils provided on both sides by the magnetic flux generated from the focusing coil 907 and the tracking coil 908 shown in FIG. In FIG. 235, in order to avoid that the magnetic recording / reproducing signal is affected by this electromagnetic induction and erroneous information or normal recording performance cannot be exerted, the magnetic head is placed at a position away from the optical head by a certain distance or more than 920. It is arranged. FIG. 237 shows a measurement of the amount of magnetic flux leaking from the optical head portion. From this data, in the magnetic recording area 990, the leakage magnetic flux is about 20 gauss in the area other than the radius of 10 mm from the central axis of the optical head 902. Below, it can be seen that the magnetic head 901 can operate normally without being affected by the leakage magnetic flux.

(Embodiment 28) FIG. 238 is a block diagram showing an embodiment of the 28th invention. In FIG. 238, reference numerals 921a and 921b are lead screws which are connected or spirally grooved by an integral shaft.
923a is a gear A fixed to the lead screw
923d is a transmission gear D fixed to the rotation shaft of the feed motor 984, and the gear B of 923b and the gear C of 923c are fixed to each other, and are arranged at an intermediate position for transmitting the rotation of the transmission gear D923d to the gear A. Reference numeral 924 denotes a magnetic head carriage that changes the rotational movement of the lead screw 921b into a linear movement and moves the support member 963 to the magnetic head. A hub 925 is fixed to the spindle motor 960 to clamp and rotate the recording medium 982. With the above configuration, the optical head 902 and the magnetic head 90 are driven by the feed motor 984 both when reproducing information in the optical recording area and when reproducing information in the magnetic recording area.
4 can be moved. Optical head side lead screw 921a and magnetic head side lead screw 921
It is also possible to make the relative movement directions the same by cutting the spiral grooves of b in mutually opposite directions. As described above, the optical head 980 and the magnetic head 9 shown in the first invention are provided.
The arrangement 81 can be realized, and it is not necessary to prepare two independent feed motors as shown in FIG.

(Embodiment 29) FIG. 239 shows an embodiment of the 29th invention. 928 is a transmission gear C fixed to a feed motor 984, 926a is a feed lead screw for an optical head, and 926b is the above-mentioned. A feed gear A fixed to the optical head feed lead screw 926a, 927a a magnetic head feed lead screw, 927b a feed gear B fixed to the magnetic head feed lead screw 927a, and 940 a clutch mechanism. is there.

FIG. 240 is a detailed view of the clutch mechanism 940 in FIG. 239. 940a is a solenoid,
940b is a gear lifting mechanism, 940c is a lifting gear,
40d is an intermediate gear, 940e is a transmission intermediate gear, 94
0f is a clutch part supporting member, 940g is a lifting gear 94
It is a guide groove of 0c. The rotation of the feed motor 984 is transmitted to the feed lead screw 926a for the optical head via the transmission intermediate gear 940e, and the optical head 902 can be moved. The clutch mechanism 940 is a gear lifting mechanism 94.
0b is moved to the front so that the lifting gear 940c is moved to the shaft guide groove 9 provided in the clutch portion supporting member 940f.
Ascending along 40g, the transmission intermediate gear 940e and the intermediate gear 940d mesh with each other, and the intermediate gear 940d meshes with the magnetic head feed lead screw feed gear B927b to rotate the magnetic head feed lead screw. When the lifting mechanism 940b is pulled in by the solenoid 940a, the lifting gear 940c descends along the guide groove 940g, and at the same time, the transmission intermediate gear 940e and the intermediate gear 94.
The rotation of the feed motor is not transmitted to the magnetic head feed lead screw 927a from 0d. The clutch mechanism can be incorporated on the optical head side and both sides.

With the above structure, for example, the optical head unit is moved at high speed to reproduce information in the optical recording area, and
When trying to stop. By separating the moving means of the magnetic head connected to the same driving means, the load can be reduced and the desired high speed driving can be realized with a small driving force.

(Embodiment 30) FIG. 241 is a block diagram showing an embodiment of the thirtieth invention. In FIG. 241, 960 is a spindle motor for rotating the recording medium 982, 961 is a guide shaft arranged in parallel with the driving lead screw 983, and 962 is an optical head portion 902.
Is an optical head carriage that supports and moves the optical axis and moves along the guide axis of 961. Reference numeral 963 is a support member of the magnetic head 901, which is coupled to the link mechanism of 964 and is rotatable about a rotation axis of 965. With the above structure, the arrangement of the optical head and the magnetic head of the twenty-seventh aspect of the present invention can be realized, and it is not necessary to prepare two independent feed motors as shown in FIG.

FIG. 242 shows an embodiment of the thirty-first invention, and 966 is a magnetic head moving means corresponding to the magnetic head carriage portion. Reference numeral 968 is an optical head moving means, and 967 and 969 are drive intermittent mechanisms corresponding to the clutch mechanism. Reference numeral 970 is a head driving means corresponding to the feed motor, and 971 is a head driving means 97.
It is a drive control means for controlling 0 and the drive connection / disconnection mechanism 967 and 969. Reference numeral 972 is a magnetic head drive control signal for the drive connecting / disconnecting means 967, and reference numeral 973 is the drive connecting / disconnecting means 9.
69 is an optical head drive control signal, and 974 is a drive control signal of the head drive means 970.

(Embodiment 31) FIG. 243 is an embodiment of the thirty-first invention, and reference numeral 975 is a coupling magnet as a concrete means of the drive connecting / disconnecting mechanism. An electromagnetic clutch or ratchet mechanism can be used instead of the coupling magnet. Reference numeral 976 denotes a slide mechanism 978 and a guide mechanism 977 for guiding the movement of the optical head carriage. This guide mechanism may be the guide shaft 961 as described above.

With the above configuration, for example, the optical head unit is moved at high speed to reproduce information in the optical recording area, and
When trying to stop. By separating the moving means of the magnetic head connected to the same driving means, the load can be reduced and the desired high speed driving can be realized with a small driving force.

(Embodiment 32) A head positioning apparatus and a recording / reproducing medium according to a 32nd embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 245 is a basic block diagram of the head positioning apparatus in the 32nd embodiment of the present invention. In the figure, 1001 is an optical reproduction surface (commonly called CD or CD-ROM medium surface) for reproduction only, and 1002 is a CD-R of 1001.
Reference numeral 1003 is a magnetic recording / reproducing surface obtained by coating or adhering a magnetic film on an OM medium, 1003 is a spindle motor for rotating a removable medium, and 1004 is a CD-RO 1001.
An optical head 1005 for reading information on the M medium surface is 100
A magnetic head for recording and reproducing information on the magnetic recording and reproducing surface of 2.
Reference numeral 1006 denotes an optical reproducing means for demodulating a tracking error signal and a focus error signal for controlling the optical head from a signal read from the optical head 1004 and reproducing data information. Reference numeral 1007 records and reproduces information on the magnetic head 1005. Magnetic recording / reproducing means 1008 is an optical head control means for controlling an optical pick and a positioning means 1009 having an optical pick and a magnetic head mounted together, and the positioning means 1009 is composed of, for example, a linear DC motor. Is a positioning means 1 at a fixed position.
A scale is provided for stopping 009 or detecting a moving distance in the radial direction of the medium, and 1010 is data information reproduced by the optical reproduction means 1006, which is data recorded for each data reproduction unit. Disc position information detecting means for extracting absolute time information from the position where
Reference numeral 011 denotes an optical head operating means for sending a command to the optical head control means and a magnetic for issuing a command to the optical head control means 1008 and the positioning means 1009 when the magnetic head 1005 is controlled to access and follow the target track on the magnetic recording / reproducing surface. Head control means 1012 is an index means for detecting that the magnetic recording surface 2 has rotated once.

When the optical head reproduces information on the surface of the CD-ROM medium, the tracking error signal and the focus error signal are demodulated from the signal read from the optical head 1004 by using the optical reproducing means 1006. Then, the tracking control signal generation circuit 1080 outputs the tracking error signal to the optical head and the positioning means in the CD-RO.
It becomes a control signal for following the data information on the M medium surface. The high-frequency component of the control signal is sent to the optical head, and the low-frequency component is sent to the positioning means 1009 via a low-pass filter (commonly known as LPF) 1081, and the optical head 1004 and the positioning means 1009 cooperate to perform CD-ROM medium surface. Follow the data information of. In this way, the optical head 100
4 and the positioning means 1009 reproduce the information on the surface of the CD-ROM medium. Further, when the optical head is moved to an arbitrary place, a drive command is directly issued from the optical head operating means to the positioning means, and the positioning means moves to an arbitrary position.

FIG. 246 shows a reproduction-only optical reproduction surface (commonly called CD or CD-ROM medium surface) 1001 and 10.
1 shows a medium used in the present invention, which is composed of a magnetic recording / reproducing medium 1002 in which a magnetic film is applied or adhered to the No. 01 CD-ROM medium. Reference numeral 1021 denotes a program area in which data on the surface of a CD-ROM medium is recorded,
2 is a lead-in area in which a table of contents (commonly called TOC) of the contents of the program area is recorded, 1020 is a first track of the program area, and a portion including a track in which the absolute time of the program area is 0 second, 102
Reference numeral 3 denotes a portion on the magnetic recording / reproducing surface side indicated by 1020, which indicates the starting point of the track including the track 0 position in the recordable / reproducible track. That is, the starting point 1023 of the track is the optical reproduction surface (commonly called CD or CD-R).
Tok corresponding to the table of contents of the contents of the OM medium surface (TO
C) It will be located almost opposite to the last part of the area.

The medium having an optical reproduction surface (commonly called CD or CD-ROM medium surface) dedicated to reproduction in FIG. 246 is a medium having a diameter of 12 cm or a medium having a diameter of 8 cm. I don't care. Normal,
An optical medium for reproduction (commonly called a CD or a CD-ROM medium) has an inner peripheral side as a starting point of an optical reproduction track. Therefore, in the interchangeable medium having the optical reproducing surface and the magneto-optical recording surface for the present invention, in order to ensure the compatibility of the medium, the optical reproducing surface side is used as a reference in view of the medium-specific conditions such as eccentricity. Is desirable. Therefore, the starting point of the magnetic recording / reproducing track is preferably located on the inner circumference side of the medium as shown in FIG. 246.

Further, it is provided with an optical reproducing surface and a magneto-optical recording surface.
In order to enable the combined use of a 2 cm type medium and an 8 cm type medium which also has an optical reproducing surface and a magneto-optical recording surface, the starting point of the magnetic recording / reproducing track is as shown in FIG. 246. It is better to be located on the inner circumference side of the medium. At that time, whether the medium is a 12 cm type or 8
The type of cm is recorded on the magnetic recording surface or the optical recording surface and placed. Then, depending on whether the medium is a 12 cm type or a 8 cm type, the head positioning device reads the above information even if the number of tracks that can be magnetically recorded and reproduced and the recording capacity are different. The device itself can determine the type of medium.

Now, description will be given of a case where data is recorded / reproduced on an arbitrary target track by using the head positioning device and medium shown in FIGS. 245 and 246. When recording / reproducing data on / from an arbitrary target track, the position of the target track is first instructed to the magnetic head control means 1011. Here, the position of the target track is a track number. As shown in FIG. 246, there are N (N is a positive number) tracks at a certain track pitch from the starting point of the track including track 0 toward the outer peripheral portion of the medium as the recordable and reproducible tracks. . The magnetic head control means 1011 determines the distance from the starting point of the track in the medium radial direction of the commanded target track,
It is calculated from a known track pitch and the position of the starting point of the track, and converted into an absolute time from the data start position recorded on the surface of the CD-ROM medium. Of course, when calculating this time, the tangential velocity at the time of reproduction on the optical reproduction surface side is measured from the data read interval and used for the above absolute time calculation. Then, the magnetic head control means 1011 compares the current known position of the optical head, that is, the absolute time from the data start position with the target absolute time of the recordable / reproducible track, and determines the medium diameter according to the difference. The distance in the direction is calculated and a command is sent to the positioning means 1009. With the above operation, the magnetic head is made to access the target track position.

Usually, the optical read-only medium (commonly called CD or CD-ROM) has a range of read-out speed (tangential speed) for reproduction set on the medium. That is, since the tangential velocity ranges from 1.2 m / S to 1.4 m / S, if the access is performed by simply using the absolute time from the time 0 seconds of the light reproducing surface, the track pitch may have an error for each medium. Will occur. For example, assuming a case of moving 1 mm at a place with an inner diameter of 50 mm, moving 1 mm for a 1.2 m / S medium is about 83 seconds in terms of time, and about 71 seconds for a 1.4 m / S medium. If access is made for the same time, a positioning error of about hundred and several tens of μm will occur. Therefore, as described above with reference to FIG. 245, when accessing the target track on the magnetic surface, at least once when the medium is mounted, the tangential velocity at the time of data reproduction on the optical reproduction side is measured from the interval at which data is read. The head positioning device must recognize the conversion factor of distance and time.

If the tangential velocity at the time of reproduction on the optical surface side is measured, the track pitch and the number of tracks on the magnetic surface are predetermined. Therefore, the absolute time table corresponding to each track is used to measure the tangential velocity. It may be provided in advance corresponding to, or may be created by conversion calculation at that time. Of course, this is not necessary if the positioning means for driving the optical head and the positioning means for driving the magnetic head are different. When the positioning unit 1009 is a linear DC motor or the like and has a scale for detecting the position in the medium radial direction, the magnetic head may be made to access approximately the target track using the distance information to be moved.

Next, when controlling the magnetic head to follow the target track, the magnetic head control means 1011 uses the kick command circuit 1082 to control the magnetic head so that the magnetic head generally follows the target track. That is, when the magnetic head control means 1011 confirms that the magnetic head has reached the target track by the absolute time information obtained from the optical head, the magnetic head control means 1011 sets the optical head to follow the data on the CD-ROM medium surface. In addition, a command is issued once per track of the medium to move backward by one track pitch at the index position. As a result, since the magnetic head is mounted on the positioning means 1009 together with the optical head, the optical head jumps in the direction of one track at the index position each time the medium makes one revolution near the absolute time corresponding to the target track position. Then, the magnetic head also remains within the target track with an accuracy of 1.6 μm. In this case, it is necessary to set the track pitch of the magnetic tracks to such an extent that the off-track of about 1.6 μm does not have a great influence.
However, in general, if the track pitch is 20 to 30 μm or more, the off-track 1.6 μm is in a permissible range, and the track pitch on the light reproducing surface side is 1.6 μm ± 0.1 μm, which is highly accurate. Even if the pitch is 20 to 30 μm, the track density is about 10 times that of a 5 inch flexible disk, and a recording capacity of about 10 MB can be secured with a 12 cm disk, so personal data is added in addition to data on the optical playback surface. It is considered that the data recording capacity is sufficient to be used for the purpose of performing correction or modifying the data on the optical reproducing surface.

Of course, if the track pitch on the magnetic recording / reproducing surface side is wide enough to allow medium eccentricity of about several hundreds of μm or more, the optical head 1
It is not necessary to stop the servo operation such as tracking and focus of 004 and make a track jump in the direction of one track every time the medium makes one revolution in the vicinity of the absolute time corresponding to the target track position. Further, when performing the magnetic recording / reproducing operation, it is considered that the servo operation of the optical head is stopped so that the electromagnetic noise of the optical head is eliminated and the signal quality in the magnetic recording / reproducing is easily secured.

(Embodiment 33) Next, a head positioning apparatus and a recording / reproducing medium according to a 33rd embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 248 is a basic block diagram of the head positioning device in the 33rd embodiment of the present invention. Second
A block having the same number as in FIG. 45 has the same function as in FIG. 245. The difference from FIG. 245 is that the magnetic head 100
5 is not at the target position with respect to the medium of the optical head 1004, but at the target position on the magnetic recording / reproducing surface side and with the spindle motor as the axis. This is because when the magnetic head 1005 performs a recording / reproducing operation, the optical head 1004
The purpose is to avoid the effect of the magnetic field generated by.

Also in FIG. 248, the starting point of the track including the track 0 on the magnetic recording / reproducing surface is the position of the track including the absolute time of 0 seconds in the program area, as in the 32nd embodiment, and the other medium. It is located on the surface side (magnetic recording / reproducing surface). A case where data is recorded / reproduced on an arbitrary target track in the head positioning device and medium in the case of FIG. 248 will be described. When the magnetic head 1005 is not arranged to face the optical head 1004 as shown in FIG. 248, first, the optical head 1004 is positioned in the program area at a position including an absolute time of 0 second,
The position information at that time is recorded using a scale for detecting the position in the medium radial direction prepared in the positioning means 1009.

Since the amount of positional deviation between the magnetic head 1005 and the optical head 1004 in the medium radial direction is known in advance, how much the positioning means 1009 should be moved after the above operation to cause the magnetic head 1005 to start from the start point of the track including track 0. It is known whether to move to the position of. Next, the magnetic head 10
When 05 is located at the starting point of the track, in order to move the magnetic head 1005 to the m-th track, the distance (position) at which the magnetic head should be moved in the radial direction of the medium using the track pitch known in advance. ) Is calculated. Next, the tangential velocity at the time of reproduction on the optical reproduction surface side is measured from the data reading interval and used for distance and time conversion calculation. Then, using the absolute time from the data start position recorded on the surface of the CD-ROM medium for the distance to be moved in the radial direction, a target for moving the optical head in the original direction (inner circumferential direction) is set. You can convert it to absolute time. As a result, the positioning means can position the magnetic head with respect to an arbitrary target track with the absolute time on the CD-ROM medium as a mark. Of course,
It goes without saying that the location information described in the scale above is used for approximate access to the target track.

The above procedure will be described with reference to FIG. 248. When data is recorded / reproduced on / from an arbitrary target track, the position of the target track is first instructed to the magnetic head control means 1011. Here, the position of the target track is a track number. As shown in FIG. 246, there are N (N is a positive number) tracks at a certain track pitch from the starting point of the track including track 0 toward the outer peripheral portion of the medium as the recordable and reproducible tracks. . The magnetic head control means 1011 determines the distance from the starting point of the track in the medium radial direction of the commanded target track,
It is calculated from a known track pitch and the position of the starting point of the track, and converted into an absolute time from the data start position recorded on the surface of the CD-ROM medium. Then, the magnetic head control means 11 compares the current known position of the optical head, that is, the absolute time from the data start position with the target absolute time, calculates the distance in the medium radial direction according to the difference, and performs positioning. Send a command to the means 9. In the case of FIG. 248,
It goes without saying that the positioning means 1009 accesses in the direction opposite to that in FIG. 245.

Further, the positioning means 1009 is a linear DC
In the case of a motor or the like, the magnetic head is made to access an approximate target track by utilizing the position information of the starting point of the track, which is recorded using a separately prepared scale in the medium radial direction.

Next, also in the case where the magnetic head is controlled to follow the target track, the magnetic head control means 1011 causes the kick command circuit 1082 as in the case of FIG. 245.
Is used to control the magnetic head so that it follows the target track. That is, the magnetic head control means 10
When confirming that the magnetic head has reached the target track by the absolute time information obtained from the optical head, 11 sets the optical head in a state of controlling to follow the data on the surface of the CD-ROM medium, Issue a command to move backward one track pitch at an index position. The magnetic head is mounted on the positioning means 1009 together with the optical head. Therefore, when the optical head makes a track jump in the direction of one track at the index position each time the medium makes one revolution in the vicinity of the absolute time corresponding to the target track position,
The magnetic head remains within the target track with an accuracy of 1.6 μm.

Similarly to the case of FIG. 245, when the track pitch on the magnetic recording / reproducing surface side is wide enough to allow medium eccentricity of ± several hundred μm or more, the optical head 1004 is used. Servo operations such as tracking and focusing may be stopped.

(Embodiment 34) FIG. 249 is a basic block diagram of a head positioning apparatus according to the 34th embodiment of the present invention. The block with the same number as in FIG. 245 is shown in FIG.
It has the same function as the figure. The difference from FIG. 245 is that
The optical head 1004 becomes an optical head 1014 having a drive mechanism capable of finely moving the objective lens in the radial direction of the medium, and detects the drive current of the drive circuit 1015 of the drive mechanism that drives the objective lens in the radial direction of the medium. The point is that a magnetic head positioning control means 1013 is provided to settle the position of the objective lens near the center of the drive range by finely moving the positioning means 1009. Also in FIG. 249, the starting point of the track including the track 0 on the magnetic recording / reproducing surface is the position of the track including the absolute time of 0 seconds in the program area as in the 32nd embodiment, and the other medium surface side ( It is located on the magnetic recording / playback surface).

FIG. 250-1 shows details of the objective lens of the optical head 1014 and the support mechanism portion of the drive mechanism when the objective lens is located near the center of the drive range. -2 shows the details of the optical head when the objective lens is located off the center of the drive range. 250-1 and 250-2
In the figure, 1040 is a housing of an optical head, 104
1 is a semiconductor laser, 1042 is an objective lens, 1043,
Reference numeral 1044 denotes a support mechanism when the objective lens is located near the center of the drive range, and 1045 and 1046 are support mechanisms when the objective lens is located off the center.

Here, FIG. 249 and FIGS.
In the head positioning device shown in the figure, a case where data is recorded / reproduced on an arbitrary target track will be described. When recording / reproducing data to / from an arbitrary target track, the position of the target track is first instructed to the magnetic head positioning control means 1013. Here, the position of the target track is a track number. As shown in FIG. 246, there are N (N is a positive number) tracks at a certain track pitch from the starting point of the track including track 0 toward the outer peripheral portion of the medium as the recordable and reproducible tracks. . Magnetic head positioning control means 1013
Is the distance from the starting point of the track in the medium radial direction of the commanded target track calculated from the track pitch and the position of the starting point of the track, which is calculated from the data start position recorded on the CD-ROM medium surface. Convert to absolute time. Of course, the tangential velocity at the time of reproduction on the optical reproduction surface side is measured from the data read interval and used for conversion calculation of distance and time. Then, the magnetic head positioning control means 1013
Is the current known position of the optical head, that is, the absolute time from the data start position is compared with the absolute time of the target recordable and reproducible track, and the distance in the medium radial direction is calculated according to the difference, A command is sent to the positioning means 1009. With the above operation, the magnetic head is made to access the target track position. When the positioning means 1009 is a linear DC motor or the like and has a scale for detecting the position in the medium radial direction, the magnetic head may be made to access approximately the target track using the distance information to be moved.

Here, in the case of an optical head having a drive mechanism capable of finely moving the objective lens in the radial direction of the medium, even if the objective lens 1042 reaches the target track, the position of the positioning means 1009 in the radial direction of the medium. Have the problem that they are not always located in the same position. It is because the access operation uses the absolute time written on the CD-ROM surface to access the positioning means, that is,
This is because the objective lens searches and accesses the absolute time of the CD-ROM surface, and therefore the position where the objective lens is positioned and the position where the positioning means 1009 is positioned are not necessarily uniquely determined. The positioning means 1009 connected to the housing 1040 of the optical head is used when the objective lens is positioned as shown in FIG. 250-1 and when the objective lens is positioned as shown in FIG. 250-2. It is also clear from the fact that the position of the magnetic head 1005 cannot be uniquely determined because the position in the medium radial direction is different. As a result, a positioning error of the magnetic head on the information track on the magnetic surface side occurs and an error occurs. Normally, the driving range of the objective lens 1042 is about ± 0.5 mm, so that a positioning error of up to 1 mm occurs.

(Thirty-Fifth Embodiment) In the thirty-fifth embodiment, in order to solve the above problems, the drive current of the drive circuit 1015 of the drive mechanism for driving the objective lens in the radial direction of the medium is detected to finely position the positioning means 1009. A magnetic head positioning control means 1013 is provided to set the position of the objective lens near the center of the driving range by moving it. The operation will be briefly described. After the optical head is accessed to the target position, the magnetic head positioning control means 1013 causes the drive circuit 1 to operate.
The drive current in the medium diameter direction of the objective lens 015 is measured using a means such as an A / D converter. If the state in which the optical head is initially positioned is the state shown in FIG. 250-2, the objective lens is displaced from the center of the drive range, so that the drive circuit 1015 is dependent on the spring constant of the objective lens support mechanism. The necessary current to generate the force is flowing. Therefore, the magnetic head positioning control means 1013 sends a fine movement command to the positioning means 1009 so that the current of the drive circuit 1015 drops near zero. The magnetic head positioning means 1013 can move the objective lens to the position shown in FIG. 250-1 by moving the positioning means 1009. This is the 249th
As shown in the figure, the positioning means 1009 and the optical head 10
This is because the optical head control system is configured together with 14 As a result, the magnetic head 1005 directly connected to the positioning means 1009 is always positioned at the same position as the position where the objective lens is positioned. This operation can solve the above-mentioned problem, that is, the position where the objective lens is positioned and the position where the magnetic head is positioned are not the same.

Next, when controlling the magnetic head to follow the target track, the magnetic head positioning control means 101 is used.
3 uses the kick command circuit 1082 to control the magnetic head so that the magnetic head generally follows the target track. That is, when the magnetic head positioning control means 1013 confirms that the magnetic head has reached the target track by the above operation and the re-read absolute time information obtained from the optical head, the magnetic head position control means 1013 detects the data on the CD-ROM medium surface data. A command is issued to make the state of follow-up control in accordance with the above, and to return by one track pitch at the index position once per revolution of the medium. As a result, the magnetic head and the optical head together with the positioning means 1009.
Therefore, when the optical head makes a track jump in the direction of one track at the index position each time the medium makes one revolution in the vicinity of the absolute time corresponding to the target track position, the magnetic head also has an accuracy of 1.6 μm. You are staying within the target track.

As described above, even if the optical head is an optical head having a drive mechanism capable of finely moving the objective lens in the radial direction of the medium, the magnetic head can be positioned on the magnetic recording surface side with sufficient accuracy. Therefore, as described in the thirty-second embodiment, a recording capacity of about 10 MB can be secured with a 12 cm disc. Therefore, in addition to the data on the optical reproduction surface, personal data is added, or the data on the optical reproduction surface is added. It is possible to secure a sufficient data recording capacity for applications such as making modifications.

Of course, as in the case of FIG. 245, when the track pitch on the magnetic recording / reproducing surface side is wide enough to allow medium eccentricity of about ± 100 μm, the servo operation of the optical head 1004 is stopped. However, it is not necessary for the optical head to make a track jump in the direction of one track each time the medium makes one revolution in the vicinity of the absolute time corresponding to the target track position. Further, when performing the magnetic recording / reproducing operation, it is considered that the servo operation of the optical head is stopped so that the electromagnetic noise of the optical head is eliminated and the signal quality in the magnetic recording / reproducing is easily secured.

FIG. 251 is a basic block diagram of the head positioning apparatus according to the 35th embodiment of the present invention. Blocks having the same numbers as in FIG. 249 have the same functions as in FIG. 249. The difference from FIG. 249 is that the magnetic head 10
51 is offset from the position facing the optical head 1014 in the radial direction of the medium. The offset distance is about 10 mm at maximum, and depends on the strength of the leakage magnetic field of the optical head. The purpose of this is the optical head 10.
Since 14 is composed of a magnetic circuit including a magnet and the like, due to a leakage magnetic field generated from the optical head 1014 and electromagnetic noise generated during servo operation of the optical head 1014,
This is to prevent deterioration of signal quality in magnetic recording and reproduction.

The medium at this time is, as shown in FIG.
The starting point of the track including track 0 on the magnetic recording / reproducing surface is
It is at the position of the program area 1021 on the optical reproducing surface, and is on the magnetic recording / reproducing surface side. That is, the starting point of the track is located on the magnetic recording / reproducing surface side at a position offset by a maximum of about 10 mm from the lead-in area (commonly called TOC) of the optical reproducing surface to the outer peripheral side.

A case where the magnetic head 1051 is made to access a target track on the magnetic recording / reproducing surface using the medium shown in FIG. 247 and the head positioning device shown in FIG. 251 will be described. When the magnetic head 1051 is accessed, the absolute time information written on the light reproducing surface side is used, and the objective lens is repositioned substantially at the center of the driving range of the objective lens to complete the access of the magnetic head 1051. The points are the same as in FIG. 249. The different point is that when the moving distance to the target track when the magnetic head is made to access the target track is obtained,
In the example shown in the figure, it suffices to convert the distance to the target track in the medium radial direction into absolute time and send a command to the positioning means. However, in the case of FIG. 251, since the magnetic head 1051 is offset to the outer peripheral side from the optical head, it corresponds to the time difference on the light reproducing surface corresponding to the moving distance of the magnetic head 1051 and the moving distance of the optical head. Since the time lags are different, it is necessary to convert the distance at the optical head position corresponding to the distance the magnetic head should move to the time lag for the optical head on the inner circumference side. That is, the magnetic head 105
When 1 has to move 1 mm, the current position of the optical head is 1 mm so that it can be moved 1 mm on the optical head position side.
It is possible to cause the magnetic head 1051 to access the target track by sending a command to the positioning means by obtaining the absolute time difference from the previous position.

Next, in order to control the magnetic head to follow the target track, the track jump is used to position the magnetic head within the target track with an accuracy of 1.6 μm as shown in FIG. 249. Alternatively, if the magnetic tracks have a wide track pitch of ± several hundred μm or more, the servo operation of the optical head 1014 may be stopped.

With the medium shown in FIG. 247 and the head positioning device shown in FIG. 251, the recording / reproducing operation can be performed on an arbitrary track on the magnetic surface by eliminating the influence of the leakage magnetic field and electromagnetic noise of the optical head.

(Embodiment 36) A head positioning apparatus and a recording / reproducing medium according to a 36th embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 252 is a basic block diagram of the head positioning device in the 36th embodiment of the present invention. 1 in the figure
001 is an optical reproduction surface (commonly called CD or C) for reproduction only.
D-ROM medium surface), 1002 is a CD-RO of 1001
M is a magnetic recording / reproducing surface in which a magnetic film is applied or adhered to a medium, 1003 is a spindle motor for rotating a removable medium, and 1004 is a CD-ROM 1001.
An optical head 1005 for reading information on the medium surface is denoted by 1002.
Magnetic head for recording / reproducing information on / from the magnetic recording / reproducing surface of
Reference numeral 033 denotes a signal processing means for demodulating a tracking error signal and a focus error signal for controlling the optical head from a signal read from the optical head 1004 and reproducing data information. Reference numeral 1034 denotes an optical pick and an optical pick and a magnetic head. Head positioning control means for controlling the positioning means 1009 also mounted. When the positioning means 1009 is composed of, for example, a linear DC motor or the like, it is provided with a scale for stopping the positioning means 1009 at a certain fixed position or detecting the moving distance in the medium radial direction. Reference numeral 1012 denotes indexing means for detecting that the magnetic recording surface 2 has made one rotation. 10
Reference numeral 31 is an R / W means for applying a current for recording / reproducing information to / from the magnetic head 1005 and amplifying a reproduction signal from the magnetic head, and 1032 is a magnetic reproduction signal reproduced by the R / W means. Is made up of a phase-locked loop (commonly called a PLL circuit) for binarizing and synchronizing. 1035 is a spindle motor 100
3 is a motor control means for performing rotation control.

Now, description will be made regarding the case where the recording / reproducing apparatus shown in FIG. 245 is used to record / reproduce data on an arbitrary target track on the magnetic surface. When recording / reproducing data to / from an arbitrary target track, the position of the target track is first instructed to the head positioning control means 1034. Here, the position of the target track is a track number. There are N (N is a positive number) number of recordable and reproducible tracks at a fixed track pitch from the track start point toward the outer periphery of the medium. The head positioning control means 1034 calculates the distance from the track starting point of the commanded target track in the medium radial direction from the track pitch and the track starting point position which are known in advance, and records it on the CD-ROM medium surface. The head positioning control means 10 is converted into an absolute time from a certain data start position.
Reference numeral 34 compares the current known position of the optical head, that is, the absolute time from the data start position with the target absolute time of the recordable / reproducible track, and calculates the distance in the medium radial direction according to the difference. , Sends a command to the positioning means 1009. With the above operation, the magnetic head 1005 is made to access the target track position.

Next, when recording arbitrary data on a target track, in the case of magnetic recording, generally, arbitrary data is written with a reference signal using a crystal or the like as a synchronizing signal. At this time, a hall element or a frequency generator (commonly called FG) is used to control the rotation of the spindle motor 1.
Rotation control information is obtained by obtaining several to several tens of pulses for rotation. However, ordinary optical read-only media (commonly called CD
Alternatively, the spindle motor of the apparatus for reproducing the CD-ROM medium does not perform the rotation control. In the case of the optical reproduction-only medium, the rotation control is performed so that the tangential velocity between the optical head and the medium is constant, so that the signal processing means 1033 extracts the control information for the rotation control from the optical reproduction signal, and 1037 This is because the frequency divider creates synchronization information corresponding to rotation and controls rotation. Therefore, also in the present recording / reproducing apparatus, the rotation control extracts the control information for the rotation control from the optical reproduction signal and controls the rotation as in the conventional optical reproduction-only medium, and at the time of the recording operation of the magnetic head,
It is preferable that a reference signal for writing magnetic data is used as a reference signal based on a synchronization signal generated from the optical reproduction signal by using a frequency divider 1037. This method can be realized in that the strong magnetization is generated in the magnetic head at the writing stage of the magnetic head, and thus the focusing and tracking operations of the optical head 1004 do not have to be stopped. result,
It is possible to prevent the rotation jitter due to the eccentric rotation caused by the gap between the medium and the motor rotation shaft, which occurs when the medium for optical reproduction is mounted on the spindle motor. Further, it is not necessary to attach the frequency generator or the like to the spindle motor, which is advantageous from the viewpoint of cost.

Next, when reproducing arbitrary data from the target track, usually, a reproduction signal is synchronized by using a phase locked loop circuit or the like by using a crystal or the like matching the frequency of the reproduction signal. To extract. At this time, in the rotation control of the spindle motor, in order to prevent a reproduction error due to rotation jitter, etc., the rotation control of the spindle motor is performed using a hall element or a frequency generator.
However, in the recording stage of the present recording / reproducing apparatus, the Hall element of the spindle motor and the rotation control by the frequency generator are not performed for the above-mentioned reason, and in the signal reading stage of the magnetic head, the disturbance magnetization, that is, the electromagnetic Since the noise is generated in the optical head, it is difficult to use the rotation control method used in the writing step for the reason that the focus and tracking operations of the optical head 1004 must be stopped.

Therefore, the present invention proposes a device for accurately controlling the rotation of the spindle motor without extracting the rotation information necessary for the rotation control from the frequency generator or the optical reproduction signal even when reproducing the data of the magnetic track. It is a thing.

Normally, when a recording system including a clock component in a modulation code for magnetic recording is adopted, clock information can be extracted from a magnetic reproduction signal. For example, when the FM recording method, the MFM recording method, the 2-7 recording method, or the like is used, the clock information can be directly extracted from the binarized information in the FM recording method, and the MFM recording or the 2-7 recording method can be used. If there is, the clock information can be extracted by inputting the binarized reproduction signal to the phase-locked loop circuit. Then, based on this clock information, the reference clock information for reproducing a predetermined magnetic track is compared with the clock information from the reproduction data, and error information is obtained to enable rotation control of the spindle motor. .

Describing in detail with reference to FIG. 252, immediately after the magnetic head is positioned on the target track on the magnetic surface, the optical pick is still operating. Therefore, the rotation of the medium is controlled by using the information from the optical reproducing surface. Has been done. Next, when reading information from the magnetic track, the focus and tracking operations of the optical head 1004 are stopped, and the switch means 1036 is switched to provide clock information as rotation information obtained from the reproduction signal of the magnetic track to the motor control means 1035. Communicate to. Motor control means 1035
Compares the reference clock information corresponding to the number of revolutions with the clock information as the rotation information obtained from the reproduction signal of the magnetic track, and feeds back the error information to the spindle motor for rotation control.

The information written on the magnetic track is F
In the case of the M recording method, a value obtained by charging a capacitor with a constant current based on a cycle of clock information obtained from a reproduction signal of a magnetic track is compared with a reference voltage corresponding to a predetermined rotation speed instead of the reference clock information. By doing so, it is possible to obtain the rotation speed error and control the rotation.

By the above method, a write reference signal at the time of recording on a magnetic track and a rotation control method at the time of reproducing the magnetic track are provided for a medium having a magnetic recording / reproducing surface on the surface opposite to the optical reproducing surface. It is possible to provide.

[0402]

As described above, by providing the magnetic recording layer 3 on the back side of the recording medium 2 having an optical recording surface, a magnetic field modulation type light is used in a RAM type recording / reproducing apparatus like magneto-optical recording. By sharing the magnetic field head between the magnetic field modulations of the recording / reproducing apparatus for magnetic recording, it is possible to perform magnetic recording of information of independent channels provided on the recording medium with almost no increase in the number of parts and cost. In this case, since the slider tracking mechanism for the magnetic head is originally provided, there is almost no increase in cost on the recording / reproducing device side. Therefore, there is an effect that a magnetic recording / reproducing function independent of optical recording can be added at substantially the same price.

Further, the recorded recording medium is used as a music CD.
, HD, game CDROM or MDROM, and a magnetic recording track provided on the back side is reproduced by the ROM-type recording / reproducing apparatus 1 shown in the block diagram of FIG. It is possible to obtain a remarkable effect such as returning to. Even when recording is limited to only one track in the TOC area as described in the first embodiment, when the gap width is 200 μm, several hundred bits are used.
You can record. This capacity meets the requirements required for the use of the current game IC-ROM with a flash memory. TO
In the case of limiting to C, the access means of the magnetic track is not required, and the system becomes simple.

In a read-only recording / reproducing apparatus for optical recording, it is necessary to provide a magnetic head portion or the like on the opposite side of the recording medium facing the optical head. Since it can be shared with the magnetic field modulation head, the price can be reduced due to the effect of mass production. Originally, the cost is much lower than that of the magnetic recording component for low density, which is an optical recording component, so that the price increase is small. No tracking mechanism is added because the optical head and the magnetic head on the opposite side are mechanically linked. Therefore, the cost does not increase.

Tracking of the optical head is performed by the address information or time information engraved on the optical recording layer on the surface of the RAM type or ROM type recording medium, so that the tracking accuracy is not high, but on the disc. The magnetic head can be tracking-controlled at an arbitrary position. As a result, for consumer applications such as linear sensors and linear actuators found in floppy disks, it is possible to obtain the effect that no expensive parts need to be added.

The protective layer on the back surface of the conventional magnetic field modulation type magneto-optical recording medium is manufactured by spin coating from a binder and a lubricant. In the case of the present invention, a magnetic material is added to this material and spin coating is performed in this same step, and the number of manufacturing steps does not often increase. This increase in cost is of a negligible order from the overall cost perspective. Therefore, the new value of the magnetic recording function is added with almost no increase in cost. As described above, according to the present invention, the magnetic channel can be added with almost no increase in cost, so that the RAM function can be added to the conventional ROM type optical disk or ROM dedicated player.

The present invention specifically realizes a consumer-use partial RAM disk for a ROM disk without a cartridge such as a CDROM and a ROM disk with a cartridge such as an MDROM. R without cartridge
In the case of an OM disk, the conventional method in which a magnetic recording layer is simply provided on the back surface cannot be used for consumer use as described above. This is because the usage environment is wide-ranging for consumer use. At home, it is affected by magnets, dirt, scratches, etc. Under worst conditions, if the magnetic recording layer is exposed like a floppy disk, the recorded information is easily destroyed. In the present invention, the Hc of the medium is increased to 1200 Oe or more, and the magnetic field of the magnet is taken as a measure to ensure reliability. Further, a hard protective layer having a Mohs hardness of 5 or more is provided on the magnetic recording layer to prevent scratches on the nails and the like. Contamination measures are taken by using a water-repellent material for the media as a protective layer or by providing a cleaning mechanism in the system.

When such a medium is used, it is naturally necessary to make the system configuration and function compatible with this special medium. Generally, a magnetic disk such as a floppy disk or a hard disk causes a space loss on the order of several hundred angstroms. On the other hand, in the present invention, since the protective film or the printing layer is located above the magnetic recording layer, the space loss becomes an order of magnitude of 1 μm or more as compared with the magnetic recording of a normal magnetic disk. In order to record this, the present invention first adopts a configuration in which the head gap of the magnetic head is expanded to 5 μm or more. As a result, there is an effect that the above-mentioned medium of the present invention having strong environment resistance can be reproduced. Also, in order to reduce the cost, C on the optical track
In the case of D, the address information called the subcode recorded in 75 times per second is used to access the optical head to a specific optical track, and the specific magnetic track is tracked by the magnetic head that moves in conjunction with the optical head. Is going. In this case, the magnetic head and the optical head can be moved by also using one actuator. This has the effect of significantly reducing the cost.

Since the magnetic noise jumping from the actuator section of the optical head to the magnetic head is 40 dB or more, the level of the mixed noise is reduced by shielding the optical head or separating the magnetic head and the optical head. . Further, since a liquid lubrication layer cannot be provided on the medium, the magnetic head is heavily worn. Therefore, the information of the magnetic recording layer is temporarily stored in the internal memory, the content of the internal memory is rewritten during information processing to reduce the number of times of recording / reproducing of the magnetic head, and the magnetic head and the magnetic head are not operated during the period other than recording / reproducing of magnetic information. The number of passes of the magnetic head is substantially reduced by separating from the disk surface. Therefore, there is an effect that the life of the medium and the head is significantly extended.
Also, in order to speed up the start-up when inserting the disc,
"Variable track pitch mode" is provided. This forms a magnetic track just behind the optical track in the order of the optical track accessed by the optical head at the time of rising. Then, when rising, these magnetic tracks are sequentially accessed by the optical tracks and the magnetic heads are automatically accessed. If the magnetic recording data required at the time of rising is recorded in these magnetic tracks, the information on the magnetic track required at the time of rising can be reproduced without accessing the magnetic tracks excessively. This has the effect of eliminating loss time and accelerating the start-up. In addition, when there is magnetic track information for each song, there is an effect that personal data for each song can be accessed faster, for example, when karaoke.
Further, unlike the ordinary floppy, it is not necessary to provide the head portion of the data of each track on a specific angle, and the synchronization area can be arranged at random, so that the rotation angle detection becomes unnecessary and the cost of the device is reduced.

In a disk with a cartridge such as an MDROM, a magnetic material having a low Hc, which is usually used in floppies, can be used for the magnetic recording layer, and the space loss due to the protective layer does not increase. But,
Since it is not originally considered to attach a liner to the cartridge, if a liner is provided, the torque of the drive motor used so far is weak and does not rotate normally due to friction torque generation. Therefore, in the present invention, the liner is temporarily brought into contact with the medium surface only during magnetic recording. This partial liner method has an effect of preventing the influence of dust. Further, the configuration in which the magneto-optical magnetic field modulation head is also used as the magnetic head has an effect of reducing the number of parts. As described above, according to the present invention, C
It is possible to realize a medium having a magnetic recording portion on the back side of the optical recording surface and a recording / reproducing device while satisfying the standards such as D while ensuring reliability in a usage environment for consumer use, and at a cost for consumer use.

[Brief description of drawings]

FIG. 1 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus according to a first embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of an optical recording head unit according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of a head portion according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of a head portion in a tracking direction according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of a magnetic head unit according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 6 is a timing chart of magnetic recording in the first embodiment.

FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the recording medium according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view of the recording medium according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the recording medium according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 10 is a sectional view of a recording unit in the first embodiment.

FIG. 11 is a sectional view of a recording unit in the first embodiment.

FIG. 12 is a sectional view of a recording unit in the first embodiment.

FIG. 13 is a sectional view of a recording unit in the first embodiment.

FIG. 14 is a sectional view of a recording unit in the first embodiment.

FIG. 15 is a perspective view of the cassette according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 16 is a perspective view of a recording / reproducing apparatus according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 17 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the game machine according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram of a magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus according to a second embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 20 is an enlarged view of a magnetic head unit according to the second embodiment.

FIG. 21 is an enlarged view of a magnetic head unit according to the second embodiment.

FIG. 22 is an enlarged view of a magnetic head unit according to the second embodiment.

FIG. 23 is an enlarged view of a recording unit according to the third embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 24 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 25 is an enlarged view of the magnetic recording portion in the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 26 is an enlarged view of a magneto-optical recording unit in the same Example 4.

FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of the recording unit in the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart in the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 30 (a) is a sectional view when the magneto-optical disk of the fourth embodiment is mounted, and (b) is a sectional view of the fourth embodiment when a CD is mounted.

FIG. 31 is an enlarged view of the magneto-optical recording unit of the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 32 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 5 of the present invention.

FIG. 33 is an enlarged view of the magnetic recording unit in the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 34 is an enlarged view of the magneto-optical recording unit in the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 35 is an enlarged view of a magneto-optical recording unit in the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 36 is an enlarged view of a magnetic recording unit in the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 37 is an enlarged view of a magneto-optical recording unit in the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 6 of the present invention.

FIG. 39 is a block diagram of a magnetic recording unit in the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 40 is an enlarged view of the magnetic field modulator in the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 41 is a top view of the magnetic recording portion according to the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 42 is a top view of the magnetic recording portion according to the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 43 is an enlarged view of the magnetic recording unit in the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 44 is an enlarged view of the magnetic field modulator in the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 45 (a) is a top view of a disc cassette according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a top view of a disc cassette according to the seventh embodiment.

46A is a top view of the disc cassette according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 46B is a top view of the disc cassette according to the seventh embodiment.

47A is a top view of the disc cassette according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 47B is a top view of the disc cassette according to the seventh embodiment.

48A is a top view of the disc cassette according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 48B is a top view of the disc cassette according to the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 49 (a) is a top view of a liner peripheral part in the seventh embodiment, (b) is a top view of a liner peripheral part in the same example 7, and (c) is a top view of a liner peripheral part in the same example 7.

50 (a) is a top view of a liner peripheral portion in the seventh embodiment (b) is a top view of a liner peripheral portion in the seventh embodiment (c) is a cross-sectional view of a liner portion in the seventh embodiment d) is a cross-sectional view of the disk cassette according to the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 51 is A when the liner pin is inserted off in Example 7 of the present invention.
-A 'cross-sectional view

52 is an A- when the liner pin is inserted on in Example 7; FIG.
Cross section of plane A '

53 (a) is a liner pin insertion of of the seventh embodiment.
A transverse cross-sectional view of the AA ′ surface at the time of f is (b), which is A- at the time of inserting the liner pin of the seventh embodiment.
Cross section of plane A '

FIG. 54 (a) is a magnetic head mount o of the seventh embodiment.
A transverse cross-sectional view of the AA ′ surface at the time of ff is shown in FIG.
Cross section of plane A '

FIG. 55 (a) is a magnetic head mount o of the seventh embodiment.
A transverse cross-sectional view of the AA ′ surface at the time of ff is shown in FIG.
Cross section of plane A '

FIG. 56 is a top view of the recording medium of Example 7.

FIG. 57 (a) is a liner pin insertion of of the seventh embodiment.
A transverse cross-sectional view of the AA ′ surface at the time of f is (b), which is A- at the time of inserting the liner pin of the seventh embodiment.
Cross section of plane A '

FIG. 58 is a sectional view of the front part of the liner pin of the seventh embodiment (o
ff)

FIG. 59 is a sectional view of the front portion of the liner pin according to the seventh embodiment (o)
n hours)

FIG. 60 is a transverse cross-sectional view (of) of the liner pin according to the seventh embodiment.
f time)

FIG. 61 is a cross-sectional view (on of the liner pin of Example 7).
Time)

FIG. 62 is a sectional view of the front portion of the seventh embodiment when the liner pin is off.

FIG. 63 is a cross-sectional view of the front portion of the seventh embodiment when the liner pin is on.

FIG. 64 is a sectional view of the front portion of the seventh embodiment when the liner pin is off.

FIG. 65 is a sectional view of the front portion of the seventh embodiment when the liner pin is on.

FIG. 66 is a sectional view of the front portion of the seventh embodiment with the liner pin off.

FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view of the front portion of the seventh embodiment when the liner pin is off and not operating.

68A is a top view of the disc cassette according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 68B is a top view of the disc cassette according to the eighth embodiment.

69 (a) is a liner pin insertion of of the eighth embodiment of FIG.
Transverse sectional view of peripheral portion at time f (b) is a transverse sectional view of peripheral portion at the time of inserting the liner pin of the eighth embodiment

FIG. 70 (a) is a top view of the disc cassette of the eighth embodiment. (B) is a top view of the disc cassette of the eighth embodiment. (C) is a top view of the disc cassette of the eighth embodiment.

FIG. 71 is a transverse sectional view of the disc cassette and the liner pin according to the eighth embodiment.

72 (a) is a horizontal cross-sectional view of the liner pin peripheral portion of the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a horizontal cross-sectional view of the liner pin peripheral portion when the conventional cassette of the eighth embodiment is mounted.

73 (a) is a liner pin insertion of of the eighth embodiment of FIG.
Transverse sectional view of peripheral portion at time f (b) is a transverse sectional view of peripheral portion at the time of inserting the liner pin of the eighth embodiment

FIG. 74 (a) is a liner pin insertion of of the eighth embodiment.
Transverse sectional view of peripheral portion at time f (b) is a transverse sectional view of peripheral portion at the time of inserting the liner pin of the eighth embodiment

FIG. 75 is a top view of the disc cassette according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 76 is a lateral cross-sectional view of the peripheral portion of the ninth embodiment when the liner pin is inserted off.

77 is a lateral cross-sectional view of the peripheral portion of the ninth embodiment when the liner pin is inserted and turned on. FIG.

FIG. 78 (a) is a liner pin insertion of of the ninth embodiment.
Transverse sectional view of peripheral portion at time f (b) is a transverse sectional view of peripheral portion at the time of inserting the liner pin of the ninth embodiment

FIG. 79 (a) is a tracking principle diagram without correction in Embodiment 10 of the present invention (b) is a tracking principle diagram without correction in Embodiment 10

80A is a tracking state diagram of the optical head of the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 80B is a tracking state diagram of the optical head of the tenth embodiment.

81 (a) is a diagram of the eccentricity of the optical track of the disk of the tenth embodiment, (b) is a diagram of eccentricity of the optical track of the tenth embodiment, and (c) is a tracking error of the tenth embodiment. Signal illustration

82A is a tracking state diagram of the optical head of the tenth embodiment without correction, and FIG. 82B is a tracking state diagram of the optical head of the tenth embodiment after correction;

FIG. 83 is a diagram of a reference track of the tenth embodiment.

FIG. 84 (a) is a side view of the slider when the tenth embodiment is ON, and (b) is a side view of the slider when the tenth embodiment is OFF.

FIG. 85 (a) is a side view of the slider section of the tenth embodiment when the magnetic recording is off. (B) is a side view of the slider section of the tenth embodiment when the magnetic recording is on.

FIG. 86 is a correspondence diagram of disk positions and addresses according to the tenth embodiment.

FIG. 87 is a block diagram during magnetic recording in Example 11 of the present invention.

88A is a lateral cross-sectional view of the magnetic head of the eleventh embodiment, FIG. 88B is a bottom view of the magnetic head of the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 88C is a bottom view of another magnetic head of the eleventh embodiment. Figure

FIG. 89 is a spiral recording format diagram of the eleventh embodiment.

FIG. 90 is a recording format diagram of the guard band according to the eleventh embodiment.

FIG. 91 is a data structure diagram of the eleventh embodiment.

92A is a recording timing chart of the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 92B is a recording timing chart at the time of two-head simultaneous recording of the eleventh embodiment.

93 is a block diagram of the same example 11 at the time of reproduction. FIG.

FIG. 94 is a data layout diagram of the eleventh embodiment.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart of traverse control of the eleventh embodiment.

FIG. 96 is a cylindrical recording format diagram of the 11th embodiment.

FIG. 97 is a relationship diagram of the traverse gear rotation speed and radius of the eleventh embodiment.

FIG. 98 is an optical recording surface format diagram of the eleventh embodiment.

FIG. 99 is a recording format diagram in the case where the backward compatibility of the eleventh embodiment is provided.

FIG. 100 is a correspondence diagram of the optical recording surface and the magnetic recording surface of the eleventh embodiment.

101 is an overall perspective view of a recording medium in Example 12. FIG.

102 is an overall perspective view of the recording medium of the embodiment. FIG.

103 is a cross-sectional view in the film forming and printing process of the recording medium of the example. FIG.

104 is a cross-sectional view in the film forming and printing process of the recording medium of the example. FIG.

FIG. 105 is an overall perspective view of a coating process of the example.

FIG. 106 is a cross-sectional view of the recording medium in the coating transfer process of the example.

FIG. 107 is a manufacturing process diagram of the recording medium of the example.

FIG. 108 is a transverse cross-sectional view of the recording medium in the coating and transferring step of the recording medium of the example.

FIG. 109 is an overall perspective view of a step of applying the recording medium of the example.

110 is an overall block diagram of the recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 13. FIG.

111 is a lateral cross-sectional view of the magnetic head peripheral portion of the embodiment. FIG.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a head gap length and an attenuation amount (d) of the embodiment.
Relationship diagram with B)

FIG. 113 is a top view of the magnetic track of the example.

FIG. 114 is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic head peripheral portion of the embodiment.

FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view of the same embodiment when a recording medium is inserted.

FIG. 116 is a diagram showing the relationship between the distance between the optical pickup and the magnetic head and the amount of relative noise in Examples 12 and 13.

117 is a cross-sectional view of the head traverse portion in Embodiment 13. FIG.

118 is a top view of the head traverse portion in Embodiment 13. FIG.

FIG. 119 is a cross-sectional view of another head traverse portion in the thirteenth embodiment.

FIG. 120 is a cross-sectional view of another head traverse portion in the thirteenth embodiment.

121 is a diagram showing the magnetic field strength of various domestic products in Example 12. FIG.

122 is a recording format diagram of the recording medium in Example 13. FIG.

123 is a recording format diagram of the normal mode on the recording medium in Example 13. FIG.

FIG. 124 is a recording format diagram of the variable track pitch mode on the recording medium in Example 13.

FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram of compressing magnetic recording information using a reference table of optical recording information according to a thirteenth embodiment.

FIG. 126 is a cross-sectional view of the head traverse portion in the thirteenth embodiment.

FIG. 127 is a flowchart (part 1) of recording / reproducing in Embodiment 13.

FIG. 128 is a flowchart (part 2) of recording / reproducing in the thirteenth embodiment.

FIG. 129 is a configuration diagram of a noise detection head according to a thirteenth embodiment.

FIG. 130 is a configuration diagram of a magnetic sensor in Example 13.

131A is a lateral cross-sectional view showing the opened / closed state of the upper lid of the recording / reproducing apparatus of Embodiment 14 of the present invention. FIG. 131B is a top view of the printing surface of the recording medium of Embodiment 14 of the present invention.

[FIG. 132] Times of an optical recording / reproducing clock signal, a magnetic recording / reproducing signal clock signal, a magnetic reproducing signal, and a reproducing pulse first data string D1, a magnetic recording / reproducing signal of PWM, a reproducing pulse, and a second data string in Example 14 Relationship diagram

133 is a perspective view of an optical recording medium cartridge according to the fourteenth embodiment. FIG.

FIG. 134 is a block diagram of the entire recording / reproducing apparatus in the same Example 14.

FIG. 135 is a time relationship diagram of the rotational angular velocity ω of the recording medium of Example 14, the optical recording / reproducing clock signal, the magnetic recording / reproducing clock signal, the magnetic recording signal, and the recording wavelength λ of the magnetic recording signal.

FIG. 136 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 15 of the present invention.

FIG. 137 (a) A perspective view of the fifteenth embodiment when the cartridge is inserted (b) A perspective view of the fifteenth embodiment when the cartridge is fixed (c) A perspective view of the fifteenth embodiment when the cartridge is ejected

FIG. 138 (a) A perspective view of the same fifteenth embodiment when a cartridge is inserted (b) A perspective view of the same fifteenth embodiment when a cartridge is fixed (c) A perspective view of the same fifteenth embodiment when a cartridge is ejected

139 (a) Transverse sectional view of the same embodiment 15 when a cartridge is inserted (b) Transverse sectional view of the same embodiment 15 when a cartridge is fixed (c) Transverse sectional view of the same embodiment 15 when a cartridge is ejected

FIG. 140 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 16 of the present invention.

FIG. 141A is a perspective view of the sixteenth embodiment when the cartridge is inserted. FIG. 141B is a perspective view of the sixteenth embodiment when the cartridge is fixed.

142A is a perspective view of the sixteenth embodiment when the cartridge is inserted, FIG. 142B is a perspective view of the sixteenth embodiment when the cartridge is fixed, and FIG. 142C is a perspective view of the sixteenth embodiment when the cartridge is ejected.

[FIG. 143] FIG. 143 (a) A horizontal cross-sectional view of the 16th embodiment when the cartridge is inserted. (B) A horizontal cross-sectional view of the 16th embodiment when the cartridge is fixed.

FIG. 144 (a) is an explanatory diagram of the same example 14; (b) is an explanatory diagram of the same example 14

145 (a) Explanatory diagram of Example 14 (b) Explanatory diagram of Example 14 (c) Explanatory diagram of Example 14

FIG. 146 (a) Sectional view of recording medium of Example 14 (b) Sectional view of recording medium of Example 14

FIG. 147 is a block diagram of key unlocking according to the seventeenth embodiment.

FIG. 148 is a flowchart of the key unlocking program of the seventeenth embodiment.

FIG. 149 is a block diagram of key unlocking according to the eighteenth embodiment.

FIG. 150 is a flowchart of unlocking the key according to the eighteenth embodiment.

151] FIG. 151 is a block diagram of a personal computer and a CD ROM drive of Embodiment 19.

152 is a diagram of an optical address table and a magnetic address table of the recording medium of Example 19; FIG.

[FIG. 153] FIG. 153 is a block diagram of a one-drive type CDROM drive in the personal computer of Embodiment 19.

154 (a) A diagram showing an address table of an optical file and a magnetic file of Example 19 (b) A diagram showing an address link table of two files of Example 19

FIG. 155 is a cross-sectional view of the optical recording medium of Example 19

FIG. 156 is a flowchart of initial startup of the optical disc in Example 19;

157 (a) Program flow chart for bug correction of CDROM software of Example 20 (b) Diagram showing address data table of magnetic file and optical file of Example 20 (c) Block of bug correction section of Example 20 Figure

FIG. 158 is a flowchart of a program for correcting a bug in the CDROM software of the twenty-first embodiment. (B) A diagram showing a data correction table of the twenty-first embodiment.

FIG. 159 is an overall block diagram of a computer and a disk drive of Embodiment 22.

160 is a figure showing the file structure of the computer of Example 22; FIG.

FIG. 161 is a flowchart of a virtual file playing operation of the computer according to the twenty-second embodiment.

FIG. 162 is a flowchart of a virtual file rewriting operation of the computer system according to the twenty-second embodiment.

FIG. 163 is a flowchart of a virtual file new creation operation of the computer system according to the twenty-second embodiment.

164 (a) Main computer screen display diagram of the computer of Example 22 (b) Main computer screen display diagram of the computer of Example 22 (c) Main computer screen display diagram of the computer of Example 22 d) Screen display diagram of the main computer of the computer of Example 22

FIG. 165 is a display screen diagram of a computer in the case of the two-drive system according to the twenty-second embodiment.

166 (a) Main computer screen display diagram of Example 22 (b) Main computer screen display diagram of Example 22 (c) Main computer screen display diagram of Example 22 (d) Example 22 Main computer screen display

FIG. 167 (a) Screen display diagram on the sub-computer side with the physical file of the twenty-second embodiment (b) Screen display diagram showing the existence of the physical file on the sub-computer side with the physical file of the twenty-second embodiment

168] FIG. 168 is a data relation diagram when a main computer and a sub computer in Example 22 are connected to a network.

FIG. 169 is a screen display diagram of the main computer of Example 22

170 is a screen display diagram of the computer according to the seventeenth embodiment. FIG.

FIG. 171 is an information recording layout diagram of the recording medium in the twenty-second embodiment.

172 (a) A perspective view of a magnetic head according to a thirteenth embodiment (b) A cross-sectional view of a magnetic head according to the thirteenth embodiment (c) A cross-sectional view of a magnetic head according to the thirteenth embodiment

FIG. 173 (a) A perspective view of a magnetic head according to a thirteenth embodiment (b) A transverse sectional view of a magnetic head according to the thirteenth embodiment

FIG. 174 (a) A perspective view of a magnetic head according to a thirteenth embodiment (b) A cross-sectional view of a magnetic head according to the thirteenth embodiment

FIG. 175 (a) A perspective view of a magnetic head according to a thirteenth embodiment (b) A transverse sectional view of a magnetic head according to the thirteenth embodiment

[FIG. 176] (a) A perspective view of the noise detection coil in the thirteenth embodiment. (B) A lateral cross-sectional view of the noise detection coil in the thirteenth embodiment.

FIG. 177 (a) A perspective view of a noise detection coil in the thirteenth embodiment (b) A block diagram of a noise detection method in the thirteenth embodiment

FIG. 178 (a) A perspective view of a noise detection coil in the thirteenth embodiment (b) A block diagram of a noise detection method in the thirteenth embodiment

FIG. 179 is a frequency distribution diagram of a reproduction signal before noise cancellation and a reproduction signal after noise cancellation in the thirteenth embodiment.

180 is a block diagram of a magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 22. FIG.

FIG. 181 is a block diagram of a magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus according to a twenty-third embodiment.

182 (a) Top view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (b) Top view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23

[FIG. 183] (a) A horizontal cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in the twenty-third embodiment (b) A cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in the twenty-third embodiment (c) A cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in the twenty-third embodiment ( d) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (e) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23

184 (a) is a diagram showing a data structure of a recording medium in Example 23. (b) is a diagram showing a data structure of a recording medium in Example 23. FIG. 184 is a diagram showing a data structure of a recording medium in Example 23.

185 (a) Top view of recording medium in Example 23 (b) Transverse sectional view of recording medium in Example 23 (c) Transverse sectional view of recording medium in Example 23 (d) Recording in Example 23 (E) Transverse sectional view of recording medium in Example 23

186 (a) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (b) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (c) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 d) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (e) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23

187 (a) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (b) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (c) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 d) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (e) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23

188 (a) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (b) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (c) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 d) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (e) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (f) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23

189 (a) Transverse sectional view of recording medium in Example 23 (b) Transverse sectional view of recording medium in Example 23 (c) Transverse sectional view of recording medium in Example 23 (d) In Example 23 Diagram of track pitch calculation formula

FIG. 190 (a) A block diagram of a magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in a twenty-third embodiment.

191 (a) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (b) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (c) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 d) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (e) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23

FIG. 192 (a) A horizontal cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in the twenty-third embodiment (b) A cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in the twenty-third embodiment (c) A cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in the twenty-third embodiment d) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (e) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23

193 (a) Top view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (b) Top view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23

194 (a) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (b) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (c) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 d) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (e) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23

FIG. 195 is a relationship diagram between the distance from the magnetic head and the strength of the DC magnetic field in Example 23.

FIG. 196 is a horizontal sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus according to the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 196 is a horizontal sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus according to the twenty-third embodiment.

FIG. 197 is a top view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus according to Embodiment 23.

198 (a) Transverse sectional view of magnetic head in Example 23 (b) Top view of magnetic head in Example 23 (c) Transverse sectional view of magnetic head in Example 23 (d) Magnetic field in Example 23 Top view of head

199 (a) Top view of recording medium in Example 23 (b) Enlarged top view of recording medium in Example 23 (c) Transverse sectional view of recording medium in Example 23

FIG. 200 is a block diagram of a magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23.

201A is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus according to the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 201B is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus according to the twenty-third embodiment. d) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23.

202 is a block diagram of the recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 1. FIG.

FIG. 203 (a) Period T, 1.5 in the first embodiment
T, 2T occurrence frequency distribution chart (b) Occurrence frequency distribution chart of periods T, 1.5T, 2T in the first embodiment

FIG. 204 is a diagram showing the relationship between the maximum length of burst correction and the number of corrected symbols in the CD standard.

205 is a diagram showing a fractional distance of data on a medium in Example 1. FIG.

206 is a diagram showing the relationship between the data amount of error correction code and the error rate in Embodiment 1. FIG.

207] FIG. 207 is an array conversion diagram of interleaving according to the first embodiment. [FIG. 207] FIG. 207 is a diagram illustrating a distribution distance of data by interleaving according to the first embodiment.

208 is a block diagram of a deinterleave unit in Embodiment 1. FIG.

209 (a) Reed-Solomon E in Example 1 FIG.
Block diagram of CC encoder (b) Block diagram of Reed-Solomon ECC decoder in the first embodiment

FIG. 210 is a flowchart of the error correction program according to the first embodiment.

211 is a block diagram of the recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 1. FIG.

212A is an array conversion diagram of interleaving according to the first embodiment. FIG. 212B is a diagram illustrating a distribution distance of data by interleaving according to the first embodiment.

213] FIG. 213 is a diagram showing a time interval and a distance of a code of a CD subcode in Embodiment 1. [FIG.

FIG. 214 is a diagram showing a magnetic track-optical address correspondence table in the fourteenth embodiment.

215] FIG. 215 is a block diagram of a subcode synchronization signal detection unit and a magnetic recording unit in Embodiment 14. [FIG.

[FIG. 216] A block diagram of magnetic recording in the recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 14.

FIG. 217 is a block diagram of the recording / reproducing apparatus according to the fourteenth embodiment during magnetic reproduction.

218 (a) Time chart of optical reproduction synchronization signal in Example 14 (b) Time chart of ON / OFF of magnetic recording operation in Example 14 (c) Time chart of magnetic recording synchronization signal in Example 14 (d) ) Optical reproduction operation ON / OFF time chart in Example 14 (e) Optical reproduction synchronization signal time chart in Example 14 (f) Magnetic reproduction operation ON / OFF time chart in Example 14 (g) Example 14 (H) Time chart of magnetic reproduction data in Example 14

FIG. 219 is a diagram showing an eccentricity amount of a disc in the CD standard.

FIG. 220 is a file structure diagram in the twenty-second embodiment.

FIG. 221 is a block diagram of a disk medium of the present invention

FIG. 222 is a block diagram of an apparatus for recording / reproducing on / from the disk medium of FIG. 221.

223 FIG. 221 in the embodiment of FIG. 25 of the present invention.
Configuration diagram of the device for recording and reproducing on the disk medium of the figure

FIG. 224 is the same as FIG. 221 in the embodiment of FIG. 25 of the present invention.
Configuration diagram of the device for recording and reproducing on the disk medium of the figure

FIG. 225 is a block diagram of a conventional disk medium

FIG. 226 is a block diagram of a conventional data sector.

FIG. 227 is an explanatory diagram of a conventional error correction code generation method.

FIG. 228 is a block diagram of a data sector of the present invention

FIG. 229 is a block diagram of a data sector of the present invention

[FIG. 230] An explanatory diagram of an error correction code generation method of the present invention

FIG. 231 is a second configuration diagram of the disk medium of the present invention

FIG. 232 is an explanatory diagram of a relationship between a logical sector and a data sector.

FIG. 233 is an explanatory diagram of an error correction code generation method of the present invention

FIG. 234 is an explanatory diagram of an error correction code generation method of the present invention

FIG. 235 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus of the first invention.

FIG. 236 is a detailed configuration diagram of the recording / reproducing apparatus of the first invention.

FIG. 237 is a diagram showing measurement data of the amount of magnetic flux leaked from the optical head.

FIG. 238 is a configuration diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus of the second invention.

FIG. 239 is a block diagram of the recording / reproducing apparatus of the third invention.

240 is a detailed view of the clutch mechanism of the recording / reproducing apparatus of the third invention. FIG.

FIG. 241 is a configuration diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus of a fourth invention.

FIG. 242 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus of a fifth invention.

FIG. 243 is a configuration diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus of a fifth invention.

FIG. 244 is a structural diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus including an optical recording area and a magnetic recording area of a conventional example.

FIG. 245 is a block diagram of a head positioning device of the 32nd embodiment.

FIG. 246 is a diagram showing track 0 of the recording / reproducing medium.

249] Offset track 0 of the recording / reproducing medium
Showing

FIG. 248 is a block diagram of a head positioning device of the 33rd embodiment.

FIG. 249 is a block diagram of a head positioning device of the 34th embodiment.

250A is a diagram showing the position of the objective lens of the optical head in the thirty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 250B is a diagram showing the position of the objective lens of the optical head in the thirty-fourth embodiment.

FIG. 251 is a block diagram of a head positioning device in which an optical head and a magnetic head with an offset added are mounted in the 34th embodiment;

FIG. 252 is a diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus in a thirty-sixth embodiment.

[FIG. 253] A flow chart diagram of a magnetic track access method and a magnetic recording cueing method in Embodiment 13.

[FIG. 254] (a) A top view of a medium contained in a cartridge in Example 23. (b) A diagram showing elevation of a magnetic head in Example 23 (c) A diagram showing elevation of a magnetic head in Example 23 (d) Example 23 is a view showing the elevation of the magnetic head in FIG. 23. (e) A view showing the elevation of the magnetic head in Example 23. (f) A view showing the evacuation of the magnetic head in Example 23.

[FIG. 255] (a) A lateral cross-sectional view of a medium with a media identifier according to a twelfth embodiment. (B) Diagram showing a specific physical structure of the media identifier with a magnetic layer recorded in the optical recording section according to the twelfth embodiment.

FIG. 256 is a file configuration diagram when an IC card medium is used in Example 22.

FIG. 257 is a file configuration diagram in the case of using a partial ROM type optical disk in Example 22.

[FIG. 258] FIG. 258 is a perspective view of a recording / reproducing apparatus in a twenty-third embodiment.

[FIG. 259] A block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus in a twenty-third embodiment.

[FIG. 260] A data structure diagram of a video CD of the recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23.

FIG. 261 is a flowchart of the recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23.

FIG. 262 is a diagram of menu screen number / selection number table of recording / reproducing apparatus in embodiment 23.

FIG. 263 (a) Data format diagram of conventional video CD (b) Data format diagram of conventional video CD

FIG. 264 is a diagram showing optical address search information of the recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23.

FIG. 265 is a data structure diagram of the recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 23.

[Explanation of symbols]

1 recording / reproducing apparatus 2 recording medium 3 magnetic recording layer 4 optical recording layer 5 light transmitting layer 6 optical head 7 optical recording block 8 magnetic head 8a main magnetic pole 8b auxiliary magnetic pole 8c head cap 8e uniform magnetic field area 8m magnetic field modulation magnetic head 8s for canceling Magnetic head 9 Magnetic recording block 17 Motor 18 Optical head 19 Head stand 23 Head movement actuator 23a Traverse actuator 24a Traverse movement circuit 34 Memory 34a Memory (for system) 37 Optical recording circuit 37a Magnetic field modulation circuit 38a Clock reproduction circuit 40 Coil 40a Magnetic field modulation Coil 40b Magnetic recording coil 40c Tap 40d Tap 40e Tap 41 Slider 42 Disk cassette 43 Printing base layer 44 Printing area 45 Printing 46 Pit 47 Substrate 48 Light reflection layer 49 Printing Ink 50 Protective layer 51 Arrow 52 Optical recording signal 54 Lens 57 Light emitting part 60 Adhesive layer 61 Magnetic recording signal 65 Optical track 66 Focus 67 Magnetic track 67a Recording magnetic track 67b Reproducing magnetic track 67s Servo magnetic track 67f Guard band 67g Guard band 67x Cleaning track 69 High μ magnetic layer 70 Head gap 70a Recording head gap 70b Reproducing head gap 81 Interference layer 84 Reflective film 85 Modulating magnetic field 85a Magnetic flux 85b Magnetic flux 150 Coupling portion 201 Discrimination step 202 Reproduction step 203 Reproduction transcription step 204 Reproduction only step 205 Recording transfer step 206 Recording step 207 Transfer step 210 Degaussing area 210a Degaussing area 210b Degaussing area 301 Shutter 302 Head hole 303 Line Gnar hole 304 Liner 305 Liner support 305a Movable part 305b Sub liner support 305c Liner lifting part 307 Groove 307a Liner drive groove 310 Liner pin 311 Liner pin guide 312 Pin drive lever 313 Recognition hole 314 Protection pin 315 Liner drive part 316 Pin axis 317 Spring 318 Connection part 319 Pin shutter 320 Optical address 321a Center 321b Center 321c Center 322 Optical data row 323 Address 324 Data 325 Guard band 326 Track group 327 Block 328 Track data 328 Sync signal 329 Address 330 Pacty 331 Data 333 Modulation separation circuit Circuit 335 Disk circuit angle detection section 336 Eccentricity correction amount memory 337 No signal section 338 Traverse control unit 339 Optical address / magnetic address correspondence table 340 Head amplifier 341 Demodulator 342 Error check unit 343 Data separation unit 344 AND circuit 345 Record data 346 Non-light address area 347 Optical address area 348 Magnetic TOC area 349 Track locus 350 Head reproducing unit 351 Memory Data 352 Coating Material Fountain 353 Coating Material Transfer Roll 354 Intaglio Drum 355 Etching Section 356 Scriber 357 Soft Transfer Roll 358 Coating Section 360 Magnetic Shield 361 Resin Section 362 Random Magnetic Field Generator 363 Traverse Schakut 363b Magnetic Head Traverse Shakch 364 Position Reference part 365 Disc lock part 366 Traverse connecting part 367 Traverse gear 367c Magnetic head traverse gear 368 Reference table 369 Sync part 370 Recording format 371 Track number part 372 Data part 373 CRC part 374 Gap part 375 Connecting part guide part 376 Disk cleaning part 377 Magnetic head cleaning part 378 Noise canceller 380 Disk cleaning part connecting part 381 Magnetic sensor 382 Optical Reproduction clock signal 383 Magnetic clock signal 384 Magnetic recording signal 385 Discrimination window time 386 Optical sensor 387 Optical mark 387a Bar code 388 Light transmitting portion 389 Upper lid 390 Cassette pig 391 Magnetic surface shutter 392 Shutter connecting portion 393 Cassette pig rotating shaft 394 Cassette Insertion port 395 Tape 396 Label section 397 Buzzer 398 Magnetic recording area 399 Screen printer 400 bar Code printing machine 401 High Hc section 402 Magnetic section 402a Spatial section 403 Magnetic section 404 Key management table 405 (step point) 406 Key release decoder 407 Voice expansion block 408 Personal computer 409 Hard disk 410 Installation step 411 Application 412 OS 413 BIOS 414 Drive 415 Interface 416 421 Optical File 422 Magnetic File 436 Network BIOS 437 LAN Network 447 447a Flowchart Step 448 Corrected Data 449 Display 450 Keypad 451 Error Correction Step 452 Parity 453 C1 Parity 454 C2 Parity 455 Index 456 Subcode Sync Detector 457 Index Part 4 58 Frequency divider 459 Magnetic synchronization signal detection section 460 Shortest / longest pulse detection section 461 Pseudo optical synchronization signal generation section 462 Pseudo magnetic synchronization signal generation section 463 Optical synchronization signal detector 464 Frequency division / multiplier 465 Changeover switch 466 Waveform shaping Part 467 Clock reproduction part 468 Media identifier 469 Optical address information 470 Data 514 Spring 514a Head elevating connecting means 514b Head elevating prohibiting means 514c Optical head running area 516 Loading motor 517 Loading gear 518 Tray moving gear 519 Head elevator 520 Tray 521 Upper lid Opening / closing axis 522 Menu screen / selection number table 523 Playback control information 524 Flowchart step 525 List ID offset table 526 Optical search information 527 Magnetic Latch search information 600 Disk medium 601 Spindle motor 602 Motor control circuit 605 R / W circuit 606 Actuator 608 Controller 609 Recording / reproducing head 610 Data encoder / decoder 613 Clock generator 616 Optical head 618 User data 619 Error correction code 625 Data sector 623 Identifier Area 624 Data area 620, 621, 622, 626, 627, 628 Z
ONE 901 Magnetic head 902 Optical head unit 903 Magnetic area signal processing means 904 Optical area signal processing means 905 Signal processing means 906 Leakage magnetic flux 907 Focusing coil 908 Tracking coil 909 Magnetic recording / reproducing means 910 Focusing control means 911 Tracking control means 912 Optical signal reproduction Processing means 913 Magnetic recording / reproducing signal 914 Focusing control signal 915 Tracking control signal 916 Optical reproducing signal 920 Distance between optical head part and magnetic head 921a Lead screw 921b Lead screw 923a Gear A 923b Gear B 923c Gear C 923d Transmission gear D 924 Carriage 925 Hub 926a Feed lead screw for optical head 926b Feed gear A 927a Feed lead for magnetic head Screw 927b Feed gear B 928 Transmission gear C 940 Clutch mechanism 940a Solenoid 940b Gear lifting mechanism 940c Lifting gear 940d Intermediate gear 940g Guide groove 940f Clutch portion supporting member 960 Spindle motor 961 Guide shaft 962 Optical head carriage 963 Link mechanism supporting member 964 965 Rotation axis 966 Magnetic head moving means 967 Magnetic head drive connecting / disconnecting mechanism 968 Optical head moving means 969 Optical head drive connecting / disconnecting mechanism 970 Head drive means 971 Drive control means 972 Magnetic head drive control signal 973 Optical head drive control signal 974 Drive control signal 975 Coupling magnet 976 Guide mechanism 977 Optical head carriage 978 Slide mechanism 980 Optical head part 981 Magnetic head 982 Optical Recording medium having recording area and magnetic recording area 983 Lead screw 984 Feed motor 985 Connecting arm 986 Support member 987 Optical head carriage 988 Spindle motor 989 Optical recording area 990 Magnetic recording area 1001 Non-erasable optical reproduction surface (commonly called CD- ROM medium surface) 1002 magnetic recording / reproducing surface 1003 spindle motor 1004 optical head 1005 magnetic head 1006 optical reproducing means 1007 magnetic recording / reproducing means 1008 optical head control means 1009 positioning means 1010 disk position information detecting means 1011 magnetic head control means and optical head operation Means 1012 Index detecting means 1013 Magnetic head positioning control means and optical head operating means 1014 Optical head 1015 Drive circuit 1020 Absolute time 0 seconds in program area Tracks including 1021 Program area 1022 Lead-in area 1023 Origin of track including track 0 1025 Origin of offset track including track 0 1031 R / W means 1032 Data processing means 1033 Signal processing means 1034 Head positioning control means 1035 Motor control means 1036 Switch means 1037 Frequency divider 1040 Housing of optical head 14 1041 Semiconductor laser 1042 Objective lens 1043, 1044 Objective lens support mechanism 1045, 1046 Objective lens support mechanism 1051 Magnetic head with offset added from position opposite optical head 1080 Tracking control signal Generation circuit 1081 Low-pass filter (commonly known as LPF) 1082 Kick command circuit

 ─────────────────────────────────────────────────── ─── Continuation of the front page (31) Priority claim number Japanese Patent Application No. 5-205682 (32) Priority date Hei 5 (1993) July 27 (33) Country of priority claim Japan (JP) (31) Priority Claim No. Japanese Patent Application No. 5-297504 (32) Priority Date No. 5 (1993) November 2 (33) Country of priority claim Japan (JP) (31) Priority claim number Japanese Patent Application No. 5-314114 (32) Priority Hihei 5 (1993) November 19 (33) Priority claiming country Japan (JP) (31) Priority claim number Japanese Patent Application No. 5-333874 (32) Priority Day Hei 5 (1993) December 27 (33) ) Priority claiming country Japan (JP) (31) Priority claiming number Japanese Patent Application No. 5-333392 (32) Priority date Hei 5 (1993) December 27 (33) Priority claiming country Japan (JP) (31) Priority claim number Japanese Patent Application No. 5-333403 (32) Priority date 5 (1993) December 27 (33) Country of priority claim Japan (JP) (31) Priority claim number Japanese Patent Application No. 5-349972 (32) )priority Hihei 5 (1993) December 27 (33) Priority claiming country Japan (JP) (72) Inventor Tsuyoshi Yoshiura 1006 Kadoma, Kadoma City, Osaka Prefecture Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. (72) Toshikazu Shinmon Osaka 1006, Kadoma, Kadoma, Fuchu, Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. (72) Inventor, Satoshi Tan, 1006, Kadoma, Kadoma, Osaka Prefecture

Claims (38)

[Claims] 1. A disk type recording medium having a transparent substrate and an optical recording layer and a magnetic recording layer formed on one side of the transparent substrate is mounted, and light from a light source is transferred by an optical head unit and an optical head moving unit. An image is formed on the optical recording layer from the transparent substrate side, and the signal of the optical recording layer is reproduced by an optical recording / reproducing circuit, and a magnetic head portion and a magnetic head moving portion are provided in the peripheral portion of the recording medium to perform the magnetic recording. In a recording / reproducing apparatus for performing magnetic recording or reproduction of a layer by a magnetic recording / reproducing circuit, the optical head is arranged so that a light beam of the optical head is imaged on an optical track having specific address information of an optical recording section. The magnetic head is moved to a specific magnetic track on the magnetic recording unit by the magnetic head moving unit while being moved by the moving unit and referring to the moving amount of the optical head. Recording / playback device. 2. A disk-shaped recording medium having a transparent substrate and an optical recording layer and a magnetic recording layer formed on one side of the transparent substrate is mounted, and light from a light source is transmitted by an optical head unit and an optical head moving unit. An image is formed on the optical recording layer from the transparent substrate side, and the signal of the optical recording layer is reproduced by an optical recording / reproducing circuit, and a magnetic head portion is provided on the magnetic recording layer side of the recording medium. 1.5 μm in a recording / reproducing apparatus that performs magnetic recording or reproduction by a magnetic recording / reproducing circuit.
A recording / reproducing apparatus using a magnetic head having a head gap of not less than 200 μm. 3. The recording / reproducing apparatus according to claim 2, wherein a slider portion having a plane area parallel to the magnetic recording surface of the recording medium is provided on the magnetic recording surface side of the magnetic head portion. . 4. A disk-type recording medium having a transparent substrate and an optical recording layer and a magnetic recording layer formed on one side of the transparent substrate is mounted, and light from a light source is transferred by an optical head unit and an optical head moving unit. An image is formed on the optical recording layer from the transparent substrate side, and a signal of the optical recording layer is reproduced by an optical recording / reproducing circuit, and a magnetic head unit and a magnetic head moving unit are provided on the side opposite to the optical reading side of the recording medium. In a recording / reproducing apparatus for performing magnetic recording or reproduction on the magnetic recording layer by a magnetic recording / reproducing circuit, the optical head unit is moved to an optical track having specific address information recorded in the optical recording unit, Magnetic head moving means for moving the magnetic head portion in conjunction with each other causes the magnetic head portion to access a magnetic track substantially on the back side of the specific optical track,
Magnetic recording or reproduction is carried out.
The recording / reproducing apparatus described. 5. A disk-shaped recording medium having a transparent substrate and an optical recording layer and a magnetic recording layer formed on one side of the transparent substrate is mounted, and light from a light source is transmitted by an optical head unit and an optical head moving unit. An image is formed on the optical recording layer from the transparent substrate side, and a signal of the optical recording layer is reproduced by an optical recording / reproducing circuit, and a magnetic head unit and a magnetic head moving unit are provided on the side opposite to the optical reading side of the recording medium. In a recording / reproducing apparatus for performing magnetic recording or reproduction on the magnetic recording layer by a magnetic recording / reproducing circuit, a detecting unit for detecting noise mixed in a magnetic reproduction signal from the drive unit of the optical head is provided,
A negative signal of the noise signal is added to the magnetic reproduction signal by an addition ratio A.
A recording / reproducing apparatus characterized by adding in. 6. A recording track in which a plurality of digital data are concentrically recorded on a disk-shaped recording surface, and all of the recording tracks are W-divided at substantially equal angles in the circumferential direction (W is an integer of 1 or more). Data sectors, N zones of the disk-shaped recording surface divided into N in the radial direction (N is an integer of 2 or more) and R (R is an integer of 1 or more) recording tracks, and the data. The sector is provided with an identifier area for identifying the data sector and a data area for recording / reproducing user data, and the data capacity of the data area of the adjacent zone is larger in the outer zone than in the inner zone. A disk medium having a large number of M bytes (M is an integer of 1 or more). 7. A disk medium having a recording surface according to claim 6 on one side and an optical medium controllable on the other side so that the tangential velocity is constant. 8. The disk medium according to claim 6, wherein W is 1. 9. A recording / reproducing apparatus for a disk medium according to claim 6, wherein a head for recording / reproducing data, a motor for rotating the disk medium at a constant rotation speed, and a recording signal for the head are output. And a clock generation circuit for generating a clock signal for instructing the speed of writing data to the recording circuit. The clock generation circuit is M / Y when the capacity of the data sector in the innermost zone is Y bytes. A recording / reproducing device characterized by being variable in resolution. 10. A recording / reproducing apparatus for a disk medium according to claim 6, wherein a head for recording / reproducing data, a recording circuit for outputting a recording signal to the head, and a speed for writing data to the recording circuit. And a motor for rotating the disk medium, and a motor control circuit for controlling the number of rotations of the motor, wherein the motor control circuit is an innermost track. Is V0, the data capacity is Y bytes, and the innermost zone is zone 1, the rotation speed of zone n (n is an integer of 1 or more) is Y / {Y + M × (n-1)}.
A recording / reproducing device characterized in that it can be changed to. 11. A recording / reproducing apparatus for a disk medium according to claim 7, wherein a head for recording / reproducing data, a recording circuit for outputting a recording signal to the head, and a speed for writing data to the recording circuit. A clock generation circuit for generating a clock signal of a constant frequency for instructing the operation, an optical head for reproducing an optical medium, a motor for rotating the disk medium, and a motor control circuit for controlling the rotation speed of the motor, The recording / reproducing apparatus is characterized in that the motor control circuit rotates the disk medium by using a reproduction signal from the optical head. 12. The disk medium according to claim 6, wherein the identifier area is provided with a code indicating the recording capacity of the data area. 13. The disk medium according to claim 6 or 7, wherein data for error correction is recorded in the data area. 14. The disk medium according to claim 13, wherein the data for error correction recorded in the data area is generated by being interleaved. 15. When the interleave length is P, M is P
15. The disk medium according to claim 14, which is an integer multiple of. 16. The disk medium according to claim 14, wherein the interrib length P is different in the inner peripheral zone and the outer peripheral zone. 17. The disk medium according to claim 16, wherein when the frame length is F, M is F. 18. An optical head for performing optical reproduction or recording / reproduction on a recording medium having an optically read-only or recordable / reproducible portion and a magnetically recordable / reproducible portion, and magnetically recording. A recording / reproducing apparatus having a magnetic head for reproducing, wherein the optical head and the magnetic head are moved by one or a plurality of drive sources, wherein the optical head and the magnetic head are used at least during magnetic recording / reproducing. The recording / reproducing apparatus is characterized in that the magnetic recording areas are arranged at a distance of 10 mm or more from the center position of the optical head in the magnetic recording areas facing each other with the recording medium sandwiched therebetween. 19. The moving means for moving the optical head and the moving means for the magnetic head are formed as separate members, and are spirally grooved as drive transmitting means for movement. A recording / reproducing apparatus characterized in that it is based on an axis. 20. The movement of the optical head and the movement of the magnetic head are performed by the same drive source in claim 18,
A recording / reproducing apparatus characterized in that a clutch mechanism is provided between at least one of the head moving means and the drive source. 21. A recording medium according to claim 18, further comprising means for rotating said recording medium in an in-plane direction, wherein said moving means of said optical head is movable in a radial direction with respect to a rotation center, and said magnetic head is A recording / reproducing apparatus characterized in that the recording / reproducing apparatus is movable in a tangential direction with respect to a radial direction. 22. The recording / reproducing apparatus according to claim 21, wherein the magnetic head moving means is interlocked with the moving means of the optical head, or has an interrupting mechanism for enabling independent movement. 23. Non-erasable first data information provided on one surface of a rotatable and removable medium, and second recordable and reproducible data information provided on concentric tracks on the other surface. An optical head facing the surface on which the non-erasable first data information is provided, a magnetic head facing the surface on which the recordable and reproducible second data information is provided, and the non-erasable first Optical reproducing means for reproducing the data information, magnetic recording / reproducing means for recording / reproducing the second recordable / reproducible second data information, and positioning means for mounting the optical head and the magnetic head together and moving the head. , An optical head control means for controlling the optical head to follow the first data information, and an index means for detecting that the medium has made one round, and positioning control of the magnetic head for desired second data information. Shi At the time of setting, the positioning means is access-controlled in the radial direction of the medium by using the time information from the data start position to the data end position of the first data information to obtain the target second data. When the magnetic head is controlled so as to follow the data information of 1, the low frequency component of the relative positional deviation amount between the first data information and the optical head is returned to the positioning means and the optical head is moved in synchronization with the index. A head positioning device having magnetic head control means for controlling the head positioning device. 24. Non-erasable first data information provided on one surface of a rotatable and removable medium, and second recordable and reproducible data information provided on concentric tracks on the other surface. An optical head having a drive mechanism that faces the surface on which the non-erasable first data information is provided and has a finely movable objective lens in the radial direction of the medium; and the second data information that can be recorded and reproduced. A magnetic head facing the surface provided with,
An optical reproducing means for reproducing the non-erasable first data information, a magnetic recording / reproducing means for recording / reproducing the recordable / reproducible second data information, and an optical head and a magnetic head are mounted together. Positioning means for moving the head and optical head control means for controlling the optical head to follow the first data information are provided. When positioning the magnetic head for the desired second data information, the first Using the time information from the data start position to the data end position of the data information, the positioning means is caused to access in the radial direction of the medium, and when the optical head reaches the target position, the objective lens is moved to the objective lens. A head position including magnetic head positioning control means for repositioning the positioning means so as to settle near the center of the drive range of the drive mechanism. Decided apparatus. 25. When the optical head reaches the target position, when the objective lens is settled near the center of the drive range of the objective lens drive mechanism, the drive current of the objective lens is monitored and the average value of the drive current is calculated. 25. The magnetic head positioning device according to claim 24, further comprising magnetic head positioning control means for setting the value to near zero. 26. When the optical head reaches the target position, when the objective lens is settled in the vicinity of the center of the drive range of the objective lens drive mechanism, position detecting means for detecting the position of the objective lens is provided, and the objective lens is provided. 25. The magnetic head positioning device according to claim 24, further comprising magnetic head positioning control means for controlling for settling in the vicinity of the center of the driving range of the objective lens according to the instruction of the position detecting means. 27. A non-erasable first data information is provided on an information track on one side of a rotatable and removable medium, and a second data information which can be magnetically recorded and reproduced is provided on an information track on the other side. A recording / reproducing medium characterized in that the starting point of the second data information track is provided on the inner peripheral side of the medium. 28. The starting point of the track of the second data information is provided on the side on which the second data information is recorded and reproduced at the position where the data of the first data information starts. Recording and reproducing medium. 29. The starting point of the track of the second data information is provided at a position offset to the outer periphery from the position where the data of the first data information is started, and on the surface side on which the second data information is recorded and reproduced. The recording / reproducing medium according to claim 27. 30. A non-erasable first data information is provided on an information track of one side of a rotatable and removable medium, and a second data information capable of magnetic recording and reproduction is provided on an information track of the other side. A recording / reproducing medium characterized in that medium-specific information such as the size of the medium and the capacity of the second data information is recorded on the medium. 31. The recording / reproducing medium according to claim 30, wherein information specific to the medium such as the size of the medium and the capacity of the second data information is recorded at the starting point of the track of the second data information. . 32. The recording / reproducing medium according to claim 30, wherein medium-specific information such as the size of the medium and the capacity of the second data information is recorded in the first data information. 33. A non-erasable first data information is provided on an information track on one side of a rotatable and removable medium, and a second data information which can be magnetically recorded and reproduced is provided on an information track on the other side. A recording / reproducing medium characterized in that at least two information tracks are provided in the second data information from the starting point of the tracks of the second data information. 34. The recording / reproducing medium according to claim 33, wherein the track of the information of the second data information has a constant track pitch. 35. When reproducing data information from a recordable and reproducible concentric circular track provided on one surface of a rotatable and removable medium, the periodic information contained in the reproduced data information is used as a basis. A recording / reproducing apparatus characterized by controlling rotation of a medium. 36. When data information is recorded on a recordable and reproducible concentric circular track provided on one surface of a rotatable removable media, it is included in the non-erasable data information provided on the other surface. A recording / reproducing apparatus characterized by controlling the rotation of a medium based on periodic information that is being generated. 37. When data information is recorded on a recordable / reproducible concentric circular track provided on one surface of a rotatable removable media, it is included in the non-erasable data information provided on the other surface. A recording / reproducing apparatus characterized in that the data information is recorded on the basis of the periodic information that is present. 38. When recording data information on a recordable and reproducible concentric circular track provided on one surface of a rotatable and removable medium, cycle information of a frequency generator provided on a motor for rotating the medium is used. 36. The recording / reproducing apparatus according to claim 35, wherein the motor is rotationally controlled based on the recording / reproducing apparatus.